GllINASTS AND GYMNASTICS. 



LOXrOK 

PEI>-TED BY SPOTTIS-ff-OODE AlfD CO. 
>^EW-STEEET SQUAIIE 



GYMNASTS AND GYMNASTICS. 



BY 



JOHN H. HOWAED, 

Author of ' Athletic and G-jtnnastic Exercises ' : late Professor of Gymnastics, 
Commercial College, Ripponden, Halifax, Yorkshire. 




Samson bursting his bonds. 



LONDON: 

L-ONGMANS, GEEEN, AXD CO. 
1873. 



THE 



PREFACE 

TO 

SECOND EDITION. 



Such is the rapid advance whicli has been made in 
Gymnastics since the first issue of this work, and 
with it a desire of further increase in the numbei' of 
the Exercises to be achieved on the difierent appa- 
ratus by the athletes of the present day, that any attempt 
to lay before the public a series of Exercises on this 
now essential branch of education, must be received 
^vith eagerness ; for it is well known that the desii^e of 
further knowledge is as great in the Gymnasium as 
in the schoolroom or college, if not greater, and where 
that longing after new Exercises exists, whereby the 
whole system is wonderfully improved, that want must 
in some way or other be supplied. 

In the present edition the number of Exercises has 
not only been increased threefold, but the whole of the 
former edition has been thoroughly revised and cor- 
rected, and in many instances entirely rewritten, and 



Till 



Preface to the Second Edition, 



tliough some few liave been expunged, they having been 
deemed of too dangerous a character, it will be found 
that they have been replaced by those of greater value 
to the Gymnast ; whilst, on the other hand, the Exercises 
themselves have been so arranged, that the embryo 
Gymnast may begin at the beginning, and, by following 
the order in which they have been arranged under the 
heads of the several apparatus, gradually learn and prac- 
tise those which are more difB.cult, without having to 
go from one Exercise to another. The most simple Exer- 
cises are placed first, and consequently each succeed- 
ing one is more difB.cult to achieve than its predecessor, 
in accordance ^vith the required position of the body, or 
the nature of the Exercise to be performed. 

Having for the past three years been intimately con- 
nected with many of the leading Gymnasts in Man- 
chester and the neighbouring towns, both in connec- 
tion with their clubs and the athletic festivals now 
held annually, at two of which I have acted as jndge 
and referee, I am enabled to present to the public 
at large the result of my experience, viz. additional 
Exercises, many of which are quite new. In addition 
to which, a copious description of each apparatus is 
prefixed to each series of Exercises, the whole being 
engTaved from photographs of the most recent improve- 
ments in the manufacturing and arranging of the same, 
and now in use in the various clubs and mihtary schools. 
When last in London I availed myself of the opportu- 
nity to visit the Gymnastic Apparatus Manufactory of 



Preface to the Second Edition. 



IX 



Messrs. Snoxell and Spencer, and feel convinced, from 
the numerous specimens of the various apparatus I saw 
there in the process of being manufactured, and from 
those ready for immediate use, that the quality of the 
materials with which they are made cannot be surpassed. 

Therefore, from the foregoing remarks, the author 
hopes that the time he has devoted to the enlargement 
and improvement of this edition will not be as ' chaff 
before the wind ; ' but that it will be sown as seed on 
good ground, some, if not all, of the Exercises herein 
contained yielding good and beneficial results to all who 
now form the Athletic School of England. 

Manchester : 
November 1, 1867. 



PREFACE 

TO 

THE FIRST EDITION. 



In presextixg tlie folio Avinof collection of Exercises to 
the public, I have mucli pleasure in stating that the 
whole of them have been performed by myself and 
pupils, and are, consequently, within the capacity of any 
who may deem them worthy of theii^ time and attention. 

Were I to have attempted to describe every feat 
which is capable of being performed, I fear I should 
tire many of the youthful aspii^ants to these recreative 
exercises ; nevertheless, I have selected such as, I sin- 
cerely trust, will give the greatest satisfaction : and I 
am of opinion that any student of the Gymnasium who 
may enter upon the simplest of the following, will not 
rest contented until he has accomplished the most diffi- 
cult, and will thus be enabled to outstrip the whole of 
his companions. 

When the young Gymnast has achieved the whole of 
the following Exercises, he need never fear to ventui'e 
upon any other kind of athletic exercise which may be 
proposed for his iDerformance. 

In France and Belgium Gymnastic Exercises form a 
paii: of the education of youth, and happy is he who 
succeeds in achieving any one feat which leaves him 
sole master of the Gymnasium. 



CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

Introduction 1 

The Gymnasitm (Illustrated) 6 

The Lungees (Illustrated) 10 

Indian Clubs (2 Illustrations) 11 

Dumb-Beixs (Illustrated) 14 

Bar-Bells (Illustrated) 14 

Dress 15 

The Horizontal Bar — Eemarks . . . . . .17 

Description of Apparatus (10 Illustrations) . . .18 
134 Exercises thereon (37 Illustrations) . . 29-117 

The Parallel Bars — Remarks 118 

Description of Apparatus (5 Illustrations) , . .119 
70 Exercises thereon (27 Illustrations) . . 125-174 

The Eings — Eemarks 175 

Description of Apparatus (Illustrated) . .175 
48 Exercises thereon (15 Illustrations) . . 176-201 

The Trapeze — Eemarks 202 

Description of Apparatus (Illustrated) . . . 202 

Eemarks on the Exercises 203 

21 Exercises thereon (6 Illustrations) . . . 204-216 



xii 



Contents, 



PAGE 

The HoESE — Eemarks 217 

Description of Apparatus (Illustrated) . . .219 
68 Exercises thereon (8 Illustrations) . . . 223-243 

The Buck 223 

Yaultixq — Eemarks 244 

1 Exercise on the Horizontal Ear (Illustrated) . .246 
26 Exercises on the Earallel Bars (Illustrated) . 247-253 

Climbing — Eemarks 254 

Description of Apparatus (Illustrated) . . . 254-278 
71 Exercises thereon (7 Illustrations) . . . 259-280 

The G-iant's Steide, Elying Couese, oe Elying Step — 
Eemarks 281 

Description of Apparatus (Illustrated) . . . 282 

4 Exercises thereon 284-285 

The Gtymxometee, EoLYi^LiCHixoN, oe CoiiPorxD Chest Ma- 
chine (Illustrated) 286 

Eotst:xg Apparatus ,288 

Gymnastic See-Satv, Swinging Hand Laddees — Eemarks . 289 

Description of Apparatus (Illustrated) . . . 290 

3 Exercises thereon 291-292 

The Stoeming Boaed — Eemarks 293 

Description of xlpparatus (Illustrated) . . . 293 

4 Exercises thereon 295 

Jumping, Leaping, etc. — Eemarks 296 

Description of Apparatus (2 Illustrations) . . 297-299 

5 Exercises therein 297-299 



LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 

FEOXTISPIECE— Allegorical Tableau . To face Title-page 
VIGNETTE— Samson bursting his bonds . Li Titlc-imge 

FIG. PAGE 

1. Interior of a Gymnasium ...... 9 

• 2. The Lungers 10 

3. Mode of using the Indian Clubs . . . . .12 

4. Sizes of the Indian Clubs 13 

5. Sizes of the Dumb-Bells 14 

6. Bar-BeU 15 

HORIZONTAL BAR. 
Apparatus. 

7. Simplest method, constructed entirely of wood . . 19 

8. Section of ditto. Showing groove and shoulder piece of Bar 20 

9. A more substantial and neater construction . . .21 
10-11. Iron plates fixed on the sides of ditto. Showing the 

method of fixing the Bar ..... 22 

12. The most approved shape of Bar, with steel core . . ih. 

13. Side view of a part of the upriglit of a neat and durable 

construction. Showing position of bar when fixed in 
groove 24 

14. Section of ditto . . . . . . . . ih. 

15. A light and strong Bar capable of being fixed either in 

or out of doors . 26 

16. A very useful combination. Bar and other apparatus in 

one . . . . . . . . . . 27 



xiv 


List of Ulustvcttious, 






EXEECISES. 




FIG. 




PAGE 


17. 


To Hang by the Hands 


30 


18. 


Ditto, with Arms crossed 


31 


19. 




35 


20. 


Touching the Bar with the Feet 


39 


21. 


To Truss a Fowl 


40 


22. 


To Bring the Body through 


41 


23. 




43 


24. 




45 


25. 


Bow and Ends ........ 


47 


26. 


The Swing by the Hands 


52 


27. 




54 


28. 




56 


29. 


The Leg Swing off. Position of the Body at the time of 






unhitching the Legs ...... 


57 


30. 




61 


31. 


The Slow Pull up. Position of the Body prior to 






straightening the Arms ...... 


62 


32-33 (No. 6). Method of rising above the Bar . . 64, 65 


34. 




66 


35. 


The Jerk (No. 1) 


67 


36. 




69 


37. 


The Plymouth, or (No. 2) Method of sitting on the Bar 


70 


38. 


The Balance across the Bar ..... 


72 


39. 


To stand on the Bar (No. 2) ..... 


75 


40. 


The Vault (No. 1) 


77 


41. 


The Poser. Showing position of the Legs on carrying 






the Feet over the Bar 


79 


42. 




81 


43. 


The Side Slide. Showing position of the Body prior to 






raising it over the Bar 


85 


44. 




87 


45. 




89 


46. 


The Turnover. Showing position of the Body on bring- 








96 


47. 


Ditto, Showing position of the Body when directly above 








97 



List of Illustrations. 



XV 



FIG. PAGE 

48. The Long Swing Backward. Showing the position of the 

Body after straightening the Arms above the Bar . 98 

49. The Back Horizontal 99 

50. The Front Horizontal 101 

51. The Grasshopper 104 

52. The Backaway. Showing the position of the Body directly 

after the Hands have let go the Bar . . .106 

53. The Eoll off. Showing the position assumed after the 

Body is thrown back, prior to raising the Legs up . 110 

PAEALLEL B.IES. 
Appaeatus. 

54. Movable Parallel Bars 121 

55. Section of Sliding Pillar 122 

56. Ditto of Pillar with Pound Bar 123 

57. Ditto of Pillar with Oval Bar 124 

58. Ditto of Pillar with grooved Bar ib. 

ExEECISES. 

59. To Mount between the Bars 126 

60. The Cramp (No. 1) ' . .127 

61. To suspend the Body from the Bars in an inverted 

position 130 

62. The Swing (Backward position) 131 

63. Ditto (Forward position) 132 

64. The Arm Swing 133 

65. Bringing the Legs over. Sitting on a Bar . . .134 

66. Ditto. Keeping Legs straight 136 

67. The Janus. Position of the Body in the Backward 

Swing after crossing the Legs 139 

68. Ditto. Position of the Body when resting the Legs on 

opposite Bars . . ib. 

69. The Barber's Curl. Position of the Body on carrying it 

over 140 

70. Ditto. Position assumed when the Legs are as low as 

they can be carried . . . . . .141 



XVI 



List of Ulustrations. 



FIG-. PAGE 

71. The Letter L ^yitll Body raispd 142 

72. To Eise and Fall above the Bars U3 

73. The Pumping MoTenient. Position of the Body on the 

Backward Swing 149 

74. The Spanish Plj 151 

75. The Bend 152 

76. The TiirnoTer. Position of the Body prior to grasping 

the Bars underneath . . . . . .154 

77. To Poll over the Bars 155 

78. The Sausage 156 

79. The Pancake ........ 157 

SO. The Balance. Position of the Body on carrying it from 

one Bar to the other . . . . . .160 

81. The Forward Somersault. Position assumed on bring- 

ing the Body over . . . . . . .163 

82. Tlie Hand Balance 165 

83. La Blanche. Showing the position the Body must 

assume . . . . . . . . .167 

84. The Slow Upward ^Movement. Position of the Body 

prior to lowering the Elbows below the Bars . .170 

85. Ditto. Position of Body below the Bars . . . 171 

THE PIXGS. 
Apparatus. 

86. The Stirrup pattern, the most comfortable shape for the 

Hands, with spring hooks 176 

Exercises. 

87. The Barbers Curl ' . .177 

88. Simplicity. Showing how the Legs are broug'ht over on 

the outside of the Popes 178 

89. The Lift 180 

90. The Stretch (Xo. 1). Position of the Body with one 

Arm stretched out . . . . . . .181 

91. Ditto (Xo. 2). Position of the Body with both Arms 

extended 182 





List of Illustrations, 


xvii 


FIG. 




PAGE 


92. 


To Mount between the Eopes . . . . . 


184 


93. 


The Swing (Xo. 1). Position of the Body in the Back- 








186 


9-i. 


Ditto (No. 2). Position of the Body in the Backward 






Swing with the Legs between the Ropes . 


187 


95. 


Ditto (No. 5). Grasshopper position .... 


189 


96. 


Ditto (Xo. 6). Position of the Body in the Backward 








190 


97. 


Ditto, ditto in the Porward Swing .... 


ib. 


98. 


The Eevolver. Position of the Body with one Foot 






hitched in one of the Eings and the Hands grasping 






the other . . ..... 


192 


99. 


Ditto. Position when mounted between the Eopes and 








193 


100. 




197 


101. 


The Jerk. Position to be attained prior to carrying the 






Body over as required ...... 


198 




THE TEAPEZE. 






Appaeatus. 




102. 


The Bar with spring hooks 


203 








103. 


The Leg Swing. Position of the Body on bringing the 








206 


10-i. 


The Turn. Showing the position of the Hands 


209 


105. 




210 


106. 


The Overthrow. Showing the position of the Hands 






prior to effecting the turn over 


211 


107. 




212 


108. 


The Catch (Xo. 1) 


213 




THE HOESE. 






Apparatus. 




109. 


bide view and position of the Horse as referred to m all 






a 


220 



xviii 



List of Ilhistrations. 



EXEECISES. 

FIG. ^ PAGE 

110. Method of moiinting behind the pommels . . . 226 

111. Ditto of kneeling on the saddle 228 

112. Ditto of bringing one Leg over the saddle . . . 229 

113. Ditto of bring both Legs over at once .... 230 

114. Ditto of springing off the Horse forwards . . . 236 

115. Ditto of bringing the Legs over on the outside of the 

pommels 238 

116. The Swimming Movement. Balancing the Body on the 

Fore-arm 241 

117. The EoU over 242 



YAULTIXG. 
Exercises. 

118. Position of the Body on going over the Hoeizontal Bab 247 

119. The Double Vault over the Parallel Bars. The dotted 



line showing the track taken by the gymnast's Peet . 251 

CLIMBING. 

Apparatus axd Exercises combixed. 

1 20. Mode of climbing the Eope with the Hands and Feet, 

and showing the position of the Eope owing to the 
pressure of the Body upon it 256 

121. Ditto, ditto, with Hands only 257 

121a. Showing the position of the Feet when pressing the Eope 

between them ib. 

122. Mode of climbing the Pole with the Arms and Legs 

round it 261 

123. Mode of ascending an upright Ladder with Arms and 

Legs straight and horizontal, and parallel to each 
other 265 

124. Mode of walking along the Horizontal Ladder with the 

Hands on the outside ...... 266 

125. Ditto, ditto, with the Hands grasping the rundles, and 

at some distance apart 267 



List of Illustrations, 



xix 



FIG. PAGE 

126. Mode of ascending the Oblique Ladder, Hand over Hand 271 

127. The Sparred Plank (straight) 277 



SUXDEY APPARATUS. 

128. The Giant's Stride. Showing the manner of fixing the 

upright in the ground 283 

129. The Gymnometer, Polymachinon, or Chest Machine. 

Showing the position of the several movements . 287 

130. The Swing Hand Ladder 291 

131. The Storming Board. Showing manner of raising it . 294 

132. Jumping Stand 298 

133. Pole Leaping Stand 299 



GYMNASTS and GYMASTICS. 



IXTRODUCTIOX. 

Games of every description formed a most important 
part of tlie national events of tlie ancient Greeks and 
Komans. The principal of tlie four games publicly 
solemnised in Greece were the Olympic ; but games of 
different kinds were exercised by the early Romans, 
which consisted of chariot and horse-racing, combats, 
and theatrical sports. They likewise exercised them- 
selves before bathing in leaping, running, thro^^TJig the 
javelin, quoit, &c. 

The athletic exercises practised among these nations 
consisted of wrestling, boxing, and other such exercises, 
requiring great strength. Prizes were given to those 
who came off victors, Hkewise many privileges were 
granted to them. 

The Olympic Games, the chief of the festivals of the 
Greeks, were celebrated every fifth year, and consisted 
of religious ceremonies, athletic contests, and races. 

Under the emperors of ancient Rome places were 
built in which the Romans were to -pevfovm athletic 
exercises. These places were called Gymnasia, but they 

B 



2 



Introduction, 



were imitations of tliose buildings erected hj the 
Spartans, the inhabitants of Sparta, the capital of the 
mountainous country in Greece, and bounded hj the 
Messenian, Laconian, and Argolic Gulfs. 

The word gymnastic is derived from a Greek word 
signifying naJced, it being customary among the Greeks 
to strip themselves of the whole or a part of their 
clothes before engaging in any of the athletic feats. 

As early as the time of Plato gymnastic was made a 
part of medicine, for the purpose of counteracting the 
sad effects of luxury and indolence, which at that time 
were greatly increasing, and after it was reduced to a 
complete system officers were appointed by the State to 
superintend the performances in the gymnasia built for 
that purpose ; the chief officer being termed a Gt:\DsA- 

SIAECH. 

The immediate effects of gymnastic exercises is an 
increase, both in size and power, of the parts exercised, 
and that in proportion to the amount of exertion made 
use of ; so the part increases not only in strength, but 
also in size. When a person engages in a certain 
avocation which requires an amount of muscular exertion, 
he not only im^Droves in strength, expertness, and dex- 
terity, but the muscles are brought into unusual action, 
which causes them rapidly to increase in size and 
vigour ; whilst the rest of the body, which has not been 
•so much exerted, will be found to lack that which the 
muscles have gained. Therefore it must be evident 
that, if the whole body be exerted and brought into 
action as near as possible at the same time, and for the 
same length of time, the amount of additional strength 
gained will be distributed all over the body alike. Still, 



Introduction. 



if the body be not over-fatigued, all tbe other parts of 
the body sympathise with the improving condition of 
that part which is chiefly exercised, the circnlation ac- 
quires new vigour, and all the functions are carried 
on with increased acti^dty, owing to the blood being 
thrown into all the parts with unusual force. 

Besides, by exercising the body as just described^- the 
mind is made capable of enduring a more prolonged 
, application to the various and necessary branches of 
I education. If a person, who for the greater part of the 
day is confined to an of&ce, finds his health declining, 
he is sure to be recommended more bodily exercise to 
relieve the over-burdened state of the mind. Yet ex- 
cessive exercise produces very nearly the same injurious 
results as inactivity, and should therefore be carefully 
'avoided. But if gymnastics formed a part of the edu- 
cation of youth, the health of the young, of whichever 
sex they might be, would be greatly benefited ; for 
every school or place of learning should have the means 
at hand by which youth may, after the mental labours 
of the day are over, exercise themselves to give that 
exertion to their bodies which would be acknowledged 
by all who took advantage of those means, having given 
them sufi&cient proof that health in after life is owing 
greatly to the active exertions in which they were en- 
gaged in earlier days. 

Gymnastics should be taught by the master, and 
practised by the pupil, as combining amusement and edu- 
cation with the best means of obtaining bodily strength 
and activity ; for gymnastics exercise on the mind as 
well as on the body, thereby securing beneficial influences 
to both. 

B 2 



4 



Introduction, 



Mr. Long, M.D., writes, — ' I wish to say a few words 
to " whom it may concern," on the use of the swing — one 
of the gymnastic exercises — as a preventative and cure 
of pulmonary disease. I mean the suspending of the body 
by the hands, by means of a rope or chain fastened to a 
beam at one end, and to the other a stick of three feet 
long, convenient to grasp with the hands. The rope 
should be fastened to the centre of the stick, which should 
hang six or eight inches above the head. 

' Let a person grasp this stick, with the hands about 
two feet and a half apart, and swing very moderately at 
first, and gradually increase as the muscles gain streng-th 
from the exercise, until it may be freely used three or 
four times a day. 

' The connection of the arms with the body (with the 
exception of the clavicle with the sternum or breast- 
bone) being a muscular attachment to the ribs, the efi"ect 
of this exercise is to elevate the ribs and enlarge the 
chest ; and, as nature allows no vacuum, the lungs expand 
to fill up the cavity, increasing the volume of air — the 
natural purifier of the blood — and preventing the con- 
gestion or deposit of tuberculous matter. 

' I have prescribed,' says he, 'the above for all cases 
of hemorrhage of the lungs and threatened consumption 
for thii'ty-five years, and have been able to increase the 
measure of the chest from two to four inches within 
a few months, and always with good results. But 
especially as a preventative I would recommend this 
exercise. 

' Let those who love Hfe cultivate a well-formed, capa- 
cious chest. The student, the merchant, the sedentary, 
the young of both sexes — aye all, should have a swing 



Introduction. 



5 



upon wliicli to stretcli themselves daily : and I am morally 
certain that if this were to be practised by the rising 
generation, in a dress allowing a free and full develop- 
ment of the body, thousands, yes, tens of thousands, 
would be saved from the ravages of that opprohrium rue- 
dicorum, consumption.' 

From the above it will be seen, that by using such a 
simple apparatus as a swing, strength and health are en- 
sured. 'SYhat, therefore, must be the benefit to be derived 
from the daily practice of various other exercises upon 
differently constructed apparatus ! As various as are 
the different apparatus and the numerous exercises to be 
accomplished on them, so must the benefits be increased 
in due proportion — is the answer that ought to be given 
by everyone. 

Then cultivate the strength of the body as well as the 
mind, and let both grow together, and the boy will make 
a better man, in every respect, than the boy whose mind 
only was thought of. There is an old saying, and a very 
true one it is, — 

All work and no play 
Will make Jack a dull boy ; 

and chances are against him, if a certain time every day 
be not allotted to him for recreative exercise of some sort 
or other, that he will not arrive at mature years. Can 
anyone, when the body is indisposed, take his place or 
position in life with as good a will as when the body is 
in possession of its full health and strength ? I answer, 
No! 

It must be remembered, that the muscles in the arms 
and legs do not alone constitute a strong man, for, to be 



6 



The Gymnasium. 



so, liis strength must be equally distributed all over lii- 
body, from liis bead to bis toes alike, including the knee-, 
bips, spine, wrists, sboulders, &c., etc. 

THE GTMXASIUM. 

To give a correct metbod of arranging tbe several 
necessary apparatus in a gymnasium would be an utte]* 
impossibility, as gymnasiums differ so mucb in size and 
sbape ; and tben again, so many more different or addi- 
tional apparatus are required in some gynma slums tban in 
otbers, tbat unless tbe size of tbe building or room to be 
used as sucb were known, no definite arrangement could 
be decided upon. Tbe tbi^ee essentials for a g^Tnnasiuni 
are length, beeadth, and height, not because all rooms 
are of tbat sbape, but because tbe relative sizes of tbe 
apparatus, and tbe different manner of fixing tbem. 
require tbose dimensions to be of sucb proportions, tbat 
no one apparatus sball be in so great a proximity with 
its neigbbour, as to be at all in tbe way of a gymnast 
practising on tbe latter ; consequently, no room used by 
a club sbould be less tban 40 feet long, by 25 feet broad, 
and from 16 feet bigb. Tbe Liverpool Gymnasium 
measures 105 X 75 x 60, and a noble building it is. 

Having a suitable place for a gymnasium, tbe next 
tbing is to construct and arrange tbe several apparatus, 
sucb as is selected to be tberein fixed ; and tbis requires 
as mucb, if not more attention tban tbe building itself. 
Tbe following list will serve as a guide to sbow wbat 
apparatus are now in use in tbe several clubs in tbe 
United Kingdom and on tbe Continent. 



The Gymnasutm. 



7 



Horizontal bar, with bar to shift 
up and down (see pages 17 to 
25). 

Parallel bars (see page 118). 
Hand rings, with ropes complete 

(see page 175). 
Trapeze bar, with ropes, &c. 

complete (see page 202). 
Vaulting horse, 6 ft. long (see 

page 219). 
Short ditto, 4 ft. long (see page 

219). 

Buck, 2 ft. long (see page 223). 

Giant stride: if the height of 
the building will admit of its 
being fixed in the centre of 
the ceiling, no pole will be 
required ; but if out of doors, 
with a pole (see page 281). 

The chest machines (see page 
286). 

The g}Tnnastic wheel. 
The gymnastic see-saw ladder or 
swing (see page 289). 



Ladders to be fixed perpendi- 
cularly (see page 264) ; hori- 
zontally (see page 265) ; or 
obliquely (see page 269) 

Storming board and stand com- 
plete (see page 293), 

Jumping stands (see page 298). 

Pole leaping ditto (seepage 299). 

Eopes of dilferent makes (see 
pages 255 to 260). 

Poles, plain and sparred (see 
pages 260 to 263). 

Planks, plain and sparred (see 
pages 275 to 278). 

Clubs and dimib bells (see pages 
11 to 14). 

Bar bells (see page 14). 

Roimd cast shot. 

Jumping pole. 

vSets of boxing gloves. 

Pairs of foils, with viziers, leather 
jackets, &c. 

Belts and lungers (see page 10), 
&c., &e. 



Now, supposing a good selection to be made from the 
above list, we will proceed to arrange them. Assigning 
tlie best places to the horizontal and parallel bars, we 
arrange tlie clubs, dumb bells, &c., round tbe room, eitber 
leaning against or on tlie walls themselves, placing a 
gymnometer or chest machine, containing one or more 
of the numerous movements, here and there where space 
Avill admit, and if made like a pillar, it will greatly add 
to the appearance of the place. The trapeze and rings 
should be susj)ended from a cross beam, one on either 
side of the room, to swing lengthwise ; but if placed at 



8 



The Gymnasium, 



the end, they will then swing across the room ; if space 
will not admit of both being hung at once, the same 
pair of hooks may serve for them, or the two pairs of 
hooks can be placed close together, when the one not in 
use may be raised, by means of a small pulley, up to the 
ceiling, and out its full length. The climbing apparatus 
should be arranged in two rows lengthwise of the room, 
but here and there will do, if space will not admit of its 
being done otherwise. The ladders, planks, &c., whether 
horizontal or oblique, may lean against the wall or a 
beam in any part of the room. The horse is generally 
put anyioliere out of the way when not required, but it 
generally has an out-of-the-way place assigned to it. 
Let it now be supposed that the whole is arranged to 
the complete satisfaction of every one, and that sufficient 
room is left between each apparatus to admit of an 
exercise being done on all, or nearly so, by several 
gymnasts at the same time. If the floor, or a portion of 
it where required, be not covered with sawdust or tan, 
two or three strong straw mattrasses, or, if preferred, 
thick wool ones, should be at hand for the use of any 
g\Tnnasts when needed. They should be six feet square, 
or perhaps 6x8 would be a better size ; they can then be 
placed lengthwise, and should a gymnast chance to fall 
upon one, he cannot by fair means hurt himself in so 
doing. 

The arrangement of the apparatus in the accompany- 
ing cut (fig. 1) is merely inserted to give an idea of the 
space required, though but seven apparatus are fixed or 
hanging in the room, which is of small dimensions ; but 
it is hoped that the foregoing remarks, and the de- 
scriptions of each apparatus hereafter given (see list of 



10 



The Lunger. 



contents), Tvill be found sufficiently explicit to enable any 
one to arrange tbeir own Tritli very little trouble. 

THE LUXGEES."^ 

Re^iaeks. — Tliis is an article of wliicli there should 
be some two or three in every gymnasium, and be 
constantly used by gymnasts, especially by beginners, 
whenever any fear is entertained of being unable to go 
through any exercise without help of some kind. Its 
use is clearly evident, and no one, once knowing its 
utility fi^om practical experience, would abandon it when 
he could get the use of one. 

Fig. 2. 




De sCEiPTiox. — The lungers is composed of a sti'ono' 
leather belt or strap, about 1^ or 1^ inch wide, with a 
strong buckle wherewith to fasten it round the waist of 
the gymnast : two metal fastenings or swivels are fastened 
to the sides of the belt (see fig. 2), to which two roj^es, 
about I" of an inch in diameter and 4 feet lone, are 
fixed. 

^ The price of the lungers, 75. 6f7., places them \nthin the reach 
of every gpnnast, and no one should be without them. (^See p. 82.) 



Indian Clubs, 



11 



The strap being adjusted round the waist of the gym- 
nast, two assistants, each taking hold of a rope, stand, 
one on either side of him ; and, no matter what exercise 
he is about to try — be it a somersault, in the achieving 
of which he may fall upon his head, or any exercise 
on any apparatus — he need be under no fear of any mis- 
hap, for, should a slip occur, all that the assistants have 
to do, they having had their eyes fixed upon him all the 
time, is quickly to pull the rope firmly uj)wards, and 
he is safe. The assistants, kno^^ing well the respon- 
sibihty of the task imposed upon them, are bound to 
keep their attention fixed upon your movements and act 
according to your requirements, be it as above stated, or 
to let you take your course, whereby you have gained 
confidence and the exercise is achieved. 



IXDIAX CLUBS. 

This branch of gymnastics being one strongly recom- 
mended to all classes of society, it is the intention of 
the author to issue a separate work thereon, as in using 
the clubs the chest is expanded, greater freedom is given 
in the use of the arms, the muscles of the legs and arms, 
as well as those of the whole body, are brought into full 
use, the wrist is strengthened, the grasp of the hand is 
made firmer, the circulation of the blood is regulated, 
and moreover, the health in general is greatly improved. 

These clubs are intended to give such fi^eedom to the 
limbs as it is reported the Indians have in using their 
war-clubs or hatchets (tomahawks), although they differ 
somewhat in shape and use (fig. 3). One of the shapes is 
shown in fig. 4. Some have fiat bottoms to enable them 



12 



Indian Chibs, 



to be stood on end, wliile others haTe nearly straight 
sides, -witli shoulders to them to form the handles. The 
illustration (page 13) represents the largest and smallest 
sizes, there being at least seven different sizes between 
these two, making nine sizes in alL 



Fig. 3. 




As these clubs increase in length they increase in 
diameter at the bottom, and weight also. The following 
table will serve as a gnide to theii^ respective sizes ; the 
weights will depend npon the kind of wood used, and 
many judge them by their weight only. 



Indian Cluhs. 



13 

















.= ^ 


Ko. 


5 J 


r)iamct( 
in inchc 


Weight ] 
lbs. eac' 


No. 


ix'c 


i J 


^ 'i 


1 




20 


3^ 


6 


i 6 


30 




17 


2 


22 


4 


8 


7 


32 




20 


3 


24 




10 i 


8 


34 


' 8 


23 




26 




12 I 


9 


36 


8 


26 




28 




14 I 











Two clubs must be made of each size, and each, fellow 
in size should be as nearly as possible of the same weight 
as the other.* They are usually made of hard wood, to 

Fig. 4. 




3 FEET. 



withstand any accidental blow, for it will frequently 
happen that they will be brought in contact one against 
the other, especially by beginners. Again, it is for 
theii' weight that they are used ; were it not for that, 
the using of them would not have the required effect. 

* Indian clubs are generally sold by the weight ; those supp lied 
by Snoxell and Spencer, 35. Old Street, London, and which they 
turn to any design, are 9d. per pound. 



14 



Ditmh-Bells, 



DUMB-BELLS. BAE-BELLS. 

These are likewise mucli used in gymnasiums, and 
will be dwelt upon at greater length in the author's 
future work, specially devoted to the subjects of this 
and the i^revious articles. Dumb-bells are heav}^ pieces 
of metal, like two round shots, joined together by a piece 
of round metal a few inches apart. They are used in 
pairs like the clubs, consequently the weight must be 
the same in each ^Dair ; the weight varies from two to 
fifty-six pounds or more (see fig. 5, which represents 



Fig. 5. 




three different sizes). The movements in using the 
dumb-bells are very similar to those of the clubs, but 
those of the larger ones are merely lifted fi^om the 
ground and carried over the head, and a few such like 
simple movements.^ 

The bar-bellf consists of two round soHd pieces of 

* Price of dumb-bells, 2^d. per lb., or. with handles covered '^ith 
leather, 2jr7. per lb. 

t Price of bar-bells, 3^fZ. per lb., or, with handles covered with 
leather, 4:^d. per lb. 



Bar-Bells.— Dress. 



15 



metal, like tlie dumb-bells, but the bar that joins them 
is much longer (see fig. 6), and it is used singly, the 
moTements being totally different to the preceding. 

Fig. 6. 

For ladies and children they are made of Tvood, though 
the exercises are the same. Xumerous exercises will 
be given in the author's future ^vork. 

DKESS. 

Accordino- to the derivation of the Tvord srvmnastic, 
which, as is before stated, means naked, so should the 
gymnast be, or nearly so, when jDcrforming any athletic 
exercise : for, as a greater amount of strength is re- 
quired, more room will be necessary in the clothes he 
may at the time wear, for him to exercise that strength . 
therefore a jDair of flannel trousers, made rather tight 
round the waist, or kej)t in their place by means of a 
strong leather belt, fastened with a sti^ong buckle, an 
ordinary flannel vest, with long or short sleeves (the 
former looks the neater), and light white cloth boots with- 
out heels, would be the most suitable. When competing 
or ]3ractising out of doors, a cap similar to those worn by 
cricketers should be worn, and a flannel jacket, or other 
kind of coat, should be at hand, to put on after perform- 
ing any exercise, more especially if warm ; and, above 
all, avoid standing in a draught, but allow the body to 
cool gradually. 




16 



Dress, 



In contests and festivals. g}Tnnasts dress in colours, 
sncli as — 

A blue, red, or striped sliirt. 

Bine stripes doTrn the sides of tlie trousers, 

Kjiickerbockers instead of trousers. 

A colonized sash, worn round the waist, or else over 
one shoulder and fixed at the side. 

A white Maltese cross on a coloured sliirt, front or 
back, or both. 

A blue or red Maltese cross on a white shirt. 

A coloured cap. 

All blue or any other colour thi^oughout. 
Coloured trimmings. 
Colonized belts, (tc, &c., &c. 

And, like jockeys at races, the gymnasts in their 
yarious dresses sometimes present a yery lively appear- 
ance, especially if their left breast, or perhaps both left 
and right, as is the case with some few lucky gymnasts 
in the north of England, be covered with well-earned 
medals, silver and bronze, and, here and there, a 
champion gold medal. 



f 

THE HORIZONTAL BAR. 

Remarks. — Tliis being the most simple, and Tvithout 
exaggeration it may be said, the most usefal of all appa- 
ratus in a gymnasium, it is placed first in order. Its 
strength and adaptability to being raised or lowered, as 
the nature of the exercises, or the age of the gymnast 
requires, makes it the most varied and attractive ; varied, 
because no one part of the body is at a stand-still, the 
chief parts exercised, and which, moreover, derive the 
greatest benefit, are the muscles of the arms, wrists, 
hands, chest, spine, loins, hips, legs, abdomen, &c. ; 
men increase very much round the chest, and likewise 
in their weight, and their muscles enlarge and harden ; 
and attractive, from the number and variety of the 
exercises capable of being accomplished thereon. One 
celebrated author and gymna? ' , in writing on the sub- 
ject, states that ' It is not necessary to describe these 
movements,' alluding to the preliminary exercises, ' as 
any one, without instruction, can place himself under a 
bar and pull himself up by his hands any number of 
times he chooses.' IN'ow, were such true, we should have 
many more clever gymnasts than we already have, for, 
in my opinion, the example set in the above extract is 
one of the most difficult to a berinner, and to a skilful 
gymnast, if he is to reckon the 'number of times he 
chooses.' I therefore deem it advisable to treat largely 



18 



on preliminary exercises, and there are many so-called 
gymnasts, wlio could not go tlirougli, perhaps, any of 
the more simple exercises in a manner that may be said 
to have been properly done : they aim at ' something 
showy,' not useful. Again, the same author errs greatly 
in saying that ' it is not necessary to have an instructor 
standing by, looking on,' in alluding to the same subject. 
Where is the gymnast who had no instruction in the 
preliminary exercises, and who.could undergo a thorough 
examination as to whether he was entitled to the name 
of GYMNAST ? It is at the commencement that instruction 
is required, and if there is to be no instructor, and no 
book containing his first lessons, how is he to get on ? 

Description of Apparatus. — Gymnastic apparatus, 
since our early experience, has been of the most clumsy 
construction, and that is the principal reason why the 
practice of Gymnastics is so much neglected in England 
as compared with Continental nations. We have only 
to look at the apparatus erected in some of our public 
parks, and we shall find horizontal bars two and a half 
inches in diameter, which renders it almost impossible 
for anyone to perform even the most simple exercise 
with ease and safety. Besides, clumsiness of constmc- 
tion likewise destroys that amount of confidence so es- 
sential to a begi nn er in the enjoyment of this the most 
healthy and manly of exercises. Why have gymnastic 
feats been often considered as dangerous ? Simply because 
of this mal-proportioned apparatus, they are not only 
unsafe to practise upon, but it is very Hkely that nothing 
worth describing will be ever learnt upon them. 

The horizontal bar is manufactured in various ways. 

The first, which may be made at home, without the 



Fig. 7 




20 



The Horizontal Bar. 



aid of a workman, is very simple in its constmction, and 
consists of two uprigMs about six inclies by eight inches 
on its sides, and abont fourteen feet long, having a groove 
an inch and a quarter wide cut in the widest part to 
within three or four feet of the ground, in which the bar 
is to slide. These posts must be firmly fixed, six feet 
apart, to the floor, at the bottom, and to a beam at the 
top (see fig. 7), so as to withstand almost any amount 
of work without its being loosened. A series of holes, 
half an inch in diameter, should be bored as shown in 
the cut, through which an iron pin can pass to keep the 
bar in its place. The bar must be made of straight- 





Fig. 8 


o 




o 




o 













^OOVE 






O 










> 
o 






o 











grained ash, and not more than two inches in diameter ; 
it should have a strong shoulder at each end wherewith 
to rest firmly against each post (see fig. 8). 

Second. — A more substantial and at the same time 
neater method of constructing this apparatus, is to have 
two uprights about seven and a half inches square, and 
if for a public gymnasium out of doors, they should fit 
firmly into iron sockets, as shown in fig. 9, but if for in- 
doors, they may be fixed in the floor, and a cross beam 



Description of Apparatus. 



21 



as before. On the insides of these uprights are tvro iron 
plates, seven and a half inches wide, with holes and 
openings cut in them, as in fig. 10. These holes are to 



Fig. 9. 




be perfectly square, and all of the same size, the hole 
a corresponding, when in its position, to the one at c. 
In addition to the above, extra grooves are cut on both 



22 



The Horizontal Bar, 



sides of one of the plates, also one and a half inch wide, 
and reaching to the opposite side of the former ones (see 
fig. 11). The plate need not be very thick, say abont 
five-eighths of an inch, but then the uprights will have 



Pig. 10. 



Tig. 11. 














® 


E 




^ 




1 c 


n 


(2) 






□ 




9 






□ 






e 


















n 











□ 















2> 
9 







Fig. 12. 



to be cut away in like manner, to admit of the end of the 
bar, which is an inch and three-quarters long, passing 
in freely. One end being put in the hole, is passed 
through the opening, when, dropping down into the 
square, c, it is kept secure in its place by a wooden plug. 



Description of Apparatus. 23 



d, the same width, and height as the opening h, but to 
project beyond it a little to enable it to be removed easily 
when required ; it should fit sufficiently tight to pre- 
vent its being worked out by the constant moving of 
the bar. If preferred, it might have a strong spring on 
the top of it, to assist in keeping it in its place. This 
bar is to be made of the best straight- grained ash, seven 
feet long, and with a diameter of one inch and three- 
quarters, this reduced size increasing the firmness of the 
grasp ; but being increased in length, its strength is like- 
wise increased by having a steel core of about an inch 
in diameter, or a trifle less, inserted through, its whole 
length : this is the most improved and best method of 
constructing a horizontal bar. Such an apparatus,* 
complete, with, wooden uprights, &c., as shown in fig. 9, 
would cost about 71. 10s, The bar itself, with steel 
core, one inch in diameter through, the centre, can be 
had for 21. (see fig. 12). It is absolutely essential for the 
square projecting part at each end of the bar to be made 
true, and to fit exactly in the grooves before alluded to, 
and marked a, and c, in figs. 10 and 11. 

Third. — A very neat and durable construction of the 
uprights of th.e borizontal bar is represented in figs. 13 
and 14, and consists of two uprights rather smaller than 
the preceding ones, say about six inches square, with, 
two 1^ inch square iron plates strongly fixed on its 
whole length, or nearly so. They are placed 1|- inch 
apart to admit of the ends of the bar being passed up 
and down wben required, the bar being kept in its place 

* Specimens can be seen at 3o Old Street, Goswell Street, e.c. 



24 



The Horizontal Bar. 



by means of an iron pin, tKe to]3 and bottom of wliich 
lit exactly tlie size of the end of tlie bar (see fig. 13). 
If two small grooves be made in tbis square end, where- 
by the bar may be kept from working to and fro, and in 
which the pins will pass (see fig. 14), it will greatly add 



EiG. 13. Fig. U. 




to the security of the gymnast when attempting any 
exercise requiring great muscular exertion. 

Fourth. — This is a cheap horizontal bar, manufactured 
by Messrs. Snoxell and Spencer, for young beginners 
to fix in any room, and is the cheapest eyer yet pre- 
sented to the public ; the price, which is arranged to 
bring it within the reach of the million, is but 11. 10s., 
therefore all who yalue physical health and strength 
should possess one. It is light, portable, easily fixed in 



Description of Apparatus, 



25 



a feTrminutes, either in or out of doors. The bar, which 
is made of the very best ash quartering, with a case- 
hardened iron core three-quarters of an inch through its 
entire length, is supported with strong wooden uprights 
having strong cord stays on each side to secure it to 
staples in the floor or the ground. Price \l. \0s. 

F if til. — Fig. 15 shows a very light and strong hori- 
zontal bar, made by the before-mentioned firm.* It 
consists of a bar with a steel core fi:s:ed in iron sockets, 
which, by a simple contrivance, can be raised and lowered 
as required. The uprights, which are of iron tubing, 
require to merely stand on the floor or ground, being 
kept in theh^ places by means of stays or guys, as shown 
in the accompanying illustration. The price of such an 
one as the above is 5Z. IO5., though, with a bar of the best 
ash, it can be had for 3Z. 155. ; but should the bar be re- 
quired to be permanently flxed, the price of one is 3/., 
which proves that all parties can be accommodated ac- 
cording to the length of their purses. 

Sixth. — A very neat and durable horizontal bar is like- 
wise made to hang from a beam and steadied with two 
strong wires only, the bar having a steel core and brass 
ends, with coupling screws to tighten up with. Price, 
\0s. A series of bars such as this, placed at a dis- 
tance of nine feet apart, forms a very excellent arrange- 
ment whereon to practise some of the exercises given in 
the following pages. 



Snoxell and Spencer, 35 Old Street. 



26 



The Horizontal Bar, 



Fig. 15. 




28 



The Horizontal Bar. 



portable, is very suitable for fetes, private parties, &c. 
It consists of an iron frame witb stay rods for support- 
ing it and keeping it in its place as before. The hori- 
zontal bar with ends, the trapese, the rings, the foot 
and hand swings, and forming a jumping stand for pole 
leaping and foot jumping, are among the chief appliances 
represented. The whole complete is manufactured by 
Messrs. Snoxell and Spencer for 61. 10s. Though each 
part may be had separately, still, as a whole, it is the 
most perfect and useful apparatus yet presented to the 
public. 

In a recent visit to the gymnastic apparatus manu- 
factory of Messrs. Snoxell and Spencer,* the author had 
an opportunity of inspecting their large stock of appa- 
ratus — from those fixed and ready for use in their tem- 
porary gymnasium to those in the workshop in the 
several stages of manufacture, and to any one who may 
require a thoroughly good article, be it the most simple 
or the most expensive, he can confidentially recommend 
that all purchases be made at that establishment ; for it is 
well known that those who are accustomed to the manu- 
facturing of any one article are better acquainted vrith 
the different qualities and strengths of the materials 
required, than a workman who perhaps never made, and 
perhaps never saw, one of the like before, though he may 
be able to make it cheaper. But it must be borne in 
mind, that as life and limb are in the scale, the apparatus 
must be properly made, or repentanf' will come too 
late to remedy the evil which a few shillings more in the 
outset would have prevented. , 

35 Old Street, Goswell Street, London, e. c. 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



29 



EXERCISES OX THE HORIZOXTAL BAR. 

FEEMETE.* 

1. To Hang on the Bar by the Hands (No, 1). Arm^ 
and hand practice. — Place the bar so that, Tvhen standing 
flat on the feet, and stretching the arms well above the 
head, it shall be about six inches above the tips of the 
fingers ; then jump up, and by passing the hands over 
it towards the back, lay hold of it and grasp it firmly, 
letting the thumbs be on the same side as the fingers, 
and the knuckles as far upwards as possible (see fig. 17), 
grasping it firmly without any fear of not being able to 
retain your hold very long, as that is sure to come by 
practice. Therefore at first suspend yourself as long as 
convenient without overtiring yourself, yet after a time 
the pupil should so hang as long as he can ; and by the 
continual practice of this, the most simple of all exercises, 
the strength of the arms and hands is considerably de- 
veloped. But though not fatiguing at first, it becomes 
much more so the longer the body is suspended, and it 
is stated that a soldier once held himself by the hands 
for forty-two minutes, whilst many others have been 
known thus to suspend themselves in the air for thirty- 
five minutes. 

This exerci ohould be likewise practised by hanging 

* The suspending of the body in the air, as above, is c-alled by 
Colonel Amoras ■' Fermete,' which name is accordingly adopted. 



30 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 

by one liaiid, letting the other drop straight down by 
the side each time. It would be well for the gymnast 
to practise jumping up to the bar and grasping it TN-ith 

Fig. 17. 




one hand only, and not with both hands and after- 
wards letting go with one of them. Do not always 
use the same hand, but let the right and left hands 
alternately bear the weight of the body. 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



31 



Grasping the bar with the fingers turned towards you 
should be likewise practised, as many exercises require 
the hands to be so placed. 



Fig. 18. 




2. To Hang by the Hands (No. 2). Arm and Jutnd 
practice. — Stand under the bar with the face towards its 
length, and in jumping up to grasp it place one hand on 



32 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



eitlier side of it, and proceed as stated in the last 
exercise. 

3. To Hang by the Hands (No. 3). Arra and hand 
practk-e. — Jump up as in tlie first exercise, but grasp the 
bar with the arms crossed about half way between the 
elbows and the wrists, and letting the face come between 
the arms so as to look between them, at the same time 
keeping the body perfectly straight by not allowing it 
to turn either to the right or to the left according to 
whichever arm is underneath. 

This exercise must likewise be practised with the 
hands turned and grasping the bar on the other side, 
thereby bringing the fingers towards you (see fig. 18), 
and proceeding according to the directions jDreviously 
given. It would be better if, on letting go with the 
hand underneath, it were passed over the other each 
time : this would render the exercise a little more 
difficult. 

4. To Hang by the Hands (No. 4). Arm and irrist 
practice. — Jump up and grasp the bar with the knuckles 
and thumb towards you, then, by giving a slight upward 
motion, move fii'st the right hand to the right, and then 
the left to the left, and by short and regular steps 
repeat the exercise until the arms are as open as it is 
possible for them to be, when reverse the movement and 
bring the hands gTadually together again. The exercise 
must now be repeated with the hands tui^ned the reverse 
way, and on no account are they to slide along the bar, 
but be lifted fairly from it each time. A slight pause 
should be made between each movement. 

5. To Hang by the Hands (No, 5). Arm and vjrisf 
practice. — Hang by the hands with the knuckles towards 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 33 



you as before, and widen the distance between the bands 
as in the last, but in this exercise they must be moved 
towards their respective ends of the bars both at once, 
and the movement continued until the same distance 
along the bar is reached, when reverse the motion and 
bring the hands together. Repeat the exercise with 
the fingers towards you, and without letting the hands 
slide along the bar in the least. 

6. To Walk (No. 1). Arm practice. — 1. Grasp the bar 
with both hands on the same side and move them alter- 
nately along it, beginning with short and even steps, 
and increasing their length until able to take them with 
ease, and when capable of so doing let each step be as 
long as it is possible to open the arms, but without any 
kind of a jerk, or any sign of over- exertion, and this 
must be persevered in. 

2. When well up in the above let the hands be crossed 
over each other in advancing, thus : if going to the left 
pass the rigJit arm over the left, and vice versa. 

Let the legs be kept perfectly straight, and the toes 
well pointed to the ground. Nothing shows a careless 
and unskilful gymnast so much as throwing his legs or 
body about while achieving any of the essential pre- 
liminary exercises ; therefore strive to carry all exercises 
into effect with the legs, &c., kept in their proper 
position without any undue stifihess. 

7. To Walk (No. 2). Arm practice. — Grasp the bar 
with one hand on either side, as in the second exercise, 
page 31, and proceed as in the last, but the hands 
must now always advance one before the other in going 
forward, and in returning walk backwards, when they 



34 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 

are passed each, in turn behind the other. Let the legs 
be kept perfectly steady, as in the last. 

These two exercises should be well persevered in, 
though many would-be gymnasts pass such preliminary 
exercises over, or at least practise them but little, as 
being scarcely worthy of their time or trouble ; but a man 
is not worthy of the name of gymnast if he cannot go 
through any preliminary exercise* that may be set him, 
as they are the essential groundwork for the more dif- 
ficult ones as he advances. Note the manner this simple 
exercise is practised and persevered in in France, more 
especially by the French firemen, on account of which 
it is called the firemen's exercise, though they them- 
selves call it * La Perseverance.' These men have a 
large gymnasium 392 feet round the sides, and aroimd 
this gymnasium are a series of horizontal bars or small 
poles, and it is recorded that one once walked twice 
round this gymnasium by his hands on the bars, which 
was equal to a distance of 261^ yds. or more than ^ of a 
mile ; therefore persevere, and accomplish the like. 

8. To Jump. Arm ]jradice. — This exercise is very 
similar to the last, as the learner places his hands first; 
both on the same side ; second, one on either side of the 
bar ; but he here must move them both at the same time 
instead of alternately, and to assist the pupil in making 
the spring requisite to advance, the legs may be brought 
up a little and carried down again suddenly ; but after 
he can achieve the next exercises, he must efiect the 
spring by the arms alone, when the legs must be kept 
perfectly still, when after a little time he can try to 
jump as far along the bar as possible, then to and fro, 
acl lihitimi, the length of the jump being in proportion to 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 35 



the impetus given to tlie body. If the legs be thrown 
about too much the desired effect upon the muscles of 
the arm will be in part lost. 

9. Breasting the Bar, or To Eise and Fall (No. 1). 

Muscle practice; sloiu movement. — This exercise is very- 
similar to No. 22, page 141, it being nothing more than 



Fig. 19. 




the pulling up of the body as high as the arms will 
allow. It is done by hanging on the bars by the 
hands and gradually raising the body, by bending the 
arms at the elbows, until the breast is as high as the 
bar (see fig. 19), then steadily lowering yourself again. 



36 M Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



It should be repeated at least tliree times, and if not able 
to succeed in doing it tbe first time of trying do not 
despair, for on the being able to effect tbis exercise 
likewise depends tbe being able to accomplisb many 
others herein given ; besides which, it tends greatly to 
strengthen the muscles of the arms and wrist (see Ex. 
51, page 62). 

This must likewise be practised with the hands turned, 
thereby grasping the bar on the opposite side, when the 
fingers will be towards you, the thumb being on the 
same side as the fingers. 

The gymnast should so persevere in the rise and fall 
exercise that he may be able to do so with one arm only, 
the other hanging loosely by the side, or carried out a 
little in front to assist in balancing himself. The legs, 
which should be straight, are, in achieving this exercise, 
either raised quite horizontally or else projected a little 
to the front ; this renders it rather easier to carry into 
effect. 

10. To Eise and Fall with one Arm at a time. Arm 

and muscle iJTadice. — Grasp the bar with both hands, 
letting them be a little wider apart ; then, keeping the 
left arm straight, raise the body up by contracting the 
muscles of and bending the right arm ; now straighten 
the riglit and bend the left in like manner, repeating the 
exercise at least three times with each arm alternately 
at first, afterwards it may be done a few times with one 
arm, and then with the other. When perfect in the 
above, and able to do it freely, proceed with the next 
exercise. 

11. To Change Hands (No. 1). Armandtvrist practice. — 
Hang on the bar with both hands, as in the first exercise, 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 37 



keeping the body and legs perfectly straight and steady, 
then with a sudden motion burn the hands inwards, and, 
carrying them out a little, grasp the bar on the outer 
side, when the fingers will point towards you. This is 
excellent practice, not only for the arms and wrists, but 
also to ensure a quick and firm grasp; it should therefore 
be repeated three or four times, without separating the 
legs and throwing them about, which can only be pre- 
vented by raising the body a little, as in the last exercises. 

12. Changing Hands across (No. 1). Arm and wrist 
■practice. — Grasp the bar Avith the arms crossed one oyer 
the other, say the rigJit over the left, and letting the backs 
of the hands be towards the face, then, keeping the body 
perfectly straight, with a sudden movement change the 
position of the arms, and bring the left over the right, 
when continue the exercise a few times. (See Ex. 59, 
page 67.) 

The arms and wrists will be found to derive great 
benefit from practising this and the next exercise; but 
it must be borne in mind that, in crossing the arms, 
the point of intersection is to be half-way between the 
elbows and the wrists, and on no account must the body 
be allowed to turn round towards that side of the arm 
which is underneath, but kept in the same position as in 
Ex. 3, page 32. To ensure this, the pupil should endeavour 
to bring his face between his arms and look through them. 

13. Changing Hands across (No. 2). Arm and wrist 
practice. — Grasp the bar with the arms across, as in the 
last, but with the fingers pointing towards you, and en- 
deavour, while keeping the body perfectly straight, to 
effect the change as before. (See Ex. 60, page 68.) 

The reason why this exercise was not included in the 



38 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



last, though they are very nearly to all appearances 
alike, is twofold : first, because it is more difficult ; and 
secondly, because it will be required to refer to each 
separately, in pages 46 and 47. (See remarks upon last 
exercise, which are equally applicable to this one.) 

14. Right about face. Arm and wrist practice, — Grasp - 
the bar with both hands as before ; then raise the body 
a little, and, turning it round towards the right some- 
what suddenly, release your hold of the bar and regrasp 
it again on the other side ; now repeat the exercise by 
turning the body to the left, but, being rather difficult 
to accomplish, it should at first be done very slowly ; 
when, however, perfect in it, the quicker the change is 
made, and without any apparent exertion on the part 
of the gymnast, the better. The several parts exercised 
will be wonderfully improved by its being practised, as 
likewise the grasp. 

15. To Touch the Bar with the Feet. Muscle practice. 
— Hang on the bar as before described, and, with a 
gradual motion, bring the legs up towards it ; bend the 
knees, and pass them between the arms under the bar 
together with the toes, which must be pressed against 
it. (See fig. 20.) 

A slight swing might be used at first, if not able 
to bring up the legs without; but it is improper to do 
so, as, in all exercises where the legs are to be brought 
up, it ought to be so done entirely through the muscular 
force of the arms, &c. 

16. To Hang by the Toes. Toe practice. — Proceed as 
in the last, and, instead of placing the feet under the 
bar, hitch them over it, keeping the toes pointed towards 
the ground as much as possible. 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 39 



Let go your liaiids, and gradually allow your body to 
hang straight down by alternately catching hold of your 
clothes until you are more expert, which you will be 
after trying it a few times. 



Fig. 20. 




But the most dif&cult .part of this exercise is to be 
able to replace your hands on the bars. To do so, pull 
yourself up by catching hold of your clothes, using 
your hands alternately in so doing ; but if not able to, 
and the distance be not too great, unhitch the toes and 
drop to the ground on the hands, letting the feet come 
down lightly. For this purpose the bar should be at 
first only placed as high as the gymnast can reach 
standing on his flat feet, as this will enable him to place 
his hands on the ground, and so drop, in the event of 
his not being able to raise himself up as above directed. 

17. To Truss a Fowl. Sjpine ]jractice. — G-rasp the bar 
with both hands and bring up the legs, passing the 
knees between the arms, and hitching the toes against 
the bar, then force the whole body through so as to 



40 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



bring tlie face downwards, as in fig. 21, without relax- 
ing your liold of the bar or unbitcliing your toes, as, 
after having remained in that position a short time, the 
body must be brought back through the arms again. 
(See the next exercise.) 



Fig. 21. 




The difficulty of this exercise depends partly upon 
the length of the gymnast's arms and legs, as, the longer 
his arms are, the more easy will it be for him to carry 
his body through as above stated. 

18. To Bring the Body through. 8j>ine and muscle 
practice. — Proceed as described in the last exercise, and 
allow the legs to pass through together with the body, 
which must fall as low as the arms will allow, when the 
body, arms, and legs ought to be nearly in a line with 
each other. (See fig. 22.) 

After remaining in that position for a short time 
return through the arms again without allowing the 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 41 



hands to lose their hold, or the feet to touch the 
ground. 

It will be found very difficult for beginners to return : 
until able to do so, release the hands and fall to the 



Fig. T2. 




ground ; but after a little practice, especially with a 
little assistance at first, it will become verj much easier 
than it would at first appear. 

If, on bringing the legs through, the feet be crossed, 



42 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



in wh-icli case they will pass between the arms first, it 
will be found to be mucli easier to achieve. 

19. The Everlasting Twist. Wrist jjractice. — This is 
an excellent exercise for beginners, and one strongly 
recommended, as in performing it the gymnast must, if 
he have not yet done so, suspend himself by one hand, 
thereby testing .the strength of each wrist. 

Proceed as last described, but, in lieu of bringing 
the body again through the arms, let go with one hand, 
when the body will swerve half round, then grasp the 
bar again and repeat the exercise as often as convenient. 
If it be done six times without stopping, and always 
letting go the same hand, it will appear as if the arm 
were being twisted completely round ; but the pupil 
need not always use the same hand, as it may be varied 
by doing the exercise three times with each, or by 
changing it every time the body is brought through. 

20. To Hang by the Legs (No. 1). K7iee practice.— 
Grasp the bar firmly, and bringing the legs through the 
arms as described in 'No. 18, hitch them over the bar as 
far as the bend of the knee, when, by keeping the toes 
well pointed to the ground, and pressing the legs 
against the bar as firmly as possible, let go with the 
hands, letting them hang down loosely, and gradually 
lower the body as in fig. 23. 

After remaining in that position . as long as conve- 
nient, bring the arms up, and, by drawing the body up 
a little, as stated in Ex. 16, page 39, grasp the bar again, 
and allow the body, after having unhitched the legs, 
to fall as in No. 18, and drop to the ground, taking care 
to alight on the toes. 

Another method will be described in a future exer- 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 43 



cise (see Xo. 83, page 80), as it ^ill be necessary to 
achieve one or two exercises to bring tbe body above 
the bar in order to sit on it, ere that can be tbougbt of. 
. 21. To Hang by the Legs (No. 2). Knee x^ractice. — 
Proceed as in Ex. 18, page 40, and carry the right leg 
only tbrough and over tbe bar as far as tlie bend at tbe 



Fig. 23. 




knee, and throw the left leg over the right foot, also as 
far as that joint ; tben, by letting go your hands, let the 
body hang down loosely, the hands hanging down also, 
or folded across the cbest a-kimbo. After baving re- 
mained in this 'position a sbort time, raise the body np, 
grasp the bar with the bands, and change the position 



44 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



of the legs, viz., throw the left leg over the bar, and 
carry the right leg over the left foot, and hang as before. 

This exercise, if constantly practised, will be found to 
so materially strengthen the knee joint, that the benefit 
derived from it will be of great advantage in climbing. 

22. To Hang by the Legs (No. 3). K7iee practice. — 
Again proceed as described in Ex. 18, and, on throwing 
the right leg over the bar, let go the bar with the hands 
and hang by the knee joint only. After having remained 
in that position a short time, carry up the left leg over 
the bar, and, unhitching the right, support the body by 
that instead. This exercise, as well as the last, tends 
greatly to strengthen the knee joint, and is often useful 
in climbing. In making the change as above from one 
leg to the other, the body is not to be raised, as, being a 
knee exercise, it must be effected without. 

23. To Hang by the Legs (No. 4). Leg ^practice, — 
Hang by the hands, one on either side, and throw the 
right leg over the bar, as far as the bend of the leg, 
letting the foot, with the toes well pointed to the ground, 
be towards the left, when the right fore- arm may be car- 
ried over in like manner by bending it at the elbow, and 
letting the hand be over the head. Now, let go your 
hold of the bar ^vith the lejt hand, and let the left leg 
and arm hang loosely down while the body is suspended 
as above directed. 

This exercise may be varied by hanging by the left 
arm and leg in like manner. 

Or, if preferred, the left arm and nght leg may be the 
means of carrying out the directions. 

Or, the body may be suspended by the right arm and 
left leg. 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 45 



All tlie above ought to be well practised, as they tend 
greatly to strengthen the knee joint, and, like Ex. 22, are 
often useful in climbing. The changes are not to be 
done slowly, first the leg, then the arm, and so on ; but 



Fig. 24. 




both leg and arm, for whichever part of the exercise is 
to be done, must be carried over the bar as quickly as 
possible. 

24. The Suspender. S2nne and leg irractice. — This 
exercise is meant to strengthen the grasping of the bars 
with the legs, and especially with but one leg, therefore 
it should be practised with the right and left alternatel y 
over the bar. 

Stand under the bar and grasp it ^vith both hands' 



46 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



one on either side, and witli a sudden spring throw the 
right leg over it towards the left, then place the toes of 
the left foot under the bar, as in fig. 24 ; let go the 
hands, and allow jour body to lower itself as much as 
possible, remaining in that position as long as convenient, 
or else raise the body up and down a few times ; this 
latter would bring the spine of the back into fall play, 
and it would derive great benefit therefrom. The hands 
may either hang loosely, as in the illustration, or be 
folded across the chest ; in either case, they must remain 
in the same position while raising or lowering the body. 
The leg under the bar must be kept perfectly straight. 

25. Bow and Ends. Sjoine, leg, and wrist jpradice. — 
This amusing, and to all appearance grotesque, exercise 
tends nevertheless to strengthen the grasp, and, in effect- 
ing it, it will be seen that the wrists come in for their 
share of the benefits to be derived therefrom. 

Place both hands some little distance apart on the bar 
and grasp it firmly, letting the thumbs be on the same 
side as the fingers, then bring up the legs, and, passing 
one on either side of the arms, instead of between them, 
bend them over as near to the shoulders as possible, 
hitching the toes, one at a time, under the bar, as in 
fig. 25, when the exercise is complete ; after a few at- 
tempts it will become much easier. 

Owing to the great strain upon the wrists by the legs 
pressing upon the arms, it will be utterly impossible to 
vary this, or achieve any other exercise while in this 
position. 

26. To Breast the Bar (No. 2). Muscle practice. — 
Grasp the bar with the arms crossed and the knuckles 
towards you, as in Ex. 12, page 37 ; then achieve the rise 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 47 



and fall, raising tlie body up qnite as high as in the 
former one, and repeating it tTS'o or three times, though 
it will be found rather more difficult to accomplish. 



Fig. 25. 




27. To Breast the Bar (No. 3). Muscle p-actLce. — 
Grasp the bar with the arms crossed as in the last, but 
with the hands turned and the fingers pointing towards 
you, as directed in Ex. 13, page 37, and proceed with 
the rise and fall exercise as before. This exercise will 
have to be persevered in much more than either of 
the preceding, as, owing to the position of the arms, it 
will be found to be very difficult to effect, more especially 
as the body is on no account to be carried on one side, 
either to the right or left, according to whichever arm is 
nearest the bar. 

28. Rise and Fall (No. 4). Muscle x-^ractice. — Hang 
on the bar with one hand on either side, then gradually 
pull the body up by bending the arms, until, by moving 
the head on one side, one shoulder touches the bar, 
when, after remaining in that position a short time, the 



48 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



bodj may be lowered, and, raising it again, let the other 
slionlder toucli the bar. 

ThivS exercise is strongly recommended in Capt. Clias's 
^ Elementary Course of Gymnastic Exercises,' in the fol- 
lowing manner : ' Let the learners,' say four or five at a 
time, 'try who can hang on the bar the longest,' but no 
one must overtire himself in so doing. 

29. Breasting the Bar (No. 5). Wrist and muscle 
practice. — Clench the fists well and place them on the 
bar with the wrist bent over it, then, without moving 
either hand or opening the fingers, raise the body up as 
before as high as possible, when lower it again, the whole 
movement being done very slowly ; and after a few trials 
go through the exercise three or four times simulta- 
neously, but not to overtire yourself. Being excellent ex- 
ercise for the wrists, it should be well practised, though 
somewhat more difficult to effect than No. 1, page 35. 

30. To Change Hands (No. 2). Muscle practice. — 
Proceed as described in Ex. 9, page 35, and when the 
legs and body are well raised, let go the hand 
and grasp the bar on the other side, then let go the left 
and grasp the bar on the same side ; this will cause the 
body to turn round towards the right, and as, during 
the passing of either hand, the whole weight of the body 
is suspended by one arm, it will cause the muscles of 
that arm to be brought into full use, and they will con- 
sequently be greatly strengthened. 

Repeat this exercise by passing the left hand to the 
other side of the bar first, thereby reversing the motion 
of the body. 

31. The Letter L. Muscle practice. — This exercise 
only differs from Ex. 22, page 141, in one respect, that, 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



49 



instead of the legs being allowed to liang straight down, 
thej are brought to a right angle with the bodj, hj 
bending the body at the hips, thereby forming the letter 
L. When in this position raise the body, as in the last 
exercise, or the legs may be brought into the required 
position after the body is raised ; yet it would be better 
to practise the exercise both ways as the relative motions 
are reversed, thus: — Firstly, raise the body after having 
brought up the legs ; secondly, raise the body hefore 
raising the legs ; yet, in whichever way it is done, the 
muscles must derive benefit from it- 

This may seem more difficult to the learner than the 
other, partly owing to the difference in the position of 
the body, but practice will soon overcome that difficulty. 

32. The Walk (No. 3). Arm and muscle practice. — 
As another variation in the walk, which, though simple 
in itself to look at,, is more difficult to achieve than the 
two former exercises already given in page 33, it would 
be well for the gymnast to grasp the bar with both 
hands on the same side^ then breast the bar, and proceed 
along it with slow and even steps as previously described, 
and, when well up in it, let the hands be placed one on 
either side, and proceed in like manner. While walking 
the body will be slanting, and the legs projected a little, 
but the straighter the body is kept the better. 

33. The Walk (No. 4). Arm and muscle practice. — 
Proceed as in the last, with the hands in both positions 
alternately, and achieve the Rise and Fall either with both 
or only one arm, between each step ; the latter will be 
found to be the more difficult, as it is in itself an exercise, 
without any addition. 

34. The Walk (No. 5). Spine and muscle practice. — 

E 



50 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



Hang by the hands with one on either side, when, raising 
the body a little, as in Ex. 9, page 35, lift both legs and 
carry the feet in like manner over the bar, resting the 
heels only on it, but allowing the feet to be kept as far over 
as possible, to prevent their slipping off. 'Now in this 
position walk backward and forward, as in Ex. 7, page 
33, but this will be found a little more diflBcult, as, at 
every step taken by the hands, the feet have to be drawn 
or pushed along the bar, according to the way in which 
the hands move. Let the steps be taken very slowly, 
and do not let the feet be jerked, but allow them to slide 
along easily. 

35. Elbow Practice. — Breast the bar, and, when suf- 
ficiently high, let go with the right hand and carry the 
fore-arm over the bar from the front, hitching it over it 
at the bend of the elbow, then carry the left over in like 
manner and sustain the body in that position, letting 
the elbows be as close together, and the' hands as far 
apart as possible, and when perfect in the above take one 
arm off the bar, and letting it drop down by the side 
support the body by the other, then repeat this portion 
of the exercise by changing arms. This will be found 
to be excellent practice for the arms, the muscles being 
likewise thereby greatly developed. 

36. The Arm Chair (No. 1). Fore-arm praetice. — 
Breast the bar, and rest the fore- arms about three inches 
below the elbow on it, keeping theili bent at the elbow 
and remaining in that position but a short time, as, the 
nearer the bar is to the wrists, the more difficult will 
it be to support yourself. The legs should be perfectly 
straight with the body, and close together, and the head 
leaning a little forward, yet,- for the sake of variety, the 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



51 



legs may be raised as in Ex. 31, page 48, and lowered 
again while thus supported ; this would add greatly 
to the difhcultj of the exercise. 

37. The Arm Chair (No. 2). Up2:)er arm and muscle 
jpractice. — Breast the bar, and, grasping it firmly with 
the left hand, stretch the ricjlit arm out over it, letting 
it rest upon the bar about half-way between the elbow and 
the shoulder ; then, letting go with the left hand, support 
the body in that position for a short time, when regrasp 
the bar, and repeat the exercise by stretching the left 
arm over it in like manner. 

This is a very trying feat to the gymnast, although 
not so to the spectator ; but he has only to try it to be 
convinced of its dif&culty, especially if his muscles be 
not up to the mark. 

As you cannot face the bar in this as in the last ex- 
ercise, the legs, must be carried a little sideways towards 
the bar, thereby acting as a counterpoise. And it must 
be borne in mind that the arm on the bar must be kept 
perfectly straight while supporting the body, though the 
hand may be either open or clenched, but this as best 
suits the g3nnnast. 

38. Spine Practice. — Place the bar as high as the 
breast of the gymnast, and let him stand some distance 
from it, say about the distance of his height from it, 
when, holding his arms straight above his head, with 
the palms of his hands turned towards the bar, and 

- keeping the legs straight and the feet close together, let 
him fall straight forward without bending the body at 
the hips, and, grasping the baron reaching it, let the body 
drop as far towards the ground as possible, but without 



52 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



moving the toes from their place, although the heels are 
of necessity raised from the ground. 

As the body will now form a perfect semicircle, the 
more difficult part of the exercise is to follow, viz., for 
the gymnast to raise the body into an upright position 
again as easily and as regularly as he fell forward ; this 
will not at first be accomphshed without great difficulty, 
but patience is all that is requii-ed, as by practice alone 
is every difficulty in the like exercises overcome. 

39. The Swing. Sj^ine, leg, and arm practice. — Hang 
by the hands about the middle of the bar, bring the legs 
up in front a little and suddenly drop them, as it were, 



Fig. 26. 




not with a jerk, but by endeavouring to carry them out 
farther than they were before, thereby causing them to 
describe a semicircle, at the same time carrying the 
body a little forward : this motion will give a sufficient 
impetus to the body to carry it back beyond, and after a 
while above, the bar (see fig. 26). J^ow, by giving a 
somewhat similar motion to the body and legs, on the 
body dropping again from behind, it will be again 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 53 



carried to the front, wlieii the above movements must 
be repeated to continue the swing. 

It will be found that a certain strain will come upon 
the wrists ; the gjmnast must therefore make the utmost 
use of them when wishing to carry the bodj forwards, 
and he must likewise ease his hands in the backward 
swing when required, whereby he will be able to retain 
his hold of the bar for a much longer time. 

Do not be afraid of swinging too high, as many feats, 
to be hereafter mentioned, depend greatly on the neat- 
ness of the swing, and the facility with which the re- 
quisite height, be it in the forward or backward swing, 
is obtained. 

Swing to and fro at least half a dozen times, not more 
at first, and on leaving the bar do so in the forward 
swing, and when your feet are rising to a level with 
your face ; when, by giving the body a slight impetus 
forward by a spring from the wrists, you may let go 
your hold of the bar and alight on the ground, which 
you mtist do on your toes. After a little practice you 
may try how far you can spring from the bar on ahght- 
ing, but the higher the bar the greater the distance the 
momentum given to your body will carry you. This is 
a very neat way to leave the bar, and the farther the 
gymnast can alight on his feet from it, the greater will 
be his after success, and the .more graceful will his per- 
formance appear. Let him avoid, above all things, jerk- 
ing the legs in swinging. 

40. The Pancake. Wrist ^practice. — Place the bar 
about two feet above the head of the gymnast when 
standing on the ground, and proceed as described in the 
last, and when the body has been swung nearly as high 



54 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



as the bar, let go your hands (the farther the gymnast 
springs from it the greater the effect), and after bring- 
ing them smartly together (see fig. 27), renew your hold 
of the bar and continue to swing each time the exercise 
is to be repeated, which should be at least three times 
before allowing the feet to touch the ground. It is a 
difficult exercise to beginners, but very soon overcome; 
therefore persevere in doing it until able to do it grace- 



FiG. 27. 




fally and to perfection, the former only to be obtained 
by constant practice, whilst the latter consists in the 
smartness with which the hands are brought together. 

It must be borne in mind, that on letting go the bar 
the gymnast must not do so as if he were trying to 
carry himself back from it as far as possible, but a slight 
forward spring must be given to, if possible, enable him 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 55 



to bring his hands together close to, if not just above 
the bar. 

41. To Turn a Pancake. Wrist practice, — Proceed as 
in the last, and when the body is in the forward swing 
(when the back will be towards the ground), let go the 
bar, give a smart turn, and grasp it again quickly, i.e. 
before the body has time to descend, and after a little 
practice the body should be turned nearly every time, 
but not always the same way. One thing must be borne 
in mind, that, on turning the body, it must be done on 
letting go with both hands at once, and not, as many do 
it, by letting go with one hand, and grasping the bar 
again on the body being turned, before the other is re- 
leased. 

42. To Swing by the Legs (No. 1). Spine and hnee 
joradice. — Hang by the legs as in Ex. 20, page 42, and 
keep the feet well towards the ground, then move the 
arms and body to and fro (fig. 28) to get into a good 
swing, the body being drawn up in the forward, and 
carried with the arms as far back as possible in the 
backward swing, and this should be practised until you 
are able to raise the body either way level with the bar. 
This exercise will be found to be of great benefit to the 
knees and legs (see Ex. 83, page 80). 

43. The Fall, or Leg Swing off (No. 1). Leg practice. — 
Hang by the legs and keep the feet well towards the 
ground (fig. 28), then proceed with the Leg Swing, as 
in the last, and when sufficiently high in the backward 
swing, i.e. with the face downwards on the body rising, 
unhitch the legs as in fig. 29, and you will alight 
safely on your feet. (See Ex. 123, page 111). 

It will frequently occur, until yau are able to do this 



56 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. \ 

— ^ I 

exercise properly, viz. until you learn the precise time I 
wken the legs ought to be disengaged from the bar, that ; 
you will fall on all- fours : this is owing to the legs being 
unhitched too soon ; but this is of no importance, as by 
practice that slight mishap will be soon overcome. 



Fig. 28. 




44. The Leg Swing (No. 2). Hiij and leg practice. — 
Swing by the legs with the knees a few inches apart, 
then in tTie forward swing bring the body up, grasp the 
bar between the legs with both hands, and opening the 
legs straight, thereby unhitching them, carry them back 
clear under the bar, and either alight on the ground, or 
accomphsh some other exercise. 

This exercise requires but little practice, but it may 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 57 



be as well to do it slowly at first, and, wlien perfect in 
bringing the legs from over tbe bar as required, it should 
be done as if tbe whole were one simultaneous move- 
ment, no pause taking place from the time the body 
is raised until the feet are free ; therefore the whole 
must be effected before the body returns in the hacl'ward 
swing, and, to look well, it should be done very quickly. 



Fig. 29. 




45. Leg" Swing Catch, — Proceed as described in the 
last exercise but two, and on the body rising suf&ciently 
high, and just as the legs are being unhitched, turn the 
body, and, bringing it up while in the swing, grasp the 
bar with both hands, without allowing the feet to touch 
the ground. 

As a finish to this exercise the legs may now be again 
carried between the arms and hitched over the bar, 
when, by letting go the hands, achieve the last exercise 
but one. 



58 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



46. Arm and Wrist Practice. — Hang on the bar, and 
pull tlie body slowly up ; then raise one of the elbows 
well up above the bar, say the right one, so as to throw 
the whole weight of the body on the right wrist, which 
can only be done by getting the fore- arm as perpen- 
dicular as possible; then, as soon as the elbow is raised, 
let go with the left hand, which will cause the body to 
turn a Httle out of its position, and suspend the body by 
the right arm. On letting go with the left hand, let it 
drop straight down by the side, and bringing it up again, 
grasp the bar with it, then lower the elbow of the right 
arm, and lower the body by straightening both of them. 
Pull the body up again, and repeat the exercise with the 
left elbow up. 

One of the diflB.culties of this exercise consists in the 
lowering of the body and raising it again directly be- 
tween each change, which might be made three times, 
whereby each arm will be brought into use twice. 

As this is somewhat difficult at first, the gymnast 
would do well not to tire the body too much by trying 
to do more than one change at first ; and until that can 
be effected clearly, without the least hitch in doing it, 
he ought not to attempt a second. The same advice is 
equally applicable to the making of the third change, 
yet the exercise has many good points to recommend it. 

47. Arm and Wrist Practice. — Proceed as described in 
the last exercise, and, on letting go with the left hand, 
and the body turning round as there stated, pass it behind 
you and grasp the bar under firmly, when the fingers ^ 
that hand will be uppermost, letting the hands be as 
close together as possible, then let the body drop below 
the bar as far as practicable. 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



59 



'^ovf- for the difficulty. Reverse the motion and raise 
the body on the rigid arm as before, let go with the left 
hand, bring it round, and, grasping the bar, let the body 
drop with straight arms ; then pull the body up again, 
and repeat the exercise with the left elbow up. The 
pull up is to be done between each change, as in the last ; 
still, that part of the exercise may be left out in the first 
three or four attempts, or it may be the means of pre- 
venting the gymnast from making a change. 

Steadiness and perseverance is all that is required in 
mastering these exercises, which, when once overcome, 
^Y^\1 be a very good illustration of the capabilities of the 
gymnast to do many such and much more difficult ones. 

48. To Touch the Bar with the Toes (No. 1). Leg 
practice. — Grasp the bar near to the end with both 
hands, one on either side, and with the face towards the 
length of it. 

Draw the body gradually up by bending the arms well 
until the head touches, or, if preferred, until it be above 
the bar, when the shoulder will touch it, then slowly 
raise the legs straight up until able to touch the bar 
mth the toes, without either altering the position of the 
body by moving the arms, or by bending the legs other- 
wise than at the hips. 

This and the next exercise (which see) should be well 
practised and persevered in to succeed, for, though great 
strength is required to bring the body up, still greater 
exertion on the part of the muscles will be necessary to 
achieve the required feat, viz., that of touching the bar 
with the toes. 

As in many other exercises where both of the legs are 
to be brought into use, the young gymnast would do 



60 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



well, in practising tliis, to bring, at first, but one leg up 
at a time, allo^ying tlie otlier to bang loosely, or be may 
bring one leg up at tbe same time tbat be carries tbe 
otber down, but eitber must be persevered in to accom- 
plisb it as it should be done ; yet I should not, as a rule, 
recommend this latter practice, as, if practicable, it would 
be far preferable to learn to bring up both legs at once. 

The legs are to be carried up to the bar very slowly ; 
they are not to be swung in the least, but rather let the 
feat be done by the sole exertions of the muscles, other- 
wise the effect will be destroyed, and the feat will appear 
much more easy to accomphsh than it really is. 

This exercise may be vaHed by straightening the arms 
and lowering the body, and raising it again, at the same 
time keeping the toes touching the bar. (See next 
exercise.) 

49. To Touch the Bar with the Toes (No. 2). Leg 

practice. — Hang by the hands, with the arms perfectly 
straight, and, without bending the legs, bring them up 
very slowly and touch the bar with the toes, and as 
slowly carry them do^ra again. In doing this exercise 
the body is to be kept perfectly sti^aight, for if it be bent 
but a httle and carried up with the legs, the feet will be 
thereby projected beyond the bar, and the effect of the 
exercise lost. (See remarks upon last exercise.) 

50. To Rise above the Bar (No. 1). Circling the Bar 
(No. 1). Arm and uvasde loractice. — Hang on the bar 
and proceed -v^-ith No. 18, but carry the legs above the 
bar instead of under, then, by pulling the body up with 
the arms, as in Xo. 9, and with a slight motion of the 
wrist, carry the legs completely over the bar, in going 
over which they will act as a sort of balance to your 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 61 



body, and with the assistance of your arms the body will 
be brought into the required position. 

As a means of enabling a young gymnast to circle the 
bar sooner than by the method just described, let him fix 
the bar about as high as his breast, when, after having 
placed his hands on the bar, with a step forward, he 
might give his legs that impetus upwards which will 



Fig. 30. 




carry him over the bar much more quickly ; but in so 
doing the legs must be straightened (see fig. 30), and 
carried over the bar by the simultaneous motion of the 
arms, especially the wrists. This will, in a very short 
time, enable him to do it as first described, when the 
bar should be raised high enough to cause the gymnast 
to jump up to reach it. (See Ex. 1, page 29.) 

This, to a beginner, is a difficult and annoying exer- 



62 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



cise. Difficult, because lie is verv likely to be a long 
time before lie is able to do it to perfection ; annoying, 
because liis sliins are sure to suffer if lie does not go over 
tbe bar as lie intended. Yet, wlien once accomplislied. 
no exercise will be found more easy. 

51. To Rise above the Bar (No. 2). The Slow Pull 
np. — Breast tlie bar, tben endeavour to raise the body 
above tlie bar. This must at first be done by brinoing 

one arm up at a 



Fig. 31. 



time, first the right 
arm, then the left, 
raising the elbows 
up as high as pos- 
sible (see fig. 31), 
when, by leaning 
the head forward 
over the bar, and 
carrying the legs a 
little out in front, 
which greatly assist 
you, as all your 
strength will be re- 
quii^ed, you must 
raise the body up 
by straightening the 
arms. This will call 
all the muscles of 
the arms into full 
use, as well as the 
wrists, and consequently requires some little practice to 
be able to achieve it. The thumbs must be on the op- 
posite side of the bar to the fingers, and the exercise 




Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



63 



should be persevered in until you are able to bring up 
both arms at once. (See Exercises 57 and 58.) 

52. To Rise above the Bar (No. 3). The Slow Pull 

up. — Hang by the bar, with the hands so far over it 
that the body shall be suspended entirely by the wrists, 
and proceed as described in the last, but with this dif- 
ference — that in this the arms are both made use of 
together ; and the slower the exercise is done the better, 
as the main difficulty is in the raising of the body up 
without holding the bar at all with the hands. (See 
Exercises 57 and 58, pages 65 and 66.) 

53. To Rise above the Bar (No. 4).— Hang by the 
hands and throw the right leg over the bar on the right 
hand side of them, then, by swinging the left leg to and 
fro somewhat similarly to the ordinary swing, give it 
a kind of jerk on the backward swing, which, assisted 
by the wrists, will enable you, by throwing the body a 
httle forward, to raise it above the bar. Repeat the 
exercise by throwing the left leg over the bar. 

54. To Rise above the Bar (No. 5). Quick movement. 
— Hang by the hands and swing, then, in the forward 
swing, suddenly throw the right leg over the bar as in 
the last exercise, and with a kind of stronger impetus 
with the left leg on the backward swing to increase the 
momentum of, and to give a kind of send to the body, 
assisted a^ before by the wrists, raise the body above 
the bar. The whole must be done as quickly as possible, 
and practised until you are able to do it as required, 
without the least pause, as the leg ought to be carried 
over the bar and the body raised without that swinging 
to and fro alluded to in the last. 

Repeat this likewise mth the left leg over the bar. 



64 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



55. To Rise above the Bar (No. 6).— Hang by the 
bands, and bring the right leg between the arms (fig. 
32), and bend it firmly over the bar, pointing the toes 
towards the ground, then, with the impetus as in the 
last, bring the body above the bar. (Fig. 33.) 



Fig. 32. 




This exercise should be repeated with the left leg over 
the bar. 

56. To Rise above the Bar (No. 7).— Swing, and in 
the forward swing bring up the right leg and carry it 
over the bar in the manner described in the last two 
exercises, but, in doing this, carry it over the bar on 
the other side of the left hand, then, at the turn of 
the swing, give the requisite downward motion with 
the left leg, and with the aid of the wrists rise 
above the bar. Let this be practised well, and, when 
able to do it freely, carry the left leg over the bar 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



65 



instead, and repeat the exercise, and do not be satisfied 
unless able to make use of tbe one as well as tbe other. 

It being somewhat more difficult than either of the 
two preceding methods, it should be well persevered in, 
as it is a decided improvement in the style of the exer- 
cise. 

Fig. 33. 




67. To Rise above the Bar (No. 8). The Upstart. Wrist 

practice. — Hang hj the hands, which must be well over 
the bar, and swing once to and fro, then in the forward 
swing bring the legs up straight, raise the bodj up by 
bending the arms (fig. 34), lean the head back a little, 
and jerk or carry them down suddenly, thereby making 
the feet describe part of a circle, and give a kind of 

F 



66 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



impulse to tlie body, wlien, tlirowing the body somewhat 
forward towards the bar, you will be able to rise above 
it, in doing wliich the wiists must not be idle (see The 
Slow Pull up, Ex, 52, page 63). 



Fig. 3i. 




This exercise will require constant practice, but the 
difficulty is easily overcome by patience and perseverance : 
yet, until the wrists have been well schooled into what 
is required of them by other minor exercises, it will be 
useless for the gymnast to attemjDt either this or the 
following exercise. 

58. To Rise above the Bar (No. 9). The Jerk (No. 1). 
Wrist jjractice. — This exercise differs in two things only 
from that pre^uously described, viz. first, that it is done 
without a swing; and secondly, that the arms are here to 
be kept straight. 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



67 



Hang on the bar, bring tlie legs up in front straight, 
and, leaning the bead back a little (fig. 35), jerk or 
carry the legs down suddenly, making the feet describe 
a semicircle, and by the strength of the wrists, without 
bending the arms in the least, raise the body above the 
bar. The momentum given by the sudden motion of the 
legs greatly assists the wrists in the fulfilment of their 
duty. 

Fig. 3.5. 




This exercise, as well as the former, ^vill requii^e con- 
stant practice to overcome all difficulties, and, when able 
to achieve it, let the gymnast practise it with the hands 
reversed, therebv brino^ing- the fino^ers towards him. 

59. To Eise above the Bar (No. 10). Circling the 
Bar (No. 2). Arm and muscle irractice. — Grasp the bar 

F 2 



1 

I 
J 

68 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. \ 

i 

, 

witli tlie arms across, as in Ex. 12, page 17, and, without 
letting the body turn either to the right or to the left, 
according to whichever arm is underneath, circle the 
bar as in a former exercise (page 37) ; but it will bej 
found to be a little more difficult to achieve, yet a little | 
perseverance will enable it to be sooner overcome. 

60. To Rise above the Bar (No. 11). Circling the 
Bar (No. 3). Spine, arm, and muscle practice. — Grasp 
the bar with the arms across, as in Ex. 13, page 37, and' 
proceed to circle it as before, but in so doing the body : 
is to be carried up perfectly straight, and on no account 
is it to be allowed to slide off sideways on to the bar. ' 
The chief obstacle that presents itself in this exercise is j 
the pressing of the elbows against the stomach on! 
bringing the body up, by which it will be seen that this 
method of circling the bar is very difficult, even to ai 
skilful gymnast, until he has practised it a few times ; ■ 
yet, with a little patience and perseverance, it is to be , 
accomplished. ; 

61. Wrist and Arm Practice. — Rise above the bar by! 
any method preferred, then, grasping it firmly with thej 
riglit hand, which should be close to the side, let go with j 
the left, stretching it over the bar towards the right as J 
the body turns a little round, and support the body a ■ 
short time with the right arm without bending it, then ■ 
grasp the bar with the left hand, and repeat the exercise. ; 
As the exercise consists in keeping the body as upright ^ 
as possible above the bar, the grasp must be very firm, i 
the hand on no account to be allowed to slip. ^ \. ■ 

62. Muscle Practice. — Proceed, by any method pre- ■ 
ferred, to raise the body above the bar, then, grasping it i 
firmly, with the hands a little more over it than usual, 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 6y 



lean a little backward and support the body Tvitliont 
letting it toncli tlie bar, and tbe fiirtber it is carried from 
it tbe better. This should be practised and persevered 
in, until those who have great strength of muscle are 
able to lower themselves in this manner T^-ithout bendino- 
the arms in the least, and without increasing the motion 
of the body after having once begun. 

63. To Sit on the Bar (No. 1). — Mount above the 
bar by either method preferred, and, when in an upright 
position bring one leg over the bar at a time, liftino' 
either hand alternately to allow of your assuming the 



Ficx. 36. 




sitting posture, and when fairly balanced without fear 
of falling backward, bring up the fore-arms, as shown in 
fig. 36. 

64. To Sit on the Bar (No. 2). The Plymouth. S;pine 



70 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



practice ; sloiv movement. — Bring the legs through, as 
described in Ex. 18, page 40, and in carrying them 
over the bar let them be a little bent, then, bending the 
body well back, and turning the head back as far as 
possible, i.e. the face towards the ground, and the 
farther you look along the ground the better, whereby 
the body is the better kept in that position, and which 



Fig. 37. 




enables the exercise to be the more easily done, raise 
the body up by the aid of your arms, similar to Ex. 9, 
page 35 ; then, when the bar is a little over the seat 
(fig. 37), by bending the legs more over it, which acts 
as a sort of leverage to the body, you will be enabled 
to bring it over it and assume a sitting posture. But 
your own judgment must be used as to the best time 
to do so, for, when the bar touches the centre of the 
back, the arms must do the remainder of the work, but 
do not pull yourself too far over the bar, otherwise, in 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



71 



assuming the sitting posture, a beginner is very likely to 
fall forward, which would not be very pleasant for his 
arms ; but should such a mishap occur, it will be well for 
him to give a slight spring forward and alight on the 
ground in front of the bar, as in the next exercise. This 
method of sitting on the bar is sure to give greater satis- 
faction than by simply circling it, and it requires but a 
little constant practice to be able to achieve it adroitly, 
the one chief point, next to the raising of the body, being 
to bend the head well back and bend the legs well over 
the bar. Omit these, and the exercise is rendered all 
the more difficult to be achieved. 

65. The Slide. Spine p-adice. — Proceed as described 
in the last exercise, and, when your body is fairly over 
the bar, let it slide forward, and, on its dropping, give a 
little sudden spring forward with the wrists, letting go 
the bar and alighting on the ground as far from it as 
possible, but let the arms be brought up a little to free 
them from the bar. 

66. The Balance. Spine practice. — Again proceed as 
described in the preceding exercise, and, when the bar 
reaches the centre of the back, allow the head to hang 
down backward, and by letting go your hands in order 
to sustain yourself on the bar ^vithout falling over either 
side, thereby balancing yourself. (See fig. 38.) Stretch- 
ing the hands over the head, or waving them backward 
and forward will greatly assist you, but it needs a little 
practice to be able to do it fearlessly. 

67. Slide Catch. — Achieve the Slide, as in Ex. 65, and 
on the bar reaching the centre of the back, balance 
yourself for a moment, throwing the arms well over the 
head, which bend back as far as able, then let the body 



72 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



slide forward over the bar, without altering the position 
of the hands ; but, when it is fairly di^oiDping, raise the 
head, and, giving the body a turn to bring the face 
towards the bar, grasp the bar with your hands. This 
is a very pretty and neat exercise, if cleanly done, and 
only requires a little practice. 



Fig. 38. 




68. Sitting on the Bar (No. 3). Balance jjradice, — 
Mount at one end of the bar, and sit on it by any method 
preferred ; let the fore-arms be extended in front as in 
the last exercise, and give a slio'ht sprino- sidewavs alono; 
the bar, and continue until the opposite end be reached, 
when return with the reverse motion. 

When able to do this, fold the arms a-kimbo, and repeat 
the exercise both ways. In either case the arms may be 
jerked up to assist the gymnast in making the spring, 
but in neither case are the positions of the hands to be 
altered after having begun the exercise, as this will tend 
to show a sign of fear. 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



73 



69. Sitting on the Bar (No. 4). Balancing irractice. 
— Sit on the bar as in the last exercise, but, in the middle 
of it, then, keeping in the position shown in fig. 36, 
work the body forward by very slight jumps or jerks, or 
otherwise, until the bar is quite under the seat, then 
carry the body gradually the reverse way until the bar 
reaches the bend of the knees, when the body must be 
leaned a Httle forward, and the feet be carried a little 
back to assist in efiecting the balance, which should be 
done at nearly every jerk forward or backward, and on 
no account are the hands to touch the bar while carrying 
the exercise into effect . 

These balances are of great utility to the gymnast, as 
by them he is often able to save himself from a mishap, 
which might otherwise occur ; in addition to which, it 
enables him to achieve many other exercises, with much 
greater ease. 

70. Balance Practice. — Mount above the bar by 
either of the methods described in the foreo'oino; exer- 
cises, and throw either leg over it, when, by placing the 
hands in front of you, ^vLth the fingers of each hand on 
opposite sides of the bar, thereby causing the elbows to 
be brought towards the body, sit astride it as on a 
saddle. (See fig. 42.) ^N'ow, by keeping the arms per- 
fectly straight and upright, bend the body up in front, 
which will cause the head to be carried somewhat for- 
ward, and enable you to raise yourself completely off 
the bar : but in doing this, the legs should be bent 
both at the hips and knees, thereby assuming a sitting 
posture. 

While achievino^ this exercise, the bar is not to be 
touched by any other part of the body than the hands, 



74 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



as tlie bodj is to be supported in equilibrium upon 
tbem. In grasping tbe bar tbe thumbs sbould not 
be on tbe same side of tbe bar as tbe fingers of each, 
hand. 

71. To Stand on the Bar (No. 1). Balancing ]jractice. 
— Proceed as in the last exercise, and continue to raise 
the body and legs ujitil the feet can be placed upon the 
bar, the right before the left, when let go your hold of 
it, and slowly rise, but while so doing hold the arms out, 
one on either side, to assist you in balancing yourself 
while endeavouring to effectuate the exercise, which 
should be well persevered in until able to carry it 
throug:h without the least hesitation or sim of fear. If 
preferred, the bar may be put at about three feet from 
the ground until perfect in it. 

72. To Stand on the Bar (No. 2). Leg and toe j^fcic- 
tice. — Place the hands on the bar, spring up, and sit on 
it with the legs on the outside. Now turn the body on 
one side (say to the right), raise the right leg up, bend- 
ing it at the knee, and place the foot upon the bar, as 
close as possible to the body, then hitch the left foot 
under the bar, lean the body forward with the arms 
extended in front to balance yourself (fig. 39), and by 
the aid of the toes under the bar, with which you are to 
steady yourself, raise your body up so as to stand on 
the right leg, but do not unhitch the toe under the bar 
until you are firmly standing on the other foot, when 
straighten the leg, or gradually lower yourself again, 
taking care how you slide the toe along under the bar, 
and likewise to maintain a good balance. It must be 
tried two or three times to learn the exact movements 
required ; and, when able to do it as above, let the left 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



75 



foot be placed on tlie bar and the right foot hitcbed 
under it, and repeat the exercise. 

73. The Spring (No. 1). — Monnt by any method pre- 
ferred, and sit on the bar ^vith the arms bent, the fore- 
arms being extended in front as in fig. 36. IN'ow give 
a sudden spring ofi' the bar, and alight on the ground. 



Fig. 39. 




Care must be taken to give a good spring, assisted by 
throwing the arms up a httle, but on leaving the bar 
they are not to be thrown back, nor are the hands to 
touch the bar whilst and after making the spring. 

The body is not to be allowed merely to slip oflP, but 
the gymnast must endeavour to alight as far from the 
bar as possible. 

74. The Spring (No. 2). — Sit on the bai* by any 
method preferred, letting go your hold of it, and 
placing the arms, a little bent at the elbow, at the 
sides, as in the last. "Now give a sudden spring a little 
forward, suflB.cient to carry you off the bar, throwing 
the arms up to assist you, at the same time giving the 



76 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



body a sliarp turn so as to bring tlie face towards the 
bar, then, on the bodj dropping, grasp it with both 
hands at once, when finish with anj showy exercise, 
always making up your mind what yon will do prior to 
achieving the above, so as to lose no time when it is 
ejffected. 

Let the body be turned sometimes to the riglit, some- 
times to the left, and do not always turn it the same 
way, and, in tui^ning it, let it be done very neatly while 
making the spring, or the effect will be destroyed, as it 
may be done ^twt to the accomphshing of many exer- 
cises heloic the bar. 

75. The Whirligig. Balancing irractice. — This is a 
very amusing exercise, not only as regards a gymnastic 
feat, but it tests the learner's fall balancing powers, and 
likewise nerves him to do others much more daring, 
without having the least fear. 

Cii^cle the bar (or mount by either of the other 
methods), and sit on it. TVork your body a little on one 
side, and throw the rigid leg over the bar without any 
fear of falling, or resting the hands on the bar, then 
throw the left over, and repeat the same as often as con- 
venient and as quickly as possible, and, when perfect in 
the above, the exercise may be reversed by throwing the 
left leg over the bar first ; then, for sake of variety, throw 
both legs over at once, twice each way. 

Though diflB-Cult at first, it will be found to be much 
easier after having tried it a few times, especially if the 
legs be kept perfectly straight in carrying them over the 
bar, and without the slightest pause or hesitation. 

76. The Vault (No. 1). — Mount above the bar, and 
grasp it firmly with the fingers on the outside, then, 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 77 



after moying the legs to and fro sicleTvays two or three 
times, carry them over the bar, as shown in the illustra- 
tion (fig. 40), then, letting go with the hands, alight on 
the ground, which must be done on the toes. 

The bar should not be too high from the ground at 
first, as it is easy, after a little time, to raise it, for, the 
higher the bar, the greater the efiect in achieving the 
exercise (see the Vaulting Exercises, page 246). 

Fig. 40. 




77. The Vault (No. 2). SitUng ^practice. — Mount 
above the bar, and proceed as in the last exercise, but, in 
carrying the legs over to the right, let go with the right 
hand and sit on the bar, then, achieving some other 
exercise, or simply turning the body round to face the 
bar, repeat the exercise by carrying the legs over to the 
left. This requires some little practice to be able to 
keep on the bar. As by right the bar ought not to be 
regrasped by the hand, let go to allow the legs to pass. 



78 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



78. The Jerk (No. 2). Leg and arm ]oractice ; quick 
movement. — Acbieve Ex. 58, page 66, and on rising above 
the bar, carry the legs over it, as in Ex. 76, page 76, 
then, on the body dropping, give it a turn, let go with the 
hands, regTasp the bar and repeat the exercise at least 
four times, achieving it as quickly as possible, as, in doing 
it thus, it clearly shows the freedom with which the 
gymnast can use his arms and legs, besides being, in it- 
self, a very showy combination of the J erk and the Vault. 

79. The Jerk (No. 3). Quick movement. — Proceed as 
described in Ex. 58, page 66, and, on the body going 
above the bar, carry it sufficiently high to enable you to 
carry the legs between the arms over the bar, and to sit 
on it ; then, without resting or moving the hands, fall 
back, and, in falling, let the legs pass between the arms 
again, when, after a little practice, the exercise may be 
repeated four or five times without stopping. 

The peculiarity and difficulty of this exercise is in the 
keeping of the legs perfectly straight during the execu- 
tion of it ; added to which, the acti^dty and energy dis- 
played by the gymnast in carrying his body up and his 
legs through add gTeatly to show a proficiency which 
few in any one local club are able to boast of. 

80. To Lie on the Bar. Balancing practice. — Sit astiide 
the bar as on a saddle, then lean gradually back until 
your head touches it, then place your legs also on it, 
keeping them perfectly straight. 

Perhaps the above will to some appear impossible. If 
so, do it thus: — in leaning back, place the feet under the 
bar, to steady yourself. If that is not sufficient, put 
your hands on the bar behind you, or, in leaning back, 
let your arms hang over the head until the hands touch 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 79 



the bar, when steady yourself whilst you place the feet 
on the bar. 

After the body is out straight the arms may be allowed 
to hang loosely by the side, folded across the chest, or 
placed in any position the gymnast may think proper. 

The arms may likewise be moved about so as to test 
the feat, or the legs may hang loosely on either side of 
the bar, all of which will add greatly to the exercise. 

81. A Poser. Wrist practice. — Mount by any method, 
and grasp the bar firmly with the fingers on the outside, 
and the thumb towards you, when, by keeping the arms 
perfectly straight, pass both legs between them at once, 
and either assume the sitting posture, or let go your hold 



Fig. 41. 




and alight on the ground; or the gymnast may reverse 
the motion, and carry the legs back again over the bar. 
This will be found to be rather difficult, yet it is to 



80 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



be adiieved by practice, and is mucli better tban simply 
aligbting on the ground. 

The legs, as will be seen in fig. 41, are crossed, and 
the bead leans forward, in order to balance the body 
while the legs are passed between the arms. 

The firmer the grasp and the straight er the arms, the 
more likely you are to succeed, for the legs press very 
much against the arms in working their way over the 
bar, thereby intimating that they want a little more 
room. 

This is a very clever exercise, if done neatly by bring- 
ing the legs through the arms together, and not one at 
a time, and if the hands do not shift their place during 
the feat. 

82. The J ockey. Balancing jpractice. — This exercise is 
not much to look at whilst being done by another ; but 
it is more dif&cult to achieve than will at first appear. 

Sit astride the bar, as in the last exercise, bring the 
elbows against the sides, lean forward so as to lift your- 
self from the bar (fig. 42) ; when in that position, move 
the hands alternately along the bar, very slowly at first, 
and practise until able to run along the bar very quickly, 
and when perfect in the above, the gymnast can vary his 
movements similar to some of the steps in dancing, espe- 
cially the advancing and retiring step in the quadrille, 
but the body must not on any account be allowed to 
touch the bar during the performing of a certain motion 
or figure. 

83. To Hang by the Legs (No. 2).— Eise above the 
bar and sit on it, then, placing one hand on either side 
of you, gradually slide back over the bar, and lean the 
body forward until the bar reaches the bend of the knee, 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 81 



when, grasping it firmly, and bending the legs well 
under it, let the bodj fall gently backwards, and when 
steady let go with the hands. 

This is a method often requii^ed to hang by the legs, 
and should therefore be practised, as it enables you to 
shift from one exercise to another. (See Ex. 74, 
page 75.) 

84. The Drop. Qidclc Movement. — Hang by the legs 



Fig. 42. 




with the arms straight down, and when the body is 
perfectly steady, bring the arms up in front and give 
them a quick forward and downward motion, similar to 

G 



82 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



that required in tlie swing, but without moving the body 
at all, unhitching the legs at the same time ; the com- 
bined impetus thus given to the body will cause it to 
turn half round, when you can alight on the feet. 

This is a very pretty finish if neatly and quickly done, 
and is not so difficult to bring about as it at first seems, 
a few trials only sufficing to enable it to be accompHshed 
vrithout any fear of a mishap, which cannot occur if the 
legs are unhitched at the same time that the arms are 
carried down; but if preferred, the Lungers'* may be used. 

85. The Leg Swing. Knee practice. — Mount above 
the bar, and throw the right leg over it between the 
hands, as in fig. 32, by which it will be seen that it 
rests on the bar at the bend of the knee ; then move the 
left leg to and fro, when with a sudden movement throw 
yourself backwards with such force as to carry you 
round the bar into your former position. Therefore the 
arms must not remain mere supporters of the body, but 
assist in carrying it round, they being kept perfectly 
straight throughout, and on the body rising again above 
the bar it should be retained there ; but, when able to 
achieve the above easily, the body may be thrown back 
each time it rises, thereby carrying yourself round the 
bar several times without stopping. 

To reverse the swing, change the position of the 

* This being the first time that the Lungers (see page 10) are re- 
ferred to, the gymnast is strongly urged to bear in mind that, in 
practising any future exercise, in the achieving of which he shows 
any sign of fear, they should be scrupulously made use of, as then 
he might attempt the most dangerous on record without the least 
fear, provided he has two trustworthy assistants to hold the ropes, 
one on either side of him. 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



83 



hands bv tiirnirig the knuckles back-wards, then, by 
raising the body off the bar so as to throTv Tonr whole 
weight upon the arms, lean the head a little forward, 
and keeping the legs perfectly straight, give the body a 
forward motion, and practise it until able to carry your- 
self round the bar several times without stopping. 
Both methods should be practised with each leg over 
the bar alternately. 

86. The Short Swing or Circle. Wrist 'practice. — 
Mount above the bar w^th the fingers and thumbs on 
the outside, resting the body against it at the pit of 
the stomach, then move the legs to and fro, and with 
a gentle yet strong movement throw the head back and 
the legs forward and upw^ard, which, being assisted 
greatly by the wrists, will enable you to go completely 
round the bar, stopping at first between each revolution ; 
but, after a little practice, it may be done five or six 
times in succession. 

This exercise is very difficult to a beginner, as, after 
having thrown the body back, the position it then 
assumes is very similar to that in Ex. 50, page 60, more 
especially if the pupil should not succegd in raising the 
legs above the bar as he intended. 

After some httle practice this exercise should be 
effected without allowing the body to touch the bar at 
all whilst going round ; but this will be found to be 
much more difficult, as the wrists will then have to do 
all the work. 

87. The Slide (No. 2). Spine., leg, and ivrist practice ; 

quicJc movement, — Swing, bring the legs well up in 
front, and in the backward swing pass them between 
the arms and shoot them over the bar quickly, which, 

G 2 



84 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



aided by the arms and wrists, will enable jou to carry 
the body completely oyer it instead of slowly, as in Ex. 
64, page 69, when you may either alight on the ground, 
or support yourself on the bar, or fall back, drop the 
legs back through the arms and repeat the exercise, or 
achieve some other exercise by way of a finish. This 
exercise looks remarkably well if, with as quick a move- 
ment as possible, the body be brought up and carried 
over the bar, wheri, letting go with the hands, alight 
on the ground without its having touched it in any paii: 
otherwise than the hands. When given as a set exercise, 
or as one for style in competitions, this is the one chief 
point aimed at ; therefore practise it well until perfect in 
it, as above stated. 

88. The Side Slide. Slou: movement, — Grasp the bar 
with the hands (one on ei(her side), and with a sudden 
impetus throw both legs up and backward over the bar, 
hitching them over it to support the body. 

It is now required to carry the body over the bar in 
the direction of the legs, to effectuate which you must 
proceed thus : — Lift up the leg nearest the hands and 
carry it farther ^ver the bar, say half-way between the 
bend of the leg and the hip, clinging firmly to the bar 
with the other leg ; or, if preferred, this leg may be 
slidden a little further along the bar so as to rest the 
heel only on it, which will then have to support the 
body, and with a gradual motion, by bending the arms 
and' back, and, greatly assisted by the v^^rists, carry the 
body up as required, but, "on dropping over on the other 
side, you must retain your hold of the bar, consequently 
the hands must be allowed to work round the bar while 
the exercise is being achieved. 



Eccercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



85 



At first it would be as well, until more perfect, before 
carrying tlie nearest leg over, to lift it entirely off tlie 
bar, letting it drop forward, and with a sudden im- 
petus, by bending the back, and raising tlie body up as 
much as possible, swing it over the bar, carrying the 
body as far as able. Great exertion will be required 
to carry the body as far as the hollow of the back, but 
still greater exertion, perseverance, and practice, to go 
through with and accomplish the exercise as neatly as it 
ought to be done. 

I have mentioned that the heel of the off leg may be 
brought to rest on the bar. Now some prefer, instead of 
that, to hitch the toe of the off foot under the bar (fig. 
43), and thus complete the exercise. The choice is, of 




course, left to the gymnast, but the execution of it is the 
same. 

The position of the hands and legs may be thus de- 
scribed. K, in standing under the bar with the hands 
grasping it, and the right hand be before the left, the legs 
must be carried over the left side of the bar, when the 
right leg will become the nearest, and the left the off leg ; 



86 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



but if tlie left hand be placed before tlie right, then the 
order is reversed, and the left leg becomes the nearest, 
and the right leg the off; consequently the exercise, as it 
is written, is applicable to either position. i 

89. To Roll round the Bar sideways. Sjoi^ie, leg, 
and. arm x^radice. — When the gymnast can accomplish j 
the foregoing exercise to perfection he may advantage- j 
ously 2Droceed to attempt this one, but it would not be j 
advisable to proceed unless certain of thoroughly under- • 
standing the several movements, they being very similar, ; 
though reversed. 

Achieve the Jerk (Ex. 58, page 66), and vault over i 
the bar and sit on it (Ex. 77, page 77), or else effect the | 
last exercise but one, then place both hands on the right- ' 
hand side, with the knuckles of that hand backwards, | 
and those of the left to the front, the left hand being i 
close to the body. Xow raise the left leg up behind and - 
hitch the toes under the bar upwards firmly, and slide ; 
forward as far as the seat (if well over it the better), ! 
w^th the body leaning back, the head up, and the arms ; 
bent ; then, passing the hands well backward round the ; 
bar, swing the right leg upward and carry it with all the ' 
force you are able. The momentum thus given to the i 
body will, after a little practice, enable you to go com- \ 
pletely round the bar, with your arms above it as before : 
starting, when the exercise may be repeated two or \ 
three times. Though very difficult to many advanced , 
gymnasts, practice is the essential oil to enable you to ' 
glide round on to the bar again, therefore persevere and \ 
conquer. I 

90. The Hindoo Punishment, or Muscle Grind. I 
Mi'^^de and spine practice. — Sit on the bar and sink '\ 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 87 



down, but letting tlie arms slip (one at a time first) 
backwards over the bar, when the hands can either be 
clasped across the chest, or grasp a belt, which may be 
worn round the waist if preferred (see fig. 44) ; then, 

Fig. 44. 




moving the legs and body to and fro, similar to the 
Swinging exercise, page 52, in the backward swing, and 
with a stronger impetus with the legs, carry the body 
round the bar, which motion must be repeated, on the 
body falling over, every time the gymnast wishes to go 
round. This should not be more than three times at first, 
owing to the friction and rubbing which the arms will 



88 



Exe7xises on the Horizontal Bar. 



get until more used to it, and until sucli is tlie case they 
will be very red and tender after each practice — so much 
so, that the gymnast will not like to repeat it for a day 
or two ; but that must not be noticed too much, as the 
oftener the muscles are thus exercised the less will be 
the notice taken of the results in fntui^e. 

This exercise is reversed by carrying the legs and 
body up in front instead, thereby revolving round the 
other way, but the arms remain the same ; and in this, 
as in many other exercises before and hereafter men- 
tioned, the legs must be made good use of. The gym- 
nast, when perfect in either way, but generally the first, 
would do well to try how many times he can go round, 
or at least from twelve to twenty times. Do not de- 
scend from the bar for a short time until the giddiness 
be worn off, or else achieve the reverse way two or three 
times ; and if not able to do it by yourself, a Httle assist- 
ance should not be refased. 

91, Hand Grind. — Proceed as in the last, but instead 
of bringing the arms down behind the bar and grasping 
the belt, or folding them across the chest, as therein 
stated, stretch the arms out at the sides, and grasp the 
bar a little underneath, but with the thumb uppermost 
(fig. 45) ; then, while in that position, revolve round the 
bar as before, though the pressure there will be found . 
to be more upon the back than in the last. It only re- 
quires a httle practice to be able to acliieve it and over- 
come its difficulty. 

92. The Sit Swing' (Backward). Arm jrradice.— This 
exercise, though to all appearance like Xo. 55, page 64, 
differs greatly from it, as in this the weight of the body 
is thrown upon the arms, whilst in the former the leg 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 89 



over the bar had to bear tliat weight ; moreoyer, this 
exercise is achieved while retaining the body in a sitting 
posture, it will therefore require much more strength 
than the leg swing, and is consequently much more dif- 
ficult to achieve : it is fi^om this posture that it derives 
its name. 



Fig. 4:5. 




Sit on the bar with one hand on either side, and 
the knuckles up|)ermost, then straightening the arms, 
thereby raising the body off the bar, throw yourself 
backwards with suflB.cient force to carry you round the 
bar into your former position again, without letting 
go your hold or losing your position, and it should 



90 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



he persevered in until able to carry the body round 
several times successively without allowing the legs to 
touch the bar at all. 

This is a very clever exercise, yet nothing but con- 
tinual practice will enable it to be overcome, for it will 
frequently happen that, owing to the gymnast not hav- 
ing thrown himself back with sufficient force, he will 
find that he cannot rise high enough, in which case his 
head will be downwards and his legs pointing upwards, 
similar to the position acquired Ex. 65, page 71. When 
this occurs, either achieve that exercise, or else bring 
the legs through and mount afresh, when try, try again, 
vdth a determination to succeed. 

93. The Half-fall Back and Swing off.— Sit on the 
bar with the legs bent well under, so as to hold it close 
to the bend of the knees, and with the arms extended 
downwards over the knees, then, leaning the body well 
forward to balance yourself, and to give it a greater dis- 
tance to go, throw yourself back over the bar with as great 
an impetus as you can ; in fact, try to throw yourself off 
it : the momentum thus given will cause the body to 
rise up on the other side, then, when the head rises 
nearly as high as the bar, as in fig. 29, you can unhitch 
the legs, and you will alight safely on the ground. In 
doing this and the next exercise the using of the arms 
is indispensable, they should consequently be used freely ? 
therefore do not be afraid of flinging yourself ofi" with too 
great a force, for the greater the force used the better, 
as it will lead to the executing of much more difficult 
exercises (see Ex. 97, page 92) ; still, when achieved 
properly, the gymnast will soon learn what amount of 
impetus must be given to carry the body to the required 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



91 



height prior to his unhitching his legs. That will come 
hj practice only, but this exercise is sure to receive 
great approbation, especially if done fearlessly, and with 
a determination to succeed. 

94. The Catch. — Proceed as in the last, but, on un- 
hitching the legs from the bar, give the body a sudden 
tui^n and catch hold of it ag'ain, without allowino- the 
feet to touch the ground. Though this feat appears 
more dif&cult than the last, the gymnast will soon find 
that it is not so much more so as it here appears, and 
that it gives a brilliant finish to it (see Ex. 45, page 57). 

95. The Awkward Job. — Proceed as described in the 
last exercise but one, but, instead of thromng your 
arms back to assist you, you must, on throT^Ting yourself 
back, grasp the bar between the legs, and let it go again 
at the same time that you unhitch your legs, when you 
will alio:ht on the oTOund. 

In throwing yourself back, do not grasp the bar too 
soon, as that will spoil the required effect ; neither must 
you be afraid to let go the bar, for there is not the least 
danger of falling, provided you throw yourself back with 
as great an impetus as possible. 

96. The Fall Back, or Hock Swing (No. 1).— Proceed 
as in the last exercise but two, but, on throwing your- 
self off, it must be done with a little more force — so much 
so, that you must try to carry the body quite round the 
bar, and on the body rising, endeavour to regrasp the 
bar with the hands, and retain yourself in an upright or 
sitting position. 

This will be found much more difficult to achieve than 
either of the three preceding exercises, as greater im- 
petus is required in throwing the body back ; for the 



92 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



higlier ttie body rises the more likely are jon to succeed, 
and only continual practice "will enable tbe difficulty to 
be overcome ; but do not despair, for tbe oftener you 
try it tbe more visible will the capability of its being 
done appear, therefore persevere, regardless of time and 
trouble. 

97. The Hock Swing (No. 2). Legjrradice.—The only 
perceptible difference between this and Ex. 92, page 88, 
is, that in this the hands are perfectly free, while 
in the latter they grasp the bar at the side ; but to 
the gymnast it will be found to be much more difficult, 
as, should a failure occur, he will leave the bar much 
against his will, as in Ex. 43, page 55, consequently it 
will require greater exertion on his part to effect it pro- 
perly, the chief points being to throw himself well back, 
and to carry the arms well up and back ; this latter will 
cause the chest to be thrown out, when, should he re- 
volve round the bar, let him repeat the necessary move- 
ments each time he wishes to go round. Persevere with 
a determination to succeed, and the difficulty will be soon 
overcome, when he may proceed to the next. 

98. The Hock Swing (No. 3). Leg and lalance 
'-practice. — This exercise needs but little explanation, as it 
is effected in precisely the same way as the last, but the 
difference between them constitutes the difficulty, viz. 
that the gymnast must rest and balance himself in the 
sitting posture, between each revolution, without putting 
his hands to the bar, one chief point being to give the 
body a shght jump or jerk forward on the body rising 
above the bar ; but after the gymnast has tried it a few 
times, with, if he prefer it, some sHght assistance, he will 
soon learn the precise movements required, yet they 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



93 



are only to be perfected by constant practice, tlie exer- 
cise being much more difficult than the preceding one. 

A very sho^vy variation to this exercise is to place the 
arms in different positions prior to throvring the body 
back, and retaining them thus until on the bar again, 
when change them ; the following positions are among 
those chiefly practised. 

1. Arms straight over the head (as in the former 
exercise). 

2. One arm thus, the other being carried across the 
chest (first the right arm, then the left). 

3. Fold both arms across the chest. 

4. Fold both arms across the middle of the back. 

5. Place both hands on the knees. 

In fact the arms may be placed in any conceivable 
position, so long as neither they nor the hands touch the 
bar, or change that position while going round it. 

99. To Truss a Fowl (No. 2). Sinne 2jrcictice. — Kise 
on the bar by any of the former methods, and grasp it 
with the knuckles and thumbs backwards. Xow lean 
the body forward, and bring the legs up, pass the knees 
over the bar between the arms, resting the instep on it. 
It is now required to let the body fall forward, and allow 
the body to pass through the arms like fig. 21, page 40, 
still keeping the insteps against the bar, and without 
letting go your hold of it. 

The exercise consists not so much in passing the body 
through the arms, as in doing it while the body is 
falling forward, and not either before or after it has 
fallen. It is a very pretty and useful exercise, if done 
neatly. 

100. The Backward Roll. Serine practice. — Sit on the 



94 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



bar by any metliod most preferred, but this should always 
be the most showy or difficult, and one "which in itself 
would be a graceful exercise. Then turn the hands back- 
ward, and, grasjoing the bar firmly with the thumb, on 
the same side as the fingers, let the body gradually sink 
forward until the bar touches the middle of the back, when 
carry the legs up backward oyer the bar, leaning the 
head well back, and when sufficiently over it let the 
hands work a little round to enable you to carry the body 
completely oyer the bar into its former position : then 
either repeat the exercise as often as convenient, and 
after a little practice a little quicker, or give it a coup cle 
grace by finishing with the slide at once ; this may be 
likewise done as a finishing stroke after repeating the 
exercise several times, if desired. 

The latter portion of this exercise bears some resem- 
blance to ' The Plymouth,' in page 69, though the hands 
be not in the same position. 

101. The Long Swing, or Great Circle (Forward). 
Wrist, arm, and sjiine jjractice. — Owing to the pecu- 
liarity of the method of achieving this exercise, viz. to 
SY^ing roand the bar at arm's length, great energy and 
strength are required, and the greater the force the 
g-ymnast oives to all his actions throuo'hout, the more 
likely will he be to succeed ; therefore, premising that 
he is well up in the Short Swing, without which it will 
be waste of time to attempt this, he can 23roceed to 

Mount above the bar, and grasp it firmly with the 
knuckles outwards, and the thumbs on the same side 
as the fingers, then, after moving the legs backward and 
forward two or three times, leaning the body forward a 
little with the same motion of the legs, fling yourself 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



95 



upward and backward at arm's length, off tlie bar. This 
upward motion will give you increased momentum in 
the swing ; now, on drop^Ding, bend the body as in 
fig. 93, and on the body rising in front from under the 
bar, carry the legs up, as in Ex. 30, page 61, at the same 
time raising the body up by bending the arms ; this 
additional assistance on the paii: of the arms will enable 
you, after a little practice, to carry yourself completely 
round the bar, when, by loosening your hold of the 
bar, and shifting the hands round, likewise straighten- 
ing the arms, on throwing the body off again, you may 
continue the exercise ad libitum. Should you not throw 
yourself from the bar with sufficient strength, you will 
either not rise high enough to bring the legs near the 
bar, or they will come against it and not over it, 
when the shins will suffer for your want of greater 
energy, therefore the legs should be made to go as great 
a distance as possible. 

102. The Turnover (No. 1.) — Mount above the bar, 
and turning the fingers towards you, bring the hands 
and elbows close together, then lean forward so as to 
rest the body on the elbows, and, by a gentle motion, 
steadying yourself to keep the fore-arms in the same 
position, carry the legs up behind (see fig. 46), and 
finally, the whole body (fig. 47), when, on the body 
passing over the bar and falling, let go your hands, and 
alight on the ground, taking care to do so on your toes. 
(See the next exercise.) 

The momentum given to the body in turning over is 
sure to cause the gymnast to alight on his feet ; still, 
until able to do it properly, the lungers should be used 
by passing the ends of the ropes over the bar, prior to 



96 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



liis beginning the exercise, wlien they ^vill be in tlie 
proper |)osition on Hs coming over. It requires but a 
little nerve to do it properly the first time. 

Fig. 46. 




In turning over, the hands must grasp the bar firmly, 
or from the motion of the body they will be liable to 
slip ; but should any fear arise, although assistance is 
being rendered him, the pupil may, until he has gained 
sufficient confidence to accomplish the exercise as re- 
quired of him, retain his hold of the bar, and alloTv 
himself to swing back under it ; but this should only be 
done when the bar is sufficiently high to enable him to 
do it without his toes touching the ground. 

103. The Long Swing, or Great Circle (Backward). 
Wrist, arm, and spine practice. — Proceed as directed in 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



97 



Fig. 47. 



tlie last exercise but one, and on the body coming directly 
above tbe bar, straigbten the arms, and bend tbe legs 
backward (fig. 48) ; tbis will give additional momentum 
to tbe body, sufficient to carry it up again, with some 
considerable aid from tbe wrists, into your former posi- 
tion (fig. 46), wben, 
after a little practice, 
and by sbifting tbe 
bands round eacb 
time tbe body rises 
to bring tbem above 
tbe bar, tbe exercise 
may be repeated as 
often as convenient, 
but it will require 
great perseverance, 
much more so tban 
in tbe forward long 
swing ; yet wben 
well up in botb, it 
would look well to 
repeat eacb tbree or 
four times witbout 
stopping, in wbicb 
case tbe gymnast 
must begin witb tbis 
exercise, and after .baving achieved it, say tbree times, 
be must, on tbe body rising up backward, reverse tbe 
position of bis bands, tbereby bringing tbe knuckles 
uppermost, then, straightening the arms, and throwing 
the body oflP as before stated, he may proceed with the 
forward motion. 




98 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



104. The Back Horizontal (No. 1). Spine and muscle 
practice. — Tliis and tlie following exercise requires great 
strength, in the ninscles of the arms, as Tvell as in the 
spine of the back, and is only to be acqidred by practice, 
Tvith. a determination to succeed. 




Grasp the bar, and go through the arms ; but on carry- 
ing the legs through raise them up straight with the 
body, then, keeping them in that position, lower them 
until they are horizontal, as represented in fig. 49, and. 



Exercises or the Horizontal Bar, 99 



after having remained tliiis for a short time, either drop 
to the ground, or carry the body back again through the 
arms, or else achieve the Slide. The latter should be 
preferred. (See Ex. 65, page 71.) 




Continual perseverance and practice are required to 
achieve this exercise to perfection, i.e. without any ap- 
parent strain upon the muscles. 

105. The Back Horizontal (No. 2.) Spine and muscle 

practice. — Grasp the bar with both hands on either side, 
and, bringing the legs up straight, carry them through the 
arms, when, on the body going through, either gradually 
raise the legs so as to assume the Back Horizontal, or 
else suddenly shoot them out into the required position, 
but both methods should be practised, although there is 
very little difference in this and the last ; yet the fact of 
the legs having to be kept straight throughout, renders 
the exercise so much the more difficult, as is likewise 

H 2 



100 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



the case in tlie sudden strain upon tlie muscles by slioot- 
ing tlie body out. 

106. The Back Horizontal (No. 3). S^nue and riuisde 
Ijractice. — Sit on tlie bar by any method preferred, then, 
grasping it with the knuckles turned backwards, and 
the thumb on the same side as the fingers, let the body 
slide forward until able to bring the legs perfectly 
straight with it, at the same time keeping the arms 
perfectly straight. The now relatiye position of the 
arms and body must as near as possible be retained, as 
the gymnast must carry the body forward and downward 
and the legs backward, grasping the bar yery firmly 
with the hands, and putting the whole of the muscles 
into fall play, to enable him to lower himself gradually 
without bending the arms, and on no account is the 
required position to be assumed with a jerk (see fig. 49), 
as it is to be done by the full use of the wrists and the 
muscles of the arms, the spine being exercised in keeping 
the body horizontally. 

This method should, in achieying this exercise at 
assaults-at-arms, contests, festiyals, etc., be preferred to 
the last, it being far more dif&cult to consummate ; but 
practice will soon enable the gymnast to become master 
of it, especially if he has any muscles in his arms to 
boast of. 

107. The Front Horizontal (No. 1). S;^ine and muscle 
]3ractice. — This exercise is better achieyed on the rings 
than here (see Ex. 35, page 194), but it can neyertheless 
be done by raising the legs well up in front and carrying 
them aboye the bar, until straight upright with the body ; 
then, keeping the arms straight and the body also in the 
same position, lower it gradually until it assumes the 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 101 



position required (fig. 50). This will be found to be a 
little more difficult to carry into eff'ect than the Back 
Horizontal, but persevere and conquer. 




108. The Front Horizontal (No. 2). Spine and muscle 
practice. — Grasp the bar ^vith the hands on either side, 
and keeping the body and legs perfectly straight, raise 
them up in front until perfectly horizontal ; though 
more difficult to achieve, it should be well persevered in, 
and not passed over as a bad job should success not for 
some little time attend the pupil ; therefore practise it 
with a determination to succeed, and you will not repent 
the time spent in endeavouring to overcome it. 

109. The Side Horizontal. — Sit on the bar, grasping 
it with the hands turned so as to have the knuckles 
behind, letting the thumb be on the same side as the 
fingers, then let the body slide gradually forward by 
bending the arms, and allowing it to sink as low as 
possible, which will be when the arms become perfectly 
straight, turn the body round sideways and raise it 
into an almost horizontal position, and parallel with the 
bar, by bending the rigid arm and keeping the elbow 
well up. Xow allow the body to fall by straightening 
the right arm, and pull yourself up on the bar again, 



102 



Ec'iercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



wlien tlie exercise must be rej^eated with the left arm 
(see Ex. 113, page 105). 

This is a very difficult and trying exercise, and Tyill 
require continued practice to enable you to master the 
difficulty. DuiTOg its performance the hands must not 
be allowed to change their position, otherwise than the 
gymnast will be obliged to do when keeping the one 
arm straight while the other is bent. 

110. The Forward Roll (No. 1). Wrist practice,— 
Proceed as in Ex. 52, page 63, and on the body rising, 
open the hands and let the wiists, or rather the ball of 
the hand, rest on the bar, then fall forward, keeping the 
legs still straight and close to the bar, at the bend of the 
hips, when, passing the hands as far round the bar as 
possible, gradually rise on the bar again, supported as 
aboye, the body haying made a complete reyolution 
round the bar. 

This is a yery cleyer exercise, but rather difficult to 
beginners, and should therefore be done yery slowly at 
first, and with some slight assistance in raising the legs ; 
then when, by gradually increasing the time, able to 
achieye it freely, it might be done fiye or six times suc- 
cessiyely without stopping, and would be excellent prac- 
tice for the wiists, muscles, &c., and the gymnast will 
do well to perseyere in it. 

111. The Forward Roll (No. 2). — ffijj and arm irrac- 
tice. — Mount aboye the bar by any method preferred, 
then lean against it at the pit of the stomach, ^Dressing 
the legs up underneath to endeayour thereby to hold 
yourself on it. IS'ow let go your hold entu^ely of the 
bar, and with quick downward motions with the arms, 
with the hands open, carry yourself round the bar, which, 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 103 



until perfect in it, had better only be done once for the 
first few times trying, gradually increasing the number 
of revolutions as you arrive at perfection. Therefore, 
while so practising, let the lungers be used by throwing 
the ropes over the bar from back to front, so as to be 
able to meet the requirements of the gynmast should he 
need their assistance ; but this will not be if done fear- 
lessly, the legs kept well against the bar on going over, 
and the arms do the work required of them in a proper 
manner, and when once able to accomplish it, the gym- 
nast will think it more easy than it at first seemed. 

112. The Grasshopper (No. 1). — Wrist, arm, mid rauscle 
lyraotice. — This is a very difficult exercise, especially to 
beginners, much more so than Xo. 24, page 142, although 
in most respects very similar, the difference consisting in 
the position of the body with the bar or bars. As in this 
exercise the whole of the weight of the body will be 
upon the wrists, it need be done the first time with care. 

Either circle the bar and sit on it, or proceed as in Ex. 
64, page 69, but changing the position of the hands on 
going over, and, when the body is falling forward, which 
must be very gradual, allow it to sink until the arms 
are nearly bent double (see fig. 51), when the bar will 
be touching the middle of the back. Grasp the bar 
fijmly, and let the fore-arms be as upright as j)ossible ; 
the legs may, to assist in the balance, be bent a little 
back. On reference to fig. 51, it will be seen that the 
thumbs are on the same side as the fingers. Xow, when 
in this position, first move the hands alternately along 
the bar, and when able to do that easily, vrith a slight 
jerk with the legs, aided with a strong sjDring with the 
wrists, move them to and fro both at once, thereby giving 



104 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



tlie action tlie appearance of a grassliopper. Do not re- 
main too long in this position until tlie arms and wrists 
are more accustomed to it, as it will require to be 
well practised ere it can be effected with freedom and 
ease. 

Fig. 51. 




Let this exercise, wben the gymnast can accomplish 
the above, be practised with the hands turned the other 
way, which will bring the fingers to the front ; but 
though it will be found to be more difficult to achieve, 
it should be well persevered in. It should be likewise 
practised with one arm at a time — first the right, and 
then the left, and practised well until the increased dif- 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 105 



ficulty be oyercome. As an exercise in competitions, 
this latter position far excels the achieving of the feat 
with the both arms, and it is moreover one that very 
few gymnasts can master. 

113. The Grasshopper (No. 2). — Wrist, arm, and 
muscle practice ; quicJc movement — Proceed with the last 
exercise, and lower the body until the bar rests against 
the middle of the back ; then, by giving a slight forward 
swinging motion with the legs, and leaning the head 
well back, raise the body np on the bar again, repeating 
the exercise three or four times. 

When able to accomplish the above, strive to achieve 
it very quickly by carrying the legs back a Httle on 
dropping, and, by bringing them forward directly, with 
a somewhat more sudden motion raise the body up as 
before, repeating it as often as desired. (See Ex. 88, 
page 84.) 

This will be found excellent practice for the arms, &c., 
and should on no account be passed by, as it will enable 
the gymnast to go through with the more di£6.cult ones. 

114. The Turnover (No. 2). — Achieve the Reverse 
Giant Swing, Ex. 103, page 96, and on the body rising 
directly above the bar, and just as it is falling over, give 
a slight spring with the hands, which will increase the 
forward motion of the body, then, by letting go your 
hold of the bar, alight on the ground. 

This is a very good finish to the previous exercise, 
and, if able to achieve the Turnover in page 95, no dif- 
ficulty will be found in carrying this into effect. 

115. The Backaway, or To Leave the Bar in the 
Swing. — This exercise, although one of the more ad- 
vanced, must not be practised without the use of the 



106 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



lungers at first, yet, if done hj a clever gymnast who 
lias any amount of pluck and nerve, lie may be able to 
accomplisli it, after once trying, without that aid, as the 
motion given to the body by the swing is quite sufficient 
to render it much more easy to accomplish than the 
position shown in fig. 52 would for the moment verify, 



Fig. 52. 




the position there represented being just after leaving 
the bar. Accidents will occur, and they sometimes cause 
benefits or advantages to be derived therefrom : such is 
stated to be the case with this now gracefal finish to the 
Swing or Great Circle,^ the hands of a gymnast having 
shpped while practising on a bar of too great a diameter. 
It is achieved thus : — 

Proceed with either of the before-mentioned exercises 
in pages 52 and 94, and when in the forward ST^dng, 
and the body rises level with the bar, at which time 
the back will be towards the ground, the hands must 
suddenly let go their hold of the bar (see fig. 52). The 
result of tliis seeming accident is, that the whole body 

* Spencer, in his '3Ioderu G-ymnast/ 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



107 



will turn a complete somersault, tlie body at tlie same 
time dropping ; and if the exercise be carried into effect 
at the right time, the feet will then be close to the 
ground, and you will consequently alight in safety 
but let the lungers be used, as a little practice will soon 
enable it to be accom^Dlished with a certainty, or at least 
without any fear of any mishap. 

116. The Socket (No. 1). Shoulder loradice. — Grasp 
the bar backwards, thereby bringing the fingers towards 
you, letting the hands be wide apart. !N'ow bring the 
legs up, and passing them beneath the bar carry the 
body through, and, allowing it to drop as far as possible, 
dislocate the shoulders (see Ex. 5, page 179), then, 
T\dthout altering the ^Dosition of the hands, bring the legs 
up again and circle the bar, when you may drop to the 
ground. 

This exercise may be varied by carrying the body 
through a second time and alighting on the ground in- 
stead of circling the bar, but either will reqmre strong 
nerve and constant practice to do it neatly, but all such 
exercises tend to increase the strength of the parts ex- 
ercised very much. 

117. The Pass. Leg practice. — Mount above the bar 
by any method preferred, then, keeping the arms per- 
fectly straight, lean the body forward a httle, and raising 
the rigJit leg well up at the side carry it completely round 
towards the left over the bar, letting go with each hand 
alternately to allow it to pass, and grasping the bar 

* Many of my readers have no doubt seen the above exercise per- 
formed by that celebrated gymnast Avolo. who clears the distance 
of nine feet from one horizontal bar to another easily, the gymnast 
grasping the second after achieving the exercise, and going on to the 
third, and so on. 



108 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



again as soon as it is ; tlie wliole to be done as one move- 
ment, no pause or rest between to take place, and when 
perfect in carrying tlie right leg over as required, prac- 
tise it with, tlie left, doing it as quickly as possible, the 
quicker tbe better. 

Should the above be not sufficiently explanatory, the 
following may better illustrate the method of its being 
effected : — On raising the rigid leg and carrying it over 
the bar, lift the right hand off the bar to allow it to 
pass, grasping it again directly, then lift up the left 
hand, pass the leg on towards the left, regrasp the bar 
with the left hand, and on dropping the right leg into 
its place the exercise is complete. 

In practising the above with the left leg substitute the 
word right for left and left for right, and persevere in it 
until able to use the one leg as freely as the other. 

118. Leg Exercise. — Place the bar about four feet 
from the ground, as, in the event of a slip in this difficult 
exercise, the fall will not be so great. 

Mount the bar with the fingers behind and the thumbs 
in front, put the hands very near together, lean forward, 
and, raising the body as high as practicable, bring the legs 
forward, and, by opening them wide, carry them over the 
bar, one on either side of the hands, when the body will 
of necessity fall, but sufficient impetus must be given to 
it to carry it right round the bar. 

The difficulty of this exercise consists in carrying 
the legs over the bar, which will be very difficult and 
tedious to beginners without constant practice, as, to do 
it properly, the legs should be kept perfectly straight, 
though at first you cannot help bending them more or 
less, but that must not be thought of when able to do it 
as required. Some assistance should be at hand, or the 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 109 



lungers used in practising this exercise until perfect in 
it, thougli, if tlie grasp be fii^m, notliing material can 
occur, as any skilful gymnast can do it. 

119. Hip and Leg Practice. — Hang on the bar, bring 
up the legs quickly, and opening them wide so as to pass 
the feet under the bar on the outside of the hands, let go 
your hold, and alight on the gTOund. This exercise is 
achieved precisely hke thaton the rings (Ex. 3, page 178), 
but the position of the legs in achieving it makes it much 
more difficult ; therefore, until able to clear the feet easily 
of the bar, the lungers had better be used, as, when that 
portion of the exercise is accomplished, the remainder 
is easy enough, the momentum given to the body on 
bringing up the legs being sufficient of itself to cause the 
body to turn completely over as required, and enable 
you, without fear, to let go your hands. If preferred, 
the pupil may for practice open his legs, and carry them 
as far as able without letting go the hands ; this would 
give him an idea as to the right time to let go the bar. 

120. The Roll off. — This exercise is, as the name desig- 
nates, a complete roll off the bar, or, from the mode in 
which it is done, some would term it a fall off, and per- 
haps this would have been the more appropriate term for 
it, since there is no exertion on the part of the gymnast 
to achieve it ; but let the lungers be at first used, though 
after it has been done three or four times they may, if the 
gymnast has that confidence in himself which he should 
always have, be cast aside, the execution of it being so 
very simple that they should not be used for a longer 
time than there is any occasion. 

Sit on the bar, as far forward as possible, -with the 
hands as in fig. 36, then let the body fall straight back 



110 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



over the bar ; at tlie same time carry tlie arms orer the 
head (fig. 53), Tvhich T^ill cause the legs to be raised up 
in front, though they be bent a Httle downwards, thereby 
pressing a Httle upon the bar. The result of the momen- 
tum thus given to the body is, that the gymnast will be 
carried completely over the bar, and by thus turning a 
kind of backward somersault, he will alight on his feet 
in safety, eager to try it again and again until able to 
accomplish it without any assistance, however slight. 
There must not be the least sign of temerity or trepida- 




tion, as the more fi-ee the gymnast goes through with it 
the better it will in the end be accomphshed. It is a 
pretty finish, owing to the result being so sudden, that 
no one unacquainted with the exercise can form the least 
idea of what they are to expect ; therefore practise it 
(but with the lungers on at first) until perfect. (See 
note, page 107.) 

121. To Leave the Bar. — When able to achieve Exer- 
cises 110 and 111, page 102, very easily, and hkewise 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. Ill 

able to revolve round the bar five or six times in succes- 
sion, quickly, the gymnast will do well to practise the 
following showy method of leaving the bar after any like 
exercise. 

On going round in either of the above exercises for 
the last time, i.e. the revolution after which he wishes to 
make the finish, let the arms hang loosely over the bar, 
and perfectly still, the impetus previously given to the 
body and legs will cause the latter to revolve round as 
before ; the consequence is, that you will alight on the 
ground in safety, and if done adroitly, and without any 
fear, it is a very showy and clever finish, and not at all 
difficult to learn, yet the lungers should be used until 
perfect in what is required of you. The ropes may there- 
fore be wound round the bar, so as to come right when 
achieving the finish, the gymnast of course only going 
round the bar the same number of times that the ropes 
of the lungers are wound round it. 

122. To Alight from the Bar after the Swing.— Pro- 
ceed as in Ex. 115, page 105, but, on letting go with the 
hands, instead of carrying the feet forward and higher 
up in the air, thereby turning a somersault, give the 
body a sudden turn completely round, after the manner 
of turning round on the toes, and alighting as far as 
possible from the bar,=* when the back must be towards 
the bar as before. This is a very pretty variation of the 
preceding, and is very easy to accomplish. 

123. The Leg Swing off (No. 2). Leg practice. — Hang 

* Atolo, the celebrated gymnast referred to in page 107, has like- 
wise accomplished the above exercise from one horizontal bar to 
another, the bars being nine feet apart, the gymnast then going from 
the second on to the third, and so on in like manner. 



112 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 



by tlie legs and proceed mtli the Leg Swing Oflf, 
Exercise 43, page 55, and swing the body to and fro well 
until it rises level witli or Jiiglier than the bar in the 
forward swing, i.e. when the face is uppermost, then 
bend the toes well upward, so as to clear the heels of the 
bar, at the same time lifting the legs to unhitch them as 
before, when the impetus given will enable them to be 
drawn off, and after a little practice you will alight on 
the ground in safety. 

This exercise, which is quite new, though at first 
sight like that in page 55, is nevertheless much more 
difficult, the gymnast should therefore practise it at 
first with the lungers, until he has gained sufficient con- 
fidence to try it by himself, but when once able to do it 
freely, and without the least hitch or drawback, it may 
be with safety tried -svithout them ; but though difficult, 
it is to be achieved after a few determined trials, nerve 
and practice being all that are requu^ed to enable the 
gymnast to carry into effect an exercise which few as 
yet can accomplish ; it should therefore be persevered in, 
as it is a decided improvement upon the old and more 
simple method of unhitching the legs before referred to. 

124. The Toe Catch. — Grasp the bar with the hands 
reversed, then swing and rise above the bar as in 
Ex. 58, page 66, then, without stopping, carry the body 
forward over the bar, but in so doing raise it up behind, 
which will throw the whole strain upon the grasp, and 
opening the legs wide, hitch the toes over the bai^ on the 
outside of the hands as the body begins to drop, and 
this additional momentum ought to be sufficient to carry 
you completely round the bar. On rising, let the legs 
drop into their places, when repeat the exercise at least 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



113 



tlii^ee times, hitching tlie toes over the bar each time. 
This makes a very clever feat, and tends gTeatlj to 
strengthen both the wiists and grasp. 

125. The Shoot. Sioine and ivrist 'practice; quid: 
movement. — Hitch the fingers only over the bar, bring 
the legs up in front, and carry them and the body 
throngh between the arms, and suddenly shoot them out 
into the Back Horizontal, but in so doing jerk the body 
upwards by bending the arms at the elbows and carrying 
the hand round the bar, which, if ^Droperly done, will 
bring the heel of the hand on the top of it ; then, if the 
arms be bent sufl&ciently, which will chiefly depend on 
the momentum given to the body upward, the fore- arms 
will be nearly perpendicular, and similar to the position 
they assume in Ex. 112, page 103, when raise the body 
to the bar by straightening the arms. 

Now the difficulty of the exercise consists in raising 
the body quite on to the bar with the Jerk only, without 
having to raise the body up afterwards ; it should there- 
fore be well practised, and persevered in, and the gym- 
nast should not be content until able to achieve it as 
requh^ed above. 

126. Wrist and Toe Practice. — Sit on the bar and 
gTasp it with the right hand, with the knuckles and 
thumb backwards, then, tui^ning on one side towards the 
right, bend the left leg up and hitch the toes well over 
the bar behind, raise the left arm up straight, lift your- 
self off the bar, thereby throwing the weight of the 
body on the right arm, press the right leg up against the 
bar underneath, and throw yourself forward with a suffi- 
cient force to carry you round the bar, when the exercise 
may be repeated ad libitum. 

I 



114 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



This is a very sliowy but difficult exercise, and re- 
quires some considerable practice to be able to do it 
without any seeming exertion. 

127. Leg and Wrist Practice. — Mount the bar and 
turn the right hand backward, keeping the left just in 
front of it. Now, with rather a strong impetus raise 
the body a little, and throw it over the bar to the left 
backward, hitching the left leg over the bar, when, on 
swinging completely round, as you ought to do, bring 
the body into an upright position again, or repeat the 
exercise two or three times. 

Rather difficult at first, yet to be mastered after a 
little practice ; but, when able to do it as above described, 
substitute left for right and right for left, and then 
practise it, by which means no one way will be more 
difficult than the other. This should always be done 
where a certain arm or leg is given. 

128. A Competition Exercise. — Rise above the bar by 
the Slow Pull up movement (Ex. 51, page 62), and sink 
below it again twice ; now ease the hands, and circle the 
bar slowly with straight legs, if able to do it without 
touching the bar with either legs or body the better; 
then bring the body through and carry it up over the 
bar, and sit on it (Ex. 64, page 69). Lastly, turn the 
hands backward and very slowly, the slower the better, 
and without any jerking, let the body slide forward, 
as far as the arms will allow without bending them, 
then let the body fall forward, keeping the body and 
legs perfectly straight one with the other, until the arjiis 
are as far below the bar as they can possibly go, 
when keep the body in the horizontal position for a 
short time, and drop to the ground. 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 115 



This is a very skilful combination, and requires a 
clever gymnast to achieve it. The feet are not to touch 
the ground during the going through of this exercise, 
which is always the case in competitive exercises. 

129. To Turn round along the Bar with the Arms 
bent at the Elbow (No. 1). Arrn and mitscle lyradke. — 
When in the position described in the Grasshopper 
Exercise (ISTo. 112, page 103), release your hold of the 
bar with the ricjlit hand ; this will cause the body to 
turn towards the left^ when grasp the bar again with the 
riglit^ carry the elbow well up, let go with the left hand, 
pass the left arm up behind and regrasp the bar with 
the riglit hand with the elbow up and the knuckles back, 
the body will then be in the same position as at starting. 
The exercise must be now repeated to the end of the 
bar, when, by reversing the movement, turn the body 
round to the opposite end of the bar, letting the whole 
be achieved very slowly at first, and keeping the elbows 
well up all the time. This will be found to be a very 
difficult and tedious exercise, but a little perseverance 
will render it more easy than when first attempted. 

130. To Turn round along the Bar with the Arms bent 
at the Elbow (No. 2). Arm and muscle ]jractice. — The 
only variation which this exercise admits of from the 
last is, that the gymnast is required to raise himself up 
above the bar and sit on it every time his back is 
brought against it. This addition renders the exercise 
all the more difficult to repeat, but no such impediment 
should prevent an advanced gymnast from soon becoming 
the master of this as well as the former exercise. 

131. The Socket (No. 2). Shoulder and arm practice. 
— Sit upon the bar, and turning the hands backwards, 

I 2 



116 Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



grasp it with arms wide apart, wh-en they will be nearly 
straight. IsTow, giving the body and legs an upward 
and forward motion, carry them out in front into a 
horizontal position at arm's length, and dislocate the 
shoulders (see Ex. 5, page 179), as soon as that position is 
reached, and before the body has time to drop, which it 
will do ; on its rising on the other side of the bar, change 
the position of the hands, and continue to raise the body 
above the bar without stopping. This will be found a 
very difficult exercise, and only to be acquired by practice, 
with a certain amount of courage. 

132. Back Horizontal and Pull up. Arm and muscle 
]oractice. — Sit on the bar, grasping it with the knuckles 
back, the thumbs being on the same side, and sink with 
the arms bent, as in Ex. 112, page 103, then, without any 
23ause, carry the body forward by straightening the arms, 
at the same time raising the body and legs into the 
horizontal position behind the bar. Now for the more 
difficult part of the exercise ; so let the muscles perform 
their full share. Bring the body towards the riglit^ 
turning it left side upward in so doing ; this will ease 
the left arm, which bend well above the bar until the 
fore-arm be quite perpendicular ; this will give you 
sufficient purchase on the wrist to enable you after a 
time to raise the body on to the bar again, when the 
exercise must be repeated by turning the body towards 
the left instead, when the riglit arm will be brought 
above the bar first in returning. This exercise will be 
found very difficult, and it is only to be acquired by 
perseverance and practice. 

133. The Twist, and to Rise above the Bar. Shoulder, 
arm, and. ivrist i^radice. — Gras^D the bar with the hands 



Exercises on the Horizontal Bar, 117 



about fourteen inclies apart, one on either side ; tlie left 
hand being the nearer, bring the body up, and carry it 
through, similar to Ex. 18, page 40, but carry it out into 
a horizontal position, instead of dropping it, when twist 
the body over, as in Ex. 42, page 196, and let go with 
the left hand, this will cause the body to revolve a httle ; 
now regrasp the bar with the left hand on the other 
side of the right, raising the left elbow well above the 
bar, so that the fore-arm shall be quite perpendicular, 
when, by letting go with the right hand, pass it on to 
the other side of the left, and mount above the bar. The 
body should now be dropped below the bar, and the 
exercise repeated, with the position of the hands re- 
versed, thus letting the right hand be the nearer, which 
will cause the left to be substituted for right, and vice 
versa, in the foregoing description. Though this is 
another very difficult exercise, it is to be accomplished, 
if practised with determination and good will. 

134. The Turn about. Muscle and tvrist joractice. — 
Proceed as in Ex. 122, page 111, and in the hacJcivarcl 
swing give the body the same upward motion, to check 
the rising of the whole body, by springing with the wrists, 
and in so doing, proceed as therein described on letting 
go the bar, but with this difference — that in this, instead 
of carrying the body back away from the bar, it is to 
be carried up, the turn being given as quickly as possible 
to enable the gymnast to regrasp the bar, ere his body 
has had time to drop below it, which has a very curious 
effect on the spectators. This very difficult exercise is 
one that would do credit to any one who may be able to 
accomplish it. 



118 



The Parallel Bars. 



THE PAEALLEL BAES. 

BemarJcs. — Tlie difference between tlie action of the 
body and arms on tlie Parallel Bars and tliat on tlie 
Horizontal Bar, renders it equally attractive to tbe 
spectator and to tlie gymnast. On no account should 
they be slighted, and not practised upon, as they tend 
very much to strengthen and develop the chest, muscles 
of the arms, muscles of the back, abdomen, &c. ; but, 
owing to the using of the legs in various exercises on 
the horizontal bar, it enables the gymnast to perform 
a greater number of exercises upon it than upon this 
apparatus. Moreover, the manner of changing or passing 
fi'om one exercise to another, to enable him to consum- 
mate from half a dozen to twenty or more different 
movements without stop^Ding, leaving the bar, or touching 
the gi'ound with his feet, causes the single bar again to be 
the favouiite ; but, on the other hand, there ai^e a great 
many exercises, both preliminary and otherwise, capable 
of being achieved upon the pai^allel bars, that cannot be 
thought of for the horizontal. Then comes the question, 
Which ought to be the gTeatest favourite ? TTithout 
doubt, the horizontal bar is, and is very likely to continue 
to be so for some time to come ; still, there are no doubt 
many clever gymnasts who, by having practised upon, 
and given more attention to the horizontal bar, are quite 
at a loss to achieve a very simple vaidting exercise upon 
the parallel bars. (See Yaulting, Ex. 26, page 253.*) To 

* The above exercise was given as a set trick for others to follow 



The Farallel Bars, 



119 



be a good gymnast, all apparatus should be alike to Mm, 
so far as bis being able to acbieve any exercise upon any 
particular one is concerned ; therefore make no favourite 
in particular, but share the time you have to spare be- 
tween the whole at your command. 

Description of Apparatus. — As ^dth the horizontal 
bar, so with the parallel bars, great improvements in the 
mode of manufacturing them have entirely done away 
with their previously clumsy appearance, though I am 
sorry to say that at the present day parallel bars are 
used in a certain club where there are upwards of 300 
members, whose bar measures the enormous depth of 
four and a half inches, while the width is two inches 
and three- eighths : if strength is the only thing needful, 
it is to be found there. On the other hand, what a hand 
a gymnast must have to be able to practise upon such 
bars as are recommended by a certain author of a small 
work on gymnastics, wherein it is stated that the bars 
are four inches deep, and three wide ! 

First. — The most simple mode of constructing this 
apparatus for outdoors is, to fix four posts firmly into 
the ground, in the form of a parallelogram, viz. 5 ft. apart 
lengthwise, and 18 in. apart at the ends. These posts 
should be from 2 ft. 6 in. to 3 ft. in the ground, and 
about 4 ft. 6 in. above; they should not be less than 3 
inches square (see Article in page 120, and fig. 54), and 
cut off gradually from the outside edge of bar down- 

at a recent festival, and a smile passed over the countenances of the 
whole of the followers on seeing such an easy exercise set them ; 
but when it came to their turn, it proved to be too much for them, 
one among the lot being an A 1 gymnast on the horizontal bar. 



120 



The Parallel Bars, 



wards for about 6 or 8 inclies, or else rounded as in 
figs. 57 and 58, the bars being mortised on to the tops 
of the bars, and fixed with a Trooden peg, the inner edge 
of the bar being quite even Trith that of the post. The 
bars should be made of straight- grained ash, i.e. the 
grain that begins at one end of the bar should, without 
having left the straight line, or nearly so, terminate at 
the other end ; if it be otherwise, and the grain gets, as 
it were, lost, the chances are that the bar will break, 
sooner or later. If a kind of shoulder be made in those 
parts of the bars that are to rest upon the posts, it will 
add greatly to their permanent strength, and otherwise 
render them more secure in their fixings. For the shapes 
of the bars, which should project at least a foot at each 
end beyond each post, and the sizes thereof, see figs. 56, 
57, and 58. Let the ends of the bars be shghtly rounded, 
to fit the hollow of the hand when requii^ed. The above 
description will answer every purpose where the bars are 
to be permanently fixied ; but, where otherwise required, 
the follovring method will be preferred. 

Second. — The accompanying illustration (fig. 54) will 
perhaps convey the best idea of constructing the parallel 
bars, so as to be able to remove, shift, or take them ta 
pieces when required. As vrill be seen, the four posts 
are fixed upon a wooden framework, neatly and strongly 
mortised together, the frame projecting beyond the posts 
each way on the outside at least eighteen inches, and, 
instead of being left square as in the engraving, they 
should be gradually sloped off about half the distance. 
Iron brackets fixed against the bottom of each post help 
greatly to increase their strength, and render them more 



The Parallel Bars, 



121 



steady and secure. The posts of this apparatus may 
now be a little less in size, say three inches by two and 
a half, the longest side being placed lengthwise of the 
bar, which should not be less than seven feet. Such an 
apparatus as the above could be had from the manufac- 
turers, 35, Old Street, London, e.g., from 3?. lO-s., for 
private use, to 4/. or 4?. 10^. for gymnasiums or schools, 
according to the strength required. 



Fig. 54. 




Third. — According to a simple description of parallel 
bars, that they merely consist of two bars supported side 
by side at a suitable height from the ground, so may 
the manner of constructing them be varied ; and this is 
neither more nor less than to erect two horizontal bars 
close together, so that the bars may be eighteen inches 



122 



The Parallel Bars. 



apart (vide page 23). This plan has, like other things, 
its advantages and disadvantages. The advantages 
are, that from the bars being supported at the ends 
only, a greater spring is given to the body : the ordinary 
bar would be seven feet, but for this apparatus it might 
advantageously be increased to eight feet, consequently the 
gymnast would have greater scope as regards the distance 
he could go along them. The disadvantage consists chiefly 
in the bars having no ends, but should there be another 
apparatus in the building, as that given in the second 
Article (page 20), the disadvantage may be then set aside, 
provided the present plan be adopted. Moreover, many 
additional exercises might be achieved upon bars con- 
structed upon this principle, as one might be raised 
higher than the other, according to the requirements of 
the gymnast. (See Article 3, page 23.) 

Fourth. — Another method of constructing the bars is a 
^ ^ ^ ^ combination of the last two, viz. to make the 
post hollow, to allow a pillar to slide up and 
down inside it. (See fig. 55.) If made wholly 
of wood, the pillar should not be less than two 
inches square, the case being made of wood 
three-quarters or seven- eighths of an inch 
thick, strongly made and capable of bearing 
the strain which is continually being put upon 
the bars by the gymnast. Holes (represented 
by the dotted lines in fig. 55) must be bored 
in the direction of the bars, through both 
pillar and post, to enable the bars to be 
retained at any required height by an iron pin being 
placed through them, these holes corresponding in dis- 



The Parallel Bars. 



123 



tances apart in the four pillars. But should the inside 
pillar be made of iron, the case may then be made as 
much smaller as the iron pillar is than the wooden one : 
this, though making it heavier to move, would give it a 
lighter appearance. The bars for this must be of the 
same size as before. 



Fig. 56. 



THE BARS. 

Shape is the chief point left for decision in this 
place. We have said that ash is the best wood to 
make them of, and that they are to be not less than 
SEVEN feet, one foot to project beyond the posts at each 
end. 

1. Some gymnasts prefer the bars to be round, from 
the fact that the horizontal bar, the trapeze, 
the run dies of ladders, &c., are round. The 
argument holds good, as round bars feel 
more natural, but then they must be increased 
in size, and should not be less than two inches 
and an eighth (see fig. 56), by which it 
will be seen that the top of the post is 
hollowed to receive the bar, which may be 
made from two and a half to two and three- 
quarter inches. 



2. The movements given upon the parallel 
bars being so very different to those given on. the hori- 
zontal bar, and the manner both of achieving them and 
grasping the bars being likewise so difierent, many prefer 
the bars a Httle out of the round, as in fig. 57, the 
dimensions for which are two and one-eighth inches 
(the same as the preceding in width) by two and a half 




124 



The Parallel Bars. 



Fig. 57. 
< > 



inclies in deptli, tlie additional deptli being given to give 
increased strengtli to tlie bar. Besides, were 
tlie deptli the same as the last, viz. two 
and one-eiglith inclies, the width must be 
reduced to obtain the required shape : this 
narrowing of the bar for that purpose wonld 
not only render it more awkward to hold 
with any security, but it would weaken the 
bar so much that it would be dangerous to 
practise upon it, hence the size is increased 
in the depth. On reference to the illustra- 
tion it will be seen that it differs from fig. 
•56, inasmuch as the top of the post is 
straight ; this is caused by the bar having a shoulder 
made to it (a) and which has been previously referred 
to in page 120. 



3. In preference to either of the before-mentioned 
shapes, that represented in fig. 58 is very much in. use, 
Fig. 58. dimensions of this being two and one- 

eighth inches wide, as before, and from three 
inches deep (this is the shape of the bar 
referred to in a previous page as being four 
inches and a half deep) . But as the depth in 
this shape has not much to do with impeding 
the gymnast during his practice, an eighth of 
an inch more or less does not much matter ; 
yet if it be unproportionably deep, an impedi- 
ment must arise therefrom in some certain 
exercises hereafter described. The above di- 
mensions, however, will be found the most 
suitable, the increased depth here given being, as it were, 




Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



125 



an addition to the round bar, tlie sides being hollowed 
to admit of the fingers having a better gTasp than if 
the sides were quite straight ; fig. 58 represents them 
grooved at the sides to the depth of about half an inch, 
the bottom part merely giving extra strengi;h to the bar. 



EXEECISES ON THE PARALLEL BAES. 

1. To Mount between the Bars (No. 1). Stand be- 
tween the bars vdih the hands hanging loosely by the 
sides, spring up, and placing a hand on either bar, with 
the fingers on the outside and the thumb inside, keep 
yourself suspended for a short time. The legs must be 
kept perfectly straight and close together, and the toes 
pointing slightly downwards (see fig. 59). 

To dismount, give a slight spring upwards, at the same 
time lifting the hands from ofi* the bars and carrying the 
arms in front of you, or over your head, else they may 
come in contact with the bars on your ahghting on the 
ground, which you must do on your toes. 

2. To Walk along the Bars (No. 1). Ami p-actice. — 
Suspend yourself between the bars at the ends, with 
the face towards then' lengi:h, and move the hands alter- 
nately along them. This must be done without bringing 
the shoulders out of their place, or hasty and n^regular 
steps being made, the body or legs twisted about, or 
any like irregularity ; and when the opposite end 
has been reached, the walk must be repeated back- 
wards to the point of starting, which will be a Httle 
tedious at first, but after a little practice it will become 
quite easy. 



126 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



Tlie arms must be kept perfectly straight, or tlie exer- 
cise, TrkLcli must be practised well with the fingers on the 
inside of the bars, as well as outside, ttlII become much 
more difficult to beginners than it really is. Therefore, 
to succeed, you must make the steps slowly and regu- 
larly, and keep the arms and legs straight. 



Fi&. 59. 




hands, but, in lieu of the legs being straight with the 
body, they are bent into a sitting postm^e. and kept in 
that position during the process of walking. (See fig. 60.) 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



127 



In order to have the greatest possible vreight on the 
arms, a weight may be placed in the lap, such as a 4 lb. 
or perhaps a 7 lb., or any weight preferred by the 
learner ; but the nearer to the knees the weight is placed, 
the greater will be the strength required in the legs to 
keep them in the required position. 



Fig. 60. 




A block of wood may be placed between the feet (with 
or without the other weight), thereby requiring addi- 
tional strength in the muscles of the legs to keep the feet 
from separating, so as to prevent the block from falling. 
(See Ex. 6, page 128.) 

4. The Cramp (No. 2). Leg^ arm, and ivrist p-adice. 
— Suspend the body between the bars, and bring up 
the legs, bent both at the hips and knees, as in the last 



128 



Ercercises on the Parallel Bars. 



exercise, but on bringing tliem up raise tlie body up be- 
liincL and, by opening tliem. carry one on either side of 
tlie arms, letting the feet be as much over the bars as 
possible, but Avithout touching them. Then, Trhile in 
that position, Tralk slowly backwards and forwards ; but 
care must be taken to sustain a good balance while so 
doing, which can only be done by grasping the bar firmlv, 
taking the steps slowly, and keeping the legs well for- 
ward and the head well up. This exercise will be found 
to be excellent practice for the arms and legs. 

5. The Treadmill. Leg irractice. — It is hoped the young 
gymnast will pardon the desire to send him so soon to 
such a place, but, as it is not a place of punishment, 
perhaps he will give it a fair trial. 

Mount between the bars, and : — 

Fii'st, — In advancing the right ann lift up the right or 
left leg. as if ascending a flight of steps, and do the same 
with the left arm. 

Second. — In drawing up the leg on advancing one 
arm. put it down when the other is advanced. 

Thu^d. — Bring up both legs every time one arm is 
advanced, and send them down shai^ply when the other 
is brought forward. 

Foui^th. — Every time either arm is advanced, lift both 
legs at once, and jerk them down again smartly before 
you make another step with your arm. 

The whole of the above should be well practised, as by 
them, especially the latter, the strength of the grasp is 
very much tested. The arms must on no account be 
allowed to bend through the action of the lesrs, as that 
would show great weakness in those parts. 

6= The Burthen. Arriip'adice. — This exercise wonder- 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 129 



fully increases tlie strengtli of the muscles in tlie arms ; 
it likewise tests to the fullest extent the balancing 
powers of a beginner, or it may be one who calls himself 
a tolerably proficient gymnast, although it consists in 
nothing more than walking along the bars, both back- 
wards and forwards, with a weight upon the shoulders. 
A little boy sitting upon them, with his legs hanging 
do^vn in front, would be a very good load after a while, 
and the weight might be gradually increased until he be 
able to carry one of his o^vn age or weight. 

^Yhile achieving this exercise the arms must be kept 
perfectly straight, and the advance steps made regularly 
and not too suddenly, as this would tend to overbalance 
you. (See The Cramp, Ex. 3, page 126, and the remarks 
to the last exercise.) 

7. To Hop along the Bars. Arm ijradice. — This ex- 
ercise tries the strength of the wrist very much, and 
likewise the patience of embryo gymnasts, and to perform 
it the pupil must mount between the bars as in the last 
exercise, but instead of moving the hands alternately, they 
are to be moved both at the same time in very short 
steps, the legs being kept perfectly straight while it is 
being performed. 

The hop may be done by bending the arms a little, 
thereby sinking the shoulders, and straightening them 
again suddenly, or by raising the legs a little, and drop- 
ping or jerking them down again directly. In either case 
it must be done so very sHghtly as to be scarcely per- 
ceptible ; so much so, that some gymnasts will hop back- 
ward and forward in such a way, and with such apparent 
ease, that it is difB.cult to tell how it is done. 

8. Walking (No. 2). Shoulder and arm practice, — 

K 



180 Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 

Stand between tlie bars and grasp tbem from under- 
neath, with, the fingers uppermost, then, sinking down 
until the arms are quite straight, raise the legs and 
gradually carry them and the body upwards until they 
assume a position similar to fig. 61 ; though, to be better 

able to keep in that 
position here, the back 
must be bent a little 
back, then, by turning 
the face downwards to- 
wards the gTOund, move 
the hands to and fro 
along the bars, still re- 
taining the body in the 
same position. This 
being an excellent ex- 
ercise to strengthen 
the grasp, it should be 
well practised ; but at 
first the pupil should 
take but a few steps 
while the body is thus 
inverted, yet, after a 
while, he may gTa du- 
ally increase the num- 
ber, which will be in proportion to the time he can remain 
thus, and to his success in achieving it. 

9. Walking (No. 3). Hij^, shoulder^ and arm prac- 
tice, — Grasp the bars fi^om underneath and bring the 
legs up as in the last, but bend the legs at the hips only, 
and carry them out perfectly straight, though this will 
cause the body to drop a little that way ; but this may 




Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



131 



be counterbalanced by carrying it a little back, and 
while in that position move the hands alternately along 
the bars, keeping the face towards the gTOund and the 
arms perfectly straight. 

10. To Swing. — To get perfect freedom in the arms 
and wrists the swing is an exercise to be both practised 
and persevered in ; therefore, while suspended between 
the bars, the learner must swing the legs and body to and 
fro, very little at first, until he can with safety increase 
it ; but not a mere swaying of the legs and body to and 
fro, like the pendulum of a clock, where there is no dif- 
ference in the position of them in either the forward or 




backward swing, the centre of gravity being at the 
shoulders only, which is generally the performance of 
most embryo gymnasts, more especially if they are not 
young in years ; for, besides the action given at the 

K 2 



132 Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



shoulders, the legs are also to be bent both at tlie Hps 
and knees, at tlie latter but little, and the body is to be 
raised much higher in the backyrard (fig. 62) than in 
the forward swing (fig. 63). The legs must be kept 
close together, and in increasing the swing thev are to 
be made to do their utmost, more especially in the for- 

FiG. 63. 




ward swing, where they are brought up well in front, as 
will be seen on referring to the illustration (fig. 63). 
tken carried down with increased impetus, describing a 
part of a circle in so doing, which gives a sufficient 
momentum to the body to enable it to be raised up as in 
fig. 62. In either case, the feet must be carried as high 
as the head, — -if higher, the better : btit in the back- 
ward swing the body ^411 be parallel with the bars, 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 133 



although many, in STringing,]cany it up nearly as high as 
requu^ed for a hand balance. (See Ex. 57, page 165.) 

11. The Arm Swing. Fore-arm pracAice. — Mount be- 
tween the bars, grasp them firmly, and let the body sink 
so as to allow the fore- arms to rest on them (fig. 64) ; 
then, while in that position, spying the legs to and fro, as 




described in the last exercise, without letting the elbows 
sHp ofi* the bars, and practise it. when able to achieve Ex. 
57, page 165, until you can raise the body upright above 
the bar as in the exercise referred to, when straighten the 
arms. 

12. The Kick or Spur. — Leg irroxtke. — Whilst swing- 
ing, as described in ISTo. 4, draw up either leg alternately 
and send it out again with all your force ; or bring up 
both legs at once, but it must be done in the back swing 
and when the legs are high above the bars, or you are 
likely to feel the effects of your own kick. 

The sudden motion of the legs is likely to throw the 



134 



Exercises on the Farallel Bars. 



body a little out of its balance, yet grasping tlie bars 
firmly will prevent it after a little practice. It is excel- 
lent practice for the legs, and sliould tlierefore not be 
passed over. (See tlie remarks to Ex. 5, page 128.) 

13. To Bring the Legs over (No. 1). Mount between 
the bars and swing, tben, in tlie forward swing (fig. 63), 
carry botli legs over tlie /^/Y-band bar, as in fig. 65, or 
allow tbe body to slide over the bar until it reaches the 
hips. (See tbe next exercise.) 



Fig. 65. 




]N'ow, by giving tbe legs an upward motion, assisted 
by tbe arms, raise tbe legs over tbe bar, and allowing 
tbem to drop between tbem, carry tbem over tbe riglit- 
band bar tbe next time tbey rise on tbe forward swing, 
wbicb migbt be repeated ad libitum. Tbis exercise may 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



135 



be thus varied : — throw the legs over the. right-hand 
bar, as ah'eadj stated, but on bringing them back again, 
instead of allowing them to drop between the bars, carry 
them directly over the left, when the exercise might be 
repeated three or four times to advantage ; but this will 
require gTeater exertion. 

14. The Engaged Seat. Leg ]Drcictice. — This exercise 
is performed by bringing the legs over the bars a series 
of times, thus : — 

Swing at one end of the bars, and throw the legs over 
either bar (say the left-hand one first), advance your 
hands to your front, with a spring bring the legs between 
the bars, and throw them ov^r the same bar again in 
front of your hands, advance your hands, and repeat the 
exercise to the end of the bars. 

The difference in going forward on the one bar, and 
returning on the same or the other, consists in your 
placing your hands behind you, and carrying your legs 
behind your hands, instead of in front, as before mentioned. 
Or, in other words, to advance the arms are placed in 
front of you, but to return they are placed behind you. 

The learner might swing between the bars every time 
the legs come between them, which will assist him 
greatly in throwing the legs over, especially when re- 
turning ; but this should not be done, if able to dispense 
with it. 

For practice in this exercise, mount between the bars, 
in the middle, and carry the legs over the ri^A/-hand bar 
in front of you, then give a good spring and carry them 
over the left, as described in the last exercise ; then, 
without resting, bring the legs down between the bars, 
and carry them over the same bar behind your hand : 



136 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



then lean tlie body suddenly forTrard, give a good spring, 
raise your legs clear off tliat bar, and carry them over 
tlie otlier, wlien tliey must be again lifted up as just 
mentioned, letting tliem dro^D between tlie bars, and 
be carried to tlie front again. The exercise may be re- 
peated as often as desired. 

Another variation to tliis exercise is, to carry tlie legs 
from tb.e riglit bar in front of you, to the left bar behind 
you, tlien, making the change behind from one bar to 
the other, as before, hft the legs from the rigJit behind, 
and carry them to the left front ; then reversing the 
course, go from left front to right behind, change to 
left behind, and carry to riglit fi^ont. These varia- 



either in the front or behind, as shov^m by fig. 66, in 
which the legs are perfectly straight. 




EiG. 66. 



tions are some- 
times very amus- 
ing, as it often 
occurs that the 
legs are carried 
over the wrong 
bar, or else they 
are carried to 
the front instead 
of behind, or vice 



versa. 



Another vari- 
ation to this ex- 
ercise is, not to 
allow the body 
to rest at all 
upon the bars. 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



137 



15. To Jump out. — To bring tliis al30iit the gymnast 
must make use of the same motion of the body and legs 
as in the last two exercises ; but, instead of only tln^ow- 
ing the legs over the bar, he must use a greater impetus 
to enable him to bring the body over it as well as the 
legs, which must be carried a little higher, when, on 
letting go of the bars with his hands, he must give a 
good spring with the wrists, and he will alight safely on 
the ground ; but he must remember to do so on his 
toes, as on no account must a gymnast alight on his 
heels or flat feet. It will therefore be better for him to 
keep his toes pointed well towards the ground in all 
such exercises. 

16. To Bring the Legs over (No. 2). Leg irradke. — 
Mount between the bars with the face towards their 
length, and carry the legs one over either bar in front, 
without a swino- lettino- them be close to the hands. 
Xow raise the body upright, and pass the hands to the 
front, keeping the legs, and the body likewise, as near 
as possible, perfectly straight, thereby pressing the legs 
tightly against the bars ; then, gTasping the bars firmly, 
lean forward and raise the legs up behind over the bars, 
keeping them still as straight as before, or nearly so, 
when, on their dropping between the bars, carry them 
up again over them in front, as before, and re^Dcat the 
exercise to the end of the bars. (See the next exercise.) 

17. To Bring the Legs over (No. 3). Leg practice. — 
Mount between the bars, as in the last, but with 
the back towards their length instead, which is the 
position the body is in, after having achieved the 
preceding one, and carry the legs up behind and 
over the bars. Xow raise the body upright, as be- 



138 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



fore, pressing the legs well against tlie bars, and keep- 
ing the legs and body in a straight line one with the 
other, pass the hands behind, then, without moving the 
bodj, bend the legs up slowly in front at the hips only, 
and let them drop between the bars, when, by raising 
the body up behind, carry the legs over them, as before, 
and re^Deat the exercise to the end of the bars. The 
straighter the legs are kept in these last two exercises, 
the better will they be done, as it is for that purpose 
they are here inserted. 

18. To Bring the Legs over (No. 4). Leg p-adice.— 
Mount between the bars in the centre, raise the legs and 
body up behind very gradually and easily, by leaning a 
little forward, and whereby the weight of the body is 
thrown more upon the arms, then, turning the body 
slightly to the rights throw the left leg over the riglit- 
hand bar, when raise the body again slowly, and carry 
the riglit leg over the Ze/7^-hand bar, and repeat the exer- 
cise as slowly as possible thi^ee times at least each way 
alternately. (See the next exercise.) 

19. To Bring the Legs over (No. 5). Fore-arm lorac- 
f ice. — Proceed as in Ex. 11, page 133, and in the forward 
saving carry the legs over the right-hand bar, and then 
proceed according to the directions given in Ex. 14, 
page 135, the only difference being in the position of the 
arms, though this will be found rather more difficult, as 
neither elbow must be either raised from, or allowed to 
slip off the bar, while carrying the legs over the several 
ways, and achieving the exercise. 

20. The Janus. — Mount between the bars in the 
middle, and throw a leg over each in front of your 
hands. Grasp the bars firmly, and with a spring bring 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 1 39 



the legs between tlie bars, and carry them up beliind 
you, but in so doing cross the legs, as in fig. 67, and in 




giving the body a slight twist allow them to rest on 
opposite bars, when the right leg will be on the left- 



PiG. 68. 



140 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



hand bar, and tlie left leg on tlie riglit-liand bar. (See 
fig. 68.) Do not always turn your body tlie same way, 
nor let tbe same leg be always uppermost in crossing 
tbem. Tbis exercise should be repeated two or tln^ee 
times in succession by altering the position of the hands, 
and placing them each on the other bar, thereby bring- 
ing the body straight as before, but with the face looking 
a different way. 

21. The Barber's Curl. Muscle and sijine ]jractice. — 
Stand between the bars, and grasp them as in Ex. 8, 
page 129, with the knuckles uppermost and the thumb on 
the same side as the fingers, then sinking down, straighten 
the knees into a sitting posture, as in the next exercise. 
ISTow bring the legs gradually over between the arms 

Fig. 69. 



I) 































■ ir 
i ' 
\ 





(fig. 69), till they perform a circle, or until they come 
nearly down to the ground (fig. 70), and after staying 
in that position for a short time, carry them back again 
quite as slow as you brought them over. The knees 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 141 



must be kept perfectly straiglit, and the feet kept off the 
gTOund the whole of the time. Though this is difficult 
to beginners and makes the arms ache, it is nevertheless 

Fig. 70. 




easily performed after a little practice. Therefore do 
not give up in despan*, if unable to do it the first, or even 
the second time trying, for this is a very pleasing exer- 
cise, and tends greatly to strengthen the muscles of the 
arms, and likewise causes the grasp to be much firmer. 
(See Exercises 116 and 1, pages 107 and 176.) 

22. To Rise and Fall below th^ Bars, or the Letter L. 
Muscle practice. — Hang from the bars as in the last 
exercise, and in carrying the legs out in front bend them 
only at the hips, and raising them up horizontally they 
will, with the body, assume the shape of a letter L, from 
which the exercise takes its name. 'Now, while in this 
position, gradually pull the body up by bending the arms 
at the elbows and shoulders until the upper part of the 
arms are parallel with the bars, as in fig. 71, then, after 



142 Exercises on the Farallel Bars. 



lia^dng remained thus for a sliort time. gradtiallT lower 
jonrself again. The most difficult part of the exercise 
is, that on raising the body as just stated, the legs are to 
be kept in exactly the same position as they were before 
you began, i.e. horizontal (see fig. 71). and the exer- 

FiG. 71. 




cise must be persevered in, arms and legs achieving 
their respective parts, without allowing the latter to bend 
or drop. Though this is difficult at first to beginners, it 
is soon to be achieved by practice. 

23. The Letter L Walk, 2Iusde j^racizce.— Achieve 
the last exercise close to the ends of the bars, and raise 
the body until the upper arms are parallel vdth them, 
then move the hands alternately backward and forward 
along them their whole length, still keeping the body 
raised, and the legs in their horizontal position. 

This exercise ought not to be practised until the jDujoil 
is well up in the preceding, as the fact of having to sus- 
23end the body in the above position by one hand, even 
though it be but for a moment, makes it all the more 
difficult to carry into efi'e ct. 

24. To Rise and Sink above the Bars (No. 1). 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 143 



Muscle practice. — Momit between the bars, grasp tliem 
nrmlj, and, alloTN-ing the head and chest to project a 
little forward, lower the bodj gradnallj hj bending the 
arms, and carrjTJig the elbows well up over each respec- 
tive bar, until your body assumes the position shown in 
fig. 72, but without allowing the feet to touch the 



Fig. 72. 




gTound ; then, by trying to straighten your arms, gTadu- 
ally raise the body again without allowing it or the legs 
to move or turn about. At first this will test the whole 
strength of your muscles to their utmost ; but take it 
easy, as, after a few times trying, you will find that 



144 Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



it is not quite so difficult to execute as it at first ap- 
peared. 

The muscles of the chest, and more especially those 
connected with the shoulders, derive the greatest benefit 
from this exercise. Under these circumstances no pupil 
ought to be allowed to pass it over, as many are tempted 
to do, from the seeming pain caused by the weight of the 
body upon the shoulders by the arms being bent back. 

25. To Rise and Fall above the Bars (No. 2). One 
arm practice. — Mount between the bars, grasping them 
firmly with the fingers outyrards and the thumbs in- 
wards, and. 

First. — Gradually lower the body as in the last exer- 
cise (fig. 72), then lean the body a httle towards the left, 
and straighten the right arm without at all altering the 
position of the left more than the nature of the exercise 
will require : now lower it again, and by leaning towards 
the right raise the left arm in like manner, repeating 
the exercise very slowly ad lihiturn. 

Second. — On sinking down keep the right arm straight 
and straighten the left before bending the right, or sink 
down with the right while straightening the left, and 
vice versa ; or else lower one side and then the other 
before raising it. 

Third.' — Sink down and rest the fore-arms on the bar, 
and proceed as given in the first method above. 

Fourth. — Achieve the exercise by resting on the fore- 
arms, but in the manner stated in the second method. 

26. To Mount between the Bars (No. 2). 2Iuscle 
and wrist practice ; qiiich raoveonent. — Stand between 
the bars at a sufficient distance from the ends to en- 
able the elbows to rest upon them, and grasp the bars 



Exercises on the Farallel Bars. 



145 



firmly witli the fingers outwards, tlie tlimnbs inwards, 
and the body upright. It is now required to rise from 
this position and carry the body above the bars as if you 
had only mounted them. This is done with a jerk> 
thus : lean the head and shoulders suddenly forward, at 
the same time raising the elbows well up from off the 
bars, when, by straightening the arms directly, rise as 
stated above, the whole to be done as one simultaneous 
movement. In itself it looks very simple to be done, 
and so it is after it has been practised a few times. 
To beginners it is diflScult ; but practice makes perfect, 
and the dif&culty of this exercise is soon overcome. 

27. To Mount between the Bars (No. 3). Arm prac- 
tice, — Stand between the bars and place a hand on either 
close to the body, then Hft the legs from the ground, which 
will cause the whole weight of the body to be upon the 
arms, which from their position, viz. bent, with the elbows 
uppermost, will cause the head and chest to be thrown 
forward ; therefore, all that is requisite for the pupil to 
do now is to straighten his arms, thereby raising his body 
into the required position between the bars. But this 
requires greater strength in the wrists, as well as in the 
arms, and should consequently be well practised until 
those parts are sufficiently strengthened to be able to 
achieve it easily. (See Ex. 24, page 142). 

This exercise must be likewise practised with the 
fingers on the inside of the bars, when the thumb may 
be either on the outside or on the same side as the 
fingers ; the latter is preferred. 

28. The Stooping Walk (No. 1). Muscle practice. — 
Mount between the bars at the ends, with the face to- 
wards their length, and proceed as in the last, and when 

L 



146 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



the body is as low as it can be conveniently, move the 
bands alternately along tbe bars, as in the walking exer- 
cise, ^To. 2, page 125. Tbe consequent pressure upon 
each shoulder, while achieving this exercise, will cause 
the elbows to incline towards each other, thereby throwing 
the chin more forward. The steps must be taken very 
regularly and steadily, but at first the legs may be 
brought up a little as occasion requires, though it is 
better to dispense with that additional aid. 

29. The Stooping Hop. Muscle practice. — This exercise 
ought perhaps to have been included in the last, but 
being, to many, much more difficult, it had better be 
mentioned separately. 

It is effected by hopping on both hands at once, like 
^o. 7, page 129, but whilst in the sinking position as 
above ; and to accomplish it more easily, the legs may be 
drawn up and suddenly jerked down at the time the hop 
is made, but it should scarcely be perceptible, and should 
not be done at all after the exercise can be done without, 
as the spring ought to be made from the wrist and arms, 
which raise the body a little in making the hop. 

30. The Stooping Swing. Muscle practice. — Proceed 
as in Ex. 24, page 142, then make use of the legs as in Ex. 
10, page 131. Swing as high and as long as convenient, 
but do not tire yourself, as, although this position is very 
beneficial to the gymnast, he should always know when 
to stop. When able to swing to and fro easily the pupil 
may proceed with Exercises 33, 34, and 66, pages 148, 
149, and 170. 

31. The Long Run. Arm practice. — Mount between 
the bars at the ends as before, and when the body is in a 
good swing, and raised as in fig. 62, viz, in the hachcard 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 147 



swing, make as many alternate movements of tlie hands 
along tlie bars as yon can before the legs are allowed to 
drop, and stopping as soon as they do so, repeating the 
exercise every time the body is thus raised till the oppo- 
site ends of the bars are reached. 

The pupil must not expect to take more than two, or 
three steps at the outside, at first, but by a little patience 
and practice he will soon be able to take five or six 
easily. 

This exercise may be likewise done when the body is 
in the fonvard swing, but this wdll be found to be much 
more difficult ; yet it is to be overcome by practice, as 
will soon be found if any gymnast will give it a fair 
trial. 

32. To Jump along the Bars. — This exercise partakes 
of the swing, the walk, and the hop, and in order to do 
it the pupil must get his body into a good swing at the 
ends of the bars, with his face towards their length, the 
jump being made between the swing ; and as this jump 
may be made in various ways, it has been divided into 
six parts, the three first partaking of the swing and walk, 
and the three last of the swing and hop, thus : — 

First. — Swing well, and when the legs are rising in 
the forward swing, advance, first the right arm, then the 
left, but these movements must be made in the fonvard 
swing only. 

Second. — Swing and advance one arm alternately, as 
above, in the backward swing only. 

Third. — Advance the arms alternately, one in the for- 
ward, and one in the lackward swing. 

Fourth. — Advance hoth arms at once, as in the Hop 
exercise, page 129, in ihe forward swing only. 

L 2 



148 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



Fifth. — Let both arms be advanced only in the had'- 
ward STring. 

Sixth, and la stir. — The arms must in this be advanced 
both in the /';'/'/'■'/ /t7 and hacJcirard swing. 

These exercises give good practice for the gymnast, 
btit althotigh they ^vill at first make the arms ache, it will 
soon wear off, and after having persevered in each and 
all of them for a short time, this feeling will be but mo- 
mentary, thongh these aching pains in a young gymnast 
are often felt on the following day, more especially if he 
went into the gymnasitim with a determination to have a 
good spell at it. and have done with the worst at once: 
but it is in this as in all other like exercises, nothing shoii: 
of continual practice makes perfect. (See the next exer- 
cise and Exercises 34 and 66, pages 149 and 170.) 

33. The Long Leap, or The Pumping Movement (for- 
ward). Arm and I'-rist ijracfice. — This exercise reqiiii^es 
gTeat strength in the wrists and muscles, and must 
therefore be continually practised, or it will be utterly 
impossible for the pupil ever to accomplish it to per- 
fection, and with that perfect ease and fi^eedom of action 
which the natui^e of the exercise demands, and without 
which its beauty and advantageous results will be enth^ely 
lost. 

Proceed with the swing as described in Ex. 10, page 
131, and in the lachi'.-crrd swing (fig. 62) bend the arms, 
thereby sinking the body as in fig. 73. before the legs have 
had time to di^op ; then, on the body rising in the /on/ja/T? 
swing (fig. 63). carry up the legs well in front, at the 
same time taking a sudden spring with the wi^ists, some- 
what similar to the Hop, Ex. 7, page 129, but in this ad- 
vance as far along the bars as practicable, but in short 



Exercises on theParallel Bars. 149 



steps at first, as after a Kttle time jou will be able so to 
increase it as to go the lengtb of tlie bars in tln^ee, if not 
in two, springs or jumps. On abgliting on the bars, the 




arms are to be straightened, as in fig. 63, and proceeding 
mth the hachwarcl swing, prior to allowing the body to 
sink again, when it may be repeated as often as con- 
venient, but without overtiring yourself, until able to 
take the leap as already described. 

34. The Pumping Movement (backward). Ann and 
ivrist jpradicG. — When the ends of the bars are reached 
in the last exercise, the gymnast must achieve this exer- 
cise by reversing the motion, viz. allow the body to sink 
in the forward swing, and on the body rising in the laclv- 
ward swing, give a backward spring, alighting on the 
bar with straightened arms, then sink down again and 
continue the exercise to the end of the bars. 

More difB.cult to execute than the last, but to a perse- 
vering gymnast that difficulty will be as nothing. (See 
Ex. 66, page 170.) 



150 Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



35. Kissing the Bars. Sinne^ neck, and arm irradice. 
— First put the body in tlie j)ostiire described in Ex. 24, 
page 142, tlien endeavour to bring the bead down close 
to each bar alternately, so as to kiss tbem. It should be 
done behind the hands as well as in front of them, but it 
will be a Httle more difficult. 

This is a simple exercise after a little practice, but to 
a beginner it causes a sHght pain in the back and neck, 
though it is only momentary. 

36. The Spanish Fly (No. 1). — This is a very pretty 
finish when the gymnast is at the ends of the bars, and 
is not near so difficult to carry into efiect as it would 
at first seem. 

A'\Tien at the ends of the bars place the hands over 
them by capping them, i.e. let the palm of each 
hand rest on the extreme end of each bar, when the 
fingers and thumb, by gTasping it firmly on all sides, 
appear to hide it fi^om view, as shown in fig. 74 ; or, if 
preferred, the gymnast may gTasp the bars in the ordi- 
nary way about two inches from the ends : this latter 
method seems to have superseded the former. Xow 
swing to and fro twice, making the backward swing the 
last, and in so doing raise the body up behind, and carry- 
ing the legs up higher than the bars, open them and 
carry them one over either bar (fig. 74) with a strong- 
impetus, when, by giving a slight spring with the 
wrists and letting go yoiu^ hold T^dth the hands, ahght 
on the ground. ^ow, in flying thus over the bars 
the body must be leaned well forward, when the 
spring given with the wrists will give you gi^eater 
coui^age to let go, likewise a better and easier method 
of bringing the legs together again by straightening 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 151 



the body a little, without knocking them against the 
ends of the bars. 

The gi^eater the impetus given in bringing the legs 
Fia. 74. 




forward over the bars, together with the spring with the 
wrists, the greater will be the success in achieving the 
exercise. 

37. The Spanish Fly (No. 2).— This finish is the re- 
verse movement to the last, consequently the back must 
be towards the ends instead of the face, the fly over the 
ends being made in the backward swing, which, aided 
with a good spring back with the wrists, will, if the legs 
be lifted well up in front and straight, and opened wide, 
free you entirely from all chance of encountering the 
bars, and you will alight on the ground. A little per- 
severance only is required to enable it to be carried into 
efi*ect quite easily. (See the Lungers, page 10.) 

38. The Dance. Leg and lurist practice. — This is a 
very lively exercise, but it requires great nerve to do it, 



152 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



thongiL it will be rendered mucli more easy to accomplisli 
after the gymnast has practised the Vaulting Exercises 
in tiie 247tL. and subsequent pages. 

Mount between tbe bars with your face looking towards 
tbem, swing pretty smartly, and when your body is raised 
up behind and fairly balanced, throw the right leg over 
the right-hand bar by letting go that hand, bring your 
leg between the bars, and grasp the bar again without 
allowing either foot to touch the ground. Do so with the 
left hand and leg, and continue as often as convenient ; 
and when well up in doing it as above, the exercise may 
be varie'ti by advancing along the bars, but this -will 
render it much more difficult to achieve, as the legs 
must be lifted higher to carry them over the bars, but it 
should nevertheless be well practised. 

39. The Bend. Spine practice. — Stand outside the 

Fig. 76. 




bars with your face towards them, grasp them firmly 
with your hands, letting the knuckles be uppermost, and 
with a spring carry your legs under the bar you are 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



153 



holding and over tlie other (see fig. 75), then, hj using 
jour arms (without moving jour hands from the bar), 
and with a sHght forward motion of the bodj, carrj it 
over the second bar, and when the middle of the back 
reaches it, provided jour head be free of the first, make 
a slight spring ^yith jour arms which will cause jou to 
shde over the second bar and alight on jour feet, but on 
alighting let the toes be pointed to the groujid. 

Another method of doing it is to grasp the bar, and, 
springing up, carrj the legs and bodj over the second, 
and giving the spring with the arms directlj, go over 
the other without anj apparent pause ; this would be the 
more easilj done were the gymnast to raise his legs 
well up in carrjing them over, which, with the after 
spring, would after a little practice enable it to be done 
T\'ithout touching, or at least but verj little, the other 
bar. 

The whole of the bodj must pass freelj between the 
bars and over the second, and on no account is anj 
part of it to be turned on one side while achieving this 
exercise, which causes the spine to bend fr^eelv, but 
manj a joung gjmnast abandons it, owing to that action 
giving him some reason to think it hurts him; jet, after 
having done it three or four times, it will not be found 
to be so difficult, and therefore he will be able to do it 
with ease to his back and satisfaction to himself. 

40. The Turnover. — Sit astride the bars as across a 
saddle, stretch the hands out in front, fall forward, 
dropping the bodj between the bars with a quick mo- 
tion, and bringing up the hands underneath (see fig. 76), 
grasp the bars behind jou ; this will cause vou to release 
jour hold of the bars with the legs, but bv bringing them 



154 



Exercises mi the Parallel Bars. 



together dii^ectlY tliev are free of tliem tliey ^11 drop 
between tliein. Trlien tou mav alielit on tlie eroimd. 
It sliould be tried slowly at first, so as to understand the 

Fig. 76. 




mode of catching bold of tbe bars, therefore until perfect 
in that one part do not attempt to let go with your legs, 
then graduallv increase the quickness of the motion trntil 
jou can achieve it without any pause, for to do it pro- 
perly it must be done quickly. 

41. To Roll over the Bars. Spine practice. — Sit on 
one of the bars with both legs on the outside, and gTasp 
that bar with both hands, one on either side of you. with 
the knuckles uppermost, then lean back on the other bar 
and rest the back of the neck on it. when bring the legs 
over the bar on which your neck rests, thereby causing 
the body to rise with them, as in fig. 77, and by letting 
sro vour hands when the whole bodv is nearlv over the 
second bar, you will ahght safely on youi^ feet. 

This exercise should at first be practised with the lun- 
gers on, until you have sufficient coui^age to do it by your- 
self. It must be done tolerably quick, other^vise your legs 
will not be forward enough to fall when you let go your 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 155 



hands, and the consequences may be some-syhat disagree- 
able, though it is a yeiy neat exercise if performed with 
agihty and without fear. 

42. The Sausage. S;pine j^racUce. — Mount between the 
bars about the 

middle, with the ^' • 

fingers on the 
outside, bend up 
the legs and hitch 
the toes oyer 
them behind the 
hands, letting 
them point out- 
wards. N^ow pass 
the hands farther 
towards their 
ends of the bars, 
and when they 
and the feet are 
suJficiently far apart, let the body sink down as low as 
possible ; in fact, when in this position you must occupy 
as great a length of the bars as possible, by working the 
hands forward and the toes backward (see fig. 78). 

The pupil must now endeayour to rise, which at first 
he wtlU not be able to do properly, for he will either not 
be able to rise at all, or else he will so far forget him- 
self as to let his toes drop off' fi-om the bars ; yet after a 
little perseyerance the dif&culty ^yill be easily oyercome, 
as the whole secret rests in the muscles and spine, which 
will be put to theh^ full test. It is accomplished by fii^st 
raising the head and shoulders aboye the bars by bend- 
ing the arms, when the elbows are to be brought upper- 




156 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



most ; after that is achieyed, the rest is easy. Until able 
to do it other^vise, one arm may be brought up at a time, 

Fig. 78. 




but tliis should not be attempted after the first few 
attempts. 

This exercise should be so persevered in, that when 
accomphshed, a weight may be placed in the hollow of 
the back, and gTadually increased ; and the steadier 
this feat is done the sooner will the difficulty be 
overcome. 

43. The Bridge. S^ine, leg, and arm practice. — Sit 
on one of the bars with your legs between them, rest 
your hands on the same bar you sit on, with the fingers 
on the inside. Carry your body forward so as to sup- 
port it by the knees on the other bar, straighten your 
arms, lean the head back, and by lifting one leg at a 
time, rest the feet on the bar, and bring the body as 
straight as possible. 

In order to dismount from the bars, or rather to de- 
stroy the bridge, spring with yom^ feet sufficiently 
strongly to carry them over your head, keeping the 
arms a little bent, and alight on the gi'ound. 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



157 



In performing this finisli. assist yourself as much as 
possible Trith the hands ; after a Httle practice it will 
become quite easy, and you may then add a weight to 
the body, as described in ^i). 3, page 126, thereby trying 
the strength of the bridge. 

44. The Pancake. Ar;n pradice. — Mount between the 
bars as in Xo. 1, and swing until your body in the 
backward swing be parallel with the bars (see fig. 62), 
or until you think you can hold on to the bars no longer : 
when such is the case, release your hold and endeavour, 
whilst in the air. to clap the hands (see fig. 79), and on 




falling catch hold of the bars again without allowing the 
feet to touch the ground, repeating the exercise at least 
three times without resting. It will make the arms 
ache at first, but, notwithstanding that, it is to be easily 
achieved. 

45. The Exchange. Arm practice. — Suspend yourself 



158 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



between the bars near the centre of tliem, and with a 
sudden twisting motion of tbe body, aided by a spring 
with the wrists, let go the bars, and endeavonr, by 
turning balf round and cadcbing bold of tbem again 
with both bands, to face tbe opposite ends ; tbus the bar 
tbat was previously beld by tbe rigbt band will now be 
beld by tbe left, and vice versa. This exercise migbt be 
advantageously repeated tbi'ee or four times without 
resting or letting tbe feet touch the groand. 

46. Leg and Spine Practice. — Stand between the bars, 
place the hands on them, jump up. but in so doing give 
the body a turn half round, and sitting on either bar, at 
the same time letting go with the hands, hitch the feet 
under the opposite bar. and, as it were, throw the body 
baclrsYards, letting it di^op as low as possible, with the 
arms extended well over the head ; then, with a sudden 
impetus, bring the body up, place the hands on the front 
bar, leaning well forward upon it to enable you to bring 
up the legs behind, when, with a slight spring with the 
arms, carry them backwards over the bar, letting go 
your hold and alighting on the ground. 

This is a very clever exercise, and must be well 
practised to be able to do it neatly, as the legs are not 
to be carried on one side, but bent under only sufficiently 
to enable them to clear the bar. 

47. To Circle the Bar (No. 1). Wrist irracf ice. —This 
exercise does not in itself differ fi^om that done on the 
horizontal bar, but, in accomphshing it here, the rise 
must not only be done very slowly, but the legs must be 
kept perfectly straight, as in Ex. 50, page 60, as in carry- 
ing them up and over they must not be allowed to touch 
the opposite bar, neither must the head touch it on 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



159 



rising ; this is easily prevented by carrying tlie body 
well round the bar while doing the exercise. 

48. To Circle the Bar (No. 2). Wrist irradice. — Proceed 
with the last exercise, and on the body dropping below 
the bar again, let it swing towards the other, when give 
a slight jump or forward motion, by letting go with the 
hands, and, without touching the gi^ound with the feet, 
grasp the opposite one, then circle that as before, guard- 
ing against touching the bar behind with the feet on 
carrying them over. To continue this exercise achieve 
Ex. 41, page 55, when it may be repeated ad libitum. 

49. The Front Horizontal (No. 1). Sjjine and muscle 
practice. — Grasp the ends of the bars with the fingers 
uppermost, and, stooping down, until the arms are 
straight, carry the legs straight out in front, when raise 
them and the body up until they assume the required 
position as described in Ex. 107, page 100 (see fig. 50). 

50. The Back Horizontal. Spine and muscle practice. 
— Grasp the ends of the bars with the fingers upper- 
most, sink down and carrying the legs out in front and 
raise them and the body upright as in Ex. 106, page 100, 
then, keeping the whole of the body perfectly straight, 
gradually lower it until it assumes the position shown in 
fig. 49. 

51. The Balance. Wrist and muscle practice. — Mount 
between the bars, and bending the legs up behind, at 
the same time Hffcing the body up, bring the knees upon 
them, letting the toes point outward, and kneel. 

Now lean forward, and rest the right shoulder on the 
right-hsnd. bar, as close to the hand as possible, then 
gradually raise your legs into the air until they are 
perfectly straight and perpendicular to the bars, when, 



160 Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



after lia^-ing rested tlius for a sliort time, grasp the bars 
very firmly, and with, a slow motion with the anns carry 
youi^ hody, without altering its position, across the width 
of the bai's (fig. 80), and rest the left shoulder on the 
other bar. 



Fig. 80. 




This exercise should be done as often as conyenient. 
without alloT\"ing the legs to be bent. The wiists will 
here be tried yery much, but will afterwards be found 
to haye gained strength in doing it. 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



161 



Slionld the gTmnast be so rLiifortiinate as to over- 
balance himself, he will do well to practise the next 
exercise. 

52. To EoU along the Bars (No. 1). — Proceed as de- 
scribed in the Arm Swing, Xo. 11, page 133, vrlth the face 
towards the length of the bars, and when the body is 
sufficiently hio-h in the hackicard swing* to allow it to 
fall over, let go with the hands, stretch the arms out, 
and replace them on the bars in fi^ont as soon as able, and 
continue the exercise to the end. 

It must be observed, that, on the body going over, the 
elbows are lifted from the bars, when the weight of the 
body will be on the hands and ^^TL^ists, consequently the 
hands must not let go theii' hold until the arms again 
touch the bars ; it is then that they are to be stretched out, 
and without any fear of falling, as the hands have to 
grasp the bar again almost immediately after they have 
let it go behind, the movement being simultaneously 
fi^om back to fi^ont. 

It must likewise be remembered, that in carrying the 
body up and over, the legs must be bent at the hips, and 
kept straight, and close to the body. This lessening 
the distance the legs have to go enables the body to be 
carried over much slower and easier. 

This exercise may with safety be repeated three times, 
and in carrying the body over it will be well to bend it 
at the hips, and not to keep the legs too straight and 
stifiP. 

53. To Roll along the Bars (No. 2).— This exercise 
is neither more nor less than the reverse motion of the 
last, but it requu^es a gTcater amount of energy to carry 
the legs over. It must be commenced at the ends of the 



162 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



bars witli tlie back toTvards tlieii- lengtli, the bands 
gTasping tbem as in tbe latter position in the last exer- 
cise. The body must be carried over in the forward swing, 
the legs being carried ^vith a much stronger impetus, 
working the body steadily over by the aid of the arms : 
and, as in the previous exercise, no fear need be enter- 
tained of falling, for, as in all similar exercises, energy 
and perseverance, intermingled with a certain amount 
of British pluck, are all that is required. 

When this and the former exercise can be both done 
freely, they might be very advantageously combined, to 
vary the monotony of either of them alone, by rolling 
forward and backward alternately two or three times, or 
two or three times one way and then the same the other. 
This makes a very pleasing and clever feat, more 
especially if the gymnast be well u-p in it. 

54. To Roll aiong the Bars (No. 3).— Proceed as 
described in the last two exercises; but on grasping 
the bars, instead of letting the arms be in the position 
therein stated, let the elbows project so much over them 
that the body shall rest solely on the upper ^^art of the 
arms, as close to the shoulders as the width of the bars 
and the age of the gymnast will admit, the hand then 
grasping them more at the side ; now, on carrying 
the legs up and the body over, the roll will be entii^ely 
on that part where the bars rest ; consequently, some five 
or six revolutions can be easily made each way in suc- 
cession without any fear of rolling off, which makes this 
method a decided improvement, as the shoulders remain 
in the same ^^osition thi^oughout, the hands being, as in 
the last, released of theii^ hold as soon as possible. 

55. The Forward Somersault. Wrist and sjjine irrac- 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



163 



tice. — This is another feat generallv effected at the end 
of anj exercise that takes the gymnast to the ends of the 
bars (see Ex. 36, page 150). It is a verybrilHant finish, 
and is not near so difficult to achieve as would seem on 
reference to the illustration (fig. 81). 

When the ends 
of the bars are 
reached let the 
hands grasp them 
firmly, or, if pre- 
ferred, they may 
be capjDcd as de- 
scribed in the exer- 
cise above referred 
to in page 150; 
then lean a little 
forward, and brino- 
the body with the 
legs up behind, 
and bend the latter 
over the head, in 
doing which bend the arms. This will cause the shoulders 
to come between the bars ; then, when you find yourself 
nearly overbalanced, give a sHght spring with the wrists, 
let go your hold of the bars, and you will alight on the 
ground, but in so doing keep the toes pointed to the 
ground, and bend the legs a little. 

Many, especially beginners, prefer to achieve this ex- 
ercise after a slight swing ; this will certainly enable the 
gymnast to carry his legs over better, but in so doing the 
swing must not be too strong, or the head is very likely to 
go much farther than was bargained for, and may cause 

M 2 



Fig. 81. 




164 Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



liim to measure Ms length on tlie gTOuncI ; therefore, if 
possible, do it Tvithout. 

Do not mind if, in endeavouring to keep yourself on 
your feet after reaching the gTound, you fall forward or 
backward (the latter happens if you let go your hold 
too soon) ; for, after you have accomplished it at least 
five or six times, you will be more eager to go on to the 
next, although it may be somewhat more difficult. 

After the above has been practised and the gymnast 
is sure of doing it, it may with safety be done on the 
middle of the bars. The first time this is done it must be 
with a determination to succeed, or a blow on some part 
of the body may be the consequence ; but on letting 
go the bars hold up the hands, keep the legs together, 
and do not carry yourself over too far, and all will go 
well. 

56. The Backward Somersault. — This exercise is also 
performed at the end of the exercises mentioned in the 
last, but it is first necessary to reverse the position of 
the body, viz. the face towards the length of the bars, 
then lean the head back, and bring the legs over, as in 
the last, but with a much stronger impetus, the move- 
ment being similar to that in Ex. 53, page 161 ; but on 
letting go with your hands, endeavour to carry yourself 
as far from the bars as you can, which might be done, 
after practising it a few times, by bringing the legs 
over a little quicker, and likewise letting go your hands 
a little sooner than in the last, and you ^vill be carried 
out of the reach of the bars if you should at any time 
miss your footing on alighting. 

Keep your legs together, and the toes pointing to 
the oTound, in this and the last feat. 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 165 



57. The Eand Balance, or To Stand on the Hands 

(No. 1). Arm and tvrist ]jracfice. — Proceed as in No. 
51, and after having fairly balanced yourself as there 
described, bring your body eqni- distant between the 
bars, and gTadnally raise it by straightening the arms, 
Tvhen bend the body a httle back, to ensm^e a good 
balance (see fig. 82). 

Stay in that jDOsition for Tig. 82. 

a short time, then lower 
yom^self again, and finish 
with some showy exercise. 

58. The Hand Balance, 
or To Stand on the Hands 
(No. 2). Arm and li rist 
irraxtice, — After having 
2oractised the above for 
some time, it woukl be well 
for the gymnast to mount 
between the bars, swing 
very high, especially in 
the backward swing, and 
on the legs going over the 
head to lower the body a 
little by bending the arms. 
The greatest balance is ne- 
cessary in doing this, as one 
is liable to be too anxious, 
and overbalance himself 
when least expected ; but if. 
in achieving this exercise, 
the body be a little bent, it Avill make it much easier for 
the learner to balance himself in carrving it into effect. 




166 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



wheii the body miglit be raised until tbe arms are 
perfectly straigbt, yet after a little ^Dractice it could be 
accomplished without bending the arms at all, which 
would certainly give it a better effect. 

59. To Walk on the Hands. A:nn and wrist loractice. 
— Proceed as last described, and move the hands alter- 
nately along the bars. This should be fi^equently prac- 
tised, as only constant perseverance will enable the 
difficulty to be overcome. Short steps should be always 
taken, or, in an over desire to accomjDhsh it by taking- 
long, and consequently uneven steps, the exercise will 
be rendered all the more difficult to achieve, even to 
more advanced gymnasts. 

60. La Planche (No. 1). Spine^ slwulder, and muscle 
practice; sloio movement. — Mount between the bars at 
the ends, with the face towards their length, and bend- 
ing the arms up and turning the hands back, cap the 
ends of the bars, i.e. let the palms of the hands rest 
upon the ends, and the fingers clasp it downwards, as far 
as practicable. Xow, taking a step forward, if required 
to straighten the arms, without altering the relative 
positions of the body, arms, and legs, one to the other, 
lean well and slowly forward, bending the arms only at 
the wrists, at the same time raising the legs up behind 
until the arms rest firmly upon the bars, when the body 
will be in the position represented in fig. 83, and per- 
fectly even and parallel with them. This, as well as 
the next, is a very clever, though difficult exercise, and 
requires great practice and strength of muscle to accom- 
plish it to perfection. 

61. La Planche (No. 2). Spine., arm, and muscle 
"practice ; sloio rnovernent. — This exercise consists of lean- 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 167 



ing the upper part of the body so mucli forward as to 
counterbalance the lower part when raised. 

Mount between the bars, and grasp them firmly with 
the fingers on the outside, and the thumb inside, then 

Fig. 83. 




lean gradually forward by bending the arms a little only 
at the elbow, at the same time raising the body and legs 
up behind, as in Ex. 132, page 116, when the whole body, 
with the exception of the fore- arms, should be parallel 
with the bars. (See fig. 83.) 

This is a very clever, though dif&cult exercise, and 
like the last (to which again refer) , requires practice and 
great strength of muscle to achieve it. 

62. The Front Horizontal (No. 2). Sjjine, muscle, 
and wrist practice. — Proceed with the last exercise but 
one, and, instead of resting the upper parts of the arms 
on the bars, allow them and the shoulders to pass 
between them as far as able, but still keeping the fore- 
arms on them. The feet having been kept off the ground 
in the mean time, and perfectly straight with the body, 



168 Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



tliey are to be brought up and over, and being carried 
between tlie bars, tliey a.re gradually lowered until tliey 
assume tbe front liorizontal position as required. But 
l^erliaps tlie more difficult part of tlie exercise is to follow, 
viz. to brino' tlie bodv and lees back ao-ain, witliout 
altering tlieii^ relative positions ; tliis, wbicb is very diffi- 
cult, is only to be mastered by practice, it being one tliat 
requires a great amount of strength, in the muscles of 
the arm, &c.. to be able to achieve it freely, and without 
the least hesitation or overstraining on the part of the 
gymnast. 

63. La Planclie (No. 3). Sjrine^ arm, and muscle 
practice; sJoir move/ne/it. — Mount between the bars, 
and, turning the hands backward, grasp the bars with 
the fingers on the inside, and the thumb outside, then 
sink forward, as in Ex. o9. page 166, until the fore-arms 
rest well on the bars, with the shotdders down between 
them, and the body in the position of the Back Horizontal. 
Xow for the trial of the strength of the mtiscles. viz. to 
rise up again into the former position, without altering 
the position of the body, otherwise than the raising of 
the head and shoulders will require, and it will be foroid 
that nothing less than continual perseverance and practice 
will enable it to be overcome. 

64. The Stooping Walk (No. 2). Wrist, arm. and 
muscle practice; sloe: movement. — Mount between the 
bars at the ends, ^vith the face towards their length, and 
pass the rirjlit hand about a foot in advance of the left. 
then let the body sink by bending the arms, and di^aw it 
gTadually towards the riuid. at the same time letting go 
with the lejt hand, and di^opping the arm straight down 
under the bar, when the body will be supported by the 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



169 



j-igJit arm only, yrliicli must still be bent (bnt tliis is only 
while the left arm is being passed on in advance), and 
bringing it up in front, regras}) tlie bar. when raise the 
body up above the bars, sinking down again du^ectly ; let 
go with the right hand, di^op it underneath as before, 
pass it to the front, and repeat the exercise to the end of 
the bars, raising the body, and lowering it again between 
each step. This, if neatly done, makes a very pretty and 
showy exercise, though at first difficult to achieve ; yet 
it is of infinite benefit to those parts chiefly brought into 
use, as the -s^iist, arm, &c. 

65. The Slow Upward Movement (No. 1). Wrist 
2rractice. — To facihtate and expedite the accomplishing 
of this, to beginners, most difficult and trying exercise, it 
being done solely by the strength of the ^viists, it has 
been divided into thi^ee exercises, each of which may be 
practised as a complete one in itself. 

Mount between the bars, with the face towards their 
length, letting the balls of the hands be a little over 
the ends, but not too far, and the bars firmly grasped, 
the fingers being on the outside, and tending, as the 
exercise is proceeded ^vith, towards the top, the thumb 
being inside. Sink down by bending the arms, allowing 
the elbows to fall with the body, as in fig. 84, keeping 
the head forward and the chin out ; when that point is 
attained, rise (perhaps vrith some little assistance at fii^st) 
into the upright position again, and practise it until able 
to do it easily before attemjDting to proceed ^vith the 
next. 

Although this greatly resembles the Rise and Fall 
exercise (No. 24, page 143), it is thought proper to insert 
it here, not only from the diff'erence m the loosition of 



170 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



the liands and body, but from its connection witli the 
two following exercises, of which it forms a ^Dart. 

68. The Slow Upward Movement (No. 2). Wrist 

loractice. — Proceed 
with the last exercise, 
and this time drop 
the elbows as low as 
possible below the 
bars, still keeping 
the body in the same 
position ; the wrists 
will now be so bent 
over the ends of the 
bars that the body 
will seem to hang 
from them. On carry- 
ing the elbows down 
the fingers should be 
brought somewhat 
over the bars, to have 
a greater purchase 
to rise again, which 
must be done very 
slowly — the slower the better, and well persevered in 
before attempting to continue the movement, as in the 
next exercise. 

67. The Slow ITpward Movement (No. 3). Wrist 
]jractice. — Having completely mastered the two previous 
exercises as there given, let the gpnnast, now that his 
elbows are below the bars, let the body drop, by straight- 
ening the arms, as low as possible (fig. 85) ; should there 
not be room enough for his legs, they may be either ex- 



FiG. 84. 




Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



171 



Fig. 85. 



tended out in front, or else bent underneatli at the knees ; 
in either case, tliey must on no account toncli the ground. 
Every movement in 
these three exercises, 
which though when 
combined form but one, 
should be done as slowly 
as possible ; the gym- 
nast will therefore be 
now requu^ed to bring 
the whole of the muscles 
of his arms and wrists 
into use to raise his 
body up again, and some 
shght assistance in the 
way of a gentle hft 
under the armpits, at 
first, may be the means 
of his overcoming the 
dif&culty much sooner 
than it otherwise would 
be, or at least until he 
attains the position de- 
scribed in the last exercise, which, in returning, is the 
turning point of the whole, and when so completely 
master of it as to be able to raise and lower himself 
with ease, he would do well, as a brilhant finish, first to 
achieve 'La Planche,' page 166, then raise himself up 
into a hand balance (Ex. 57, page 165). Either or both 
would be very appropriate. 

The gymnast cannot fail to observe, that in performing 
this and the two previous exercises, the main strength 




172 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



must be in the wrists, and that, as in the second and 
third moYements, that of lowering the elbows and body 
below the bars, they are so bent over the ends, as before 
stated, that the body, as it were, seems to hang from 
them, although the hands are still grasping them. 

These exercises must be perseveringly practised until 
able to lower the body as required, viz. slowly and 
steadily, or they will never be accomplished as they 
ought to be, for it will not do to let it be done by sudden 
movements, as that will not only wholly destroy its 
eflPect as an exercise on the whole, but it ^vill do the 
gymnast no good in thus performing it, though the 
body will of necessity drop somewhat suddenly at first, 
but by constant perseverance the difficulty will, if 
there be any muscle at all in the arms of the performer, 
be soon overcome ; therefore bear in mind, that the 
slower it is done, the more graceful and difficult will it 
appear. 

Instead of first lowering the body as above stated, and 
then raising it, the gymnast may reverse it by first 
hanging down from the ends of the bars, and then, with- 
out lowering the body at all, he can, as a variation, 
achieve the two exercises before referred to. 

68. Pumping Movement (No. 2). Gomijetition prac- 
tice. — Mount between the bars in the middle of them, 
the movements required being very similar to those given 
in Ex. 34, page 149, but here the gymnast must swing 
and sink on the legs rising up in front, raising the body 
again directly, by straightening the arms, on the legs 
going in the backward swing, when the body and legs 
must be well raised behind, like that shown in fig. 73, 
then let the body drop without bending the arms until 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 



173 



tlie legs rise up in front again, wlien the exercise is to be 
repeated in all three times. 

Having accomphshed the above, he noTv proceeds with 
the second part of the exercise, viz. continue the swing, 
and sinking the body on the legs droj)ping from behind ; 
streng-thening the arms again on their being carried up 
in front (Ex. 33, page 148), which must here be done 
as high as possible, when, giving the body a backward 
swing, the exercise can be continued as before, viz. three 
times. 

This is a very tedious and diflB.cult exercise to begin- 
ners, OT^dng chiefly to the hands not having to shift their 
position, as in the former exercise, but it is nevertheless 
an exceedingly good one, and is frequently given as a set 
exercise to test the capabihties of gymnasts in competi- 
tions, or otherwise achieved by the gymnasts themselves 
when exercising for style or neatness of j^erformance, for 
it will look nothing unless the legs are carried well above 
the head, either back or front, and the body sunk well 
each time. 

69. Wrist, Arm, and Muscle Practice. — Mount be- 
tween the bars, and sink as in the Rise and Fall exercise, 
page 142, then, by straightening the arms as much as 
you can, lower the body below them, tu.rning it on one 
side (the right first), letting go with the left hand, but 
without removing it from the bar ; this will allow the 
hand to be over on the bar, when regTasp it, and, sinking 
the body still lower, bring the body over as in Ex. 21, 
page 140. As in the last, the difficult part is to follow, 
viz. to bring the body back again, and by again rolling 
the hand, only the reverse way, raise the body above the 
bars again into its former position. 



174 



Exercises on the Parallel Bars, 



This Trill be found to be a veiy tedious, difficult, and 
trying exercise tbi^ougliout, the chief difficultv lying, 
not in lowering the body, or carrying it over and back 
again, but in keephig the wrist of the left arm on the 
bar the whole of the time, and on no account allovrino- 
it to be lifted from, or shp off the bar, while turning 
the hand over either vray. Perseverance and patience 
are the essentials required for a gymnast to become 
master of this most difficult exercise ; and when able to do 
it as above, let it be repeated with the other arm. 

70. The Slow Upward Movement (No. 4). Wrist 
irradice. — The gymnast must mount in the middle of the 
bars, and proceed slowly to carry Exercises 65. 66, and 67. 
pages 169 and 170, into effect. If preferred, he may prac- 
tise each division, as in the aforesaid exercises, in the 
order they are placed. This will enable him to understand 
the required movements of the arms and hands better, as 
he will soon find that, although the exercise itself is the 
same, the execution of it will be more difficult, as the 
difference in the position of the hands will cause the 
gymnast to bend his elbows closer to his sides, while 
lowering his body between the bars ; besides which, his 
hands being then tu:'^ned out, his wrists will be likewise 
turned out, as well as do^vn. This evil may be in part 
remedied by his bringing his hands ujd on the top of the 
bars (fig. 84) as the body is lowered, carrying them over 
on the outside as his body is again raised, therebv o-ettino' 
a greater ^Dtuxhase to bring the elbows up on assuming his 
original position. This exercise needs but a Httle prac- 
tice, if the previous ones can be achieved easilv. 



The Rings. 



175 



THE EINGS. 

RemarJ:s. — The advantage wliicli this apparatus has 
over the two previous ones is that, from its being sus- 
pended from the ceiling, it can be used ahnost every- 
where, even in a passage about thi^e feet wide, room to 
swing to and fro being the chief requisite. There is 
scarcely a part of the body, from the hands to the feet, 
that is not brought into use by practising upon the Rings, 
and the exhilarating effects of being carried backward 
and forward in the swing being so well known to every 
one, what must therefore be the additional benefits to 
be derived fi^om suspending the body by the hands while 
being thus swayed to and fi^ol Though the exercises 
are not so various upon the Rings as upon the Trapeze, 
still gymnasts will be generally found practising upon 
them oftener ; though why that should be I know not, 
as, for my own part, I am more partial to the Trapeze 
than the Rings. 

Desceiptiox of Appaeatus. — The rings are suspended 
by a rope (see page 7) from the ceiling, of a sufficient 
lengi:h to enable the gymnast to grasp it easily, ^vith his 
arms upstretched. The rings may be made to work in 
small rings at the bottom of the ropes, or else con- 
structed after the manner of a swivel as in fig. 86, and 
if preferred, and this would allow of the rings being 



176 



Tlie Rings 



Fig. 86. 



removed vrhen required to use tlie trapeze in the same 
place ^vitliout removing tlie ropes, spring liooks may be 
fixed at tlie bottom of tliem (fig. 86). and this Trould 
efi'ect a sa^ung in the original cost, 
as one pair of ropes Trould then 
sufiice. The shape of the rings must 
not be forgotten. The most com- 
fortable to the hands are those called 
the stu^rup sha^De (vide fig. 86). 
though many prefer them to be per- 
fectly round. The size of the former 
may be about foiu^ inches and a half 
internal diameter.and about as deep. 
\ Trhile the diameter of the latter are 
generally about six inches. The 
price of those shown in the illustration Trill be about l-:'>. : 
if covered -with leather, a few shillings more. Though 
they are higher in 23rice than the plain hand rings, they 
are to be preferred, as they are the most improved shape. 
The price of the ropes would depend upon theh^ size and 
length. The hooks to hang them from must not be 
forgotten, but the whole complete would not cost more 
than dOs.. or about 1/. for the plain rings. 





• EXERCISES OX THE HIXCxS. 

1. The Barber's Curl (No. 1). S/'^^'7.7... ^ryisf. and 
muscle j^irfirfice. — It Trill be unnecessary to repeat the 
description of this exercise, as it has been already given 
in Xo. 21, Y^.g^^ I40. the only difference between the 
two being, that in this the rings are grasped instead of 
the bars in the other ; added to which, the hability of the 



Exercises on the Rings. 



177 



ropes to sway to and fro ; tliev must therefore be kept 
perfectly steady while achieving it. Bring up the legs 
as before (fig. 87), and if done as it ought to be, the body 

should be lowered so as to let 
it and the arms be nearly as 
straight as they were before 
starting, though it will be 
somewhat more difficult to 
bring the body back again. 
But a little assistance, by hav- 
ing a hand placed under each 
foot, and only having the body 
raised as much as needed, will 
cause that difficulty to be soon 
overcome, especially if the 
body be kept well bent at the 
hips on returning, practice 
being the thing mostly re- 
quired. 

Quick movement. — Grasp the 
rings, one in each hand, as in the last, and carry up the 
legs as therein stated, only in this it must be done as 
quickly as possible, and on the feet coming over, and the 
body dropping, let go the ropes suddenly, and you will 
ahght on your feet on the ground. But, just for the first 
time only, the lungers may be used, for if the gymnast 
will but exert himself in bringing up his legs as required, 
he will find that, difficult as it may seem, especially to 
beginners, there is not one more simple when accom- 
plished ; therefore, the quicker it is done the more hkely 
is he to succeed, the chief point being to let go the rings 




178 



Exercises on the Rings. 



just as tlie legs are dro]D23nig ; the exact time will soon be 
learnt. 

3. Simplicity (No. 2). Quick movement, — This exer- 
cise, thouo'h somewhat similar to that last described, will 
be found to be a little more difficult to achieve. Grasp 

the rings, as therein stated, 
and in bringing the legs over, 
open them so as to pass one 
on either side of them, at the 
same time bringing the hands 
closer together (see fig. 88) ; 
then, when nearly over, let go 
the rings and alight on the 
ground. It may likewise be 
done with' one ring only, when 
both hands must be in the 
same ring, the other being held 
on one side while efiecting 
it ; but either must be done 
quickly, to succeed. 

4. The Everlasting Ciirl. Qnkh movement. — Proceed 
as in the last exercise, and on carrying the legs over let 
the feet touch the ground ; this t^t.11 give a twist to the 
ropes, when give a slight spring forward and upward, 
and repeat the exercise as often as wished, touching the 
ground every time the body is carried over. The exercise 
should likewise be practised backward, which, by thus 
reversing the motion of the body, will enable the pupil to 
wear away the giddiness he is likely to feel if he achieves 
it in the forward swing several times without stopping. 

The rings must not be let go until the gymnast has 
finished, but allowed to turn round as many times as the 




Exercises on the Rings, 



179 



exercise is repeated. (See description of Apparatus,, 
page 175.) 

5. The Socket. Slioidder irractice. — This exercise differs 
from the last, inasmuch, as the feet must not touch the 
ground while achieving it, and ere that can be allowed 
the gymnast vnR have to undergo a verv severe punish- 
ment, which I shall not here attempt to describe, but will 
leave him to proceed as before, and, on the feet coming 
down, spread the arms a little, one at a time, when he 
will find that the j will seem to come out of theu^ sockets : 
but heed it not, for this exercise, when done three or four 
times without stopping, will give extra freeness in their 
use, and hkewise gTcater satisfaction to any one wno may 
see it done. 

In doing this exercise, say thi^ee or four times without 
stopping, the feet are not to touch the ground, under any 
pretence whatever ; and when able to do it without feeling 
the least unpleasant sensation, I will leave the young- 
gymnast to judge of the injuries or benefits obtained by 
the practising of it. 

6. The Reverse Socket. — Grasp the rings as before, 
and hang so as not to let the feet touch the ground, then, 
by leaning the head and carrying the chest a little for- 
ward, and by giving a backward twist of the arm at the 
shoulder, allow the body to assume the position it attains 
on achieving the Barber's Curl (Ex. 1, page 176) after the 
body has been carried over, and dropped as low as pos- 
sible. Having accomplished this (to beginners) difficulty, 
raise the body backwards, bending it at the hi]DS, and 
allow it to assume its original position as at starting, when 
the exercise may be repeated as often as convenient. 

7. The Socket practice. — Hang by the hands, as in the 



180 



Exercises on the Rings, 



last exercise, and execute tlie Reverse Socket ; but, instead 
of carrying the body up as there stated, let it return to 
its original position by effecting the previous exercise 
(1^0. 5), which might be done forward and backward 
four or five times in succession, but slowly, concluding 
with some brilliant and graceful achievement. 

8. The Letter L (No. 1). Leg lomdlce. — This exercise 
being already described in ISTo. 
22, page 141, it will be unne- 
cessary to repeat it here, the 
only difference being that the 
hands grasp the rings instead 
of the bars. 

9. To Truss a Fowl. Sioine 
lomdice. — This exercise has 
been previously described in 
Ex. 17, page 39, and only 
differs from it in one respect, 
viz. that the toes, in heu of 
being placed against the bar, 
are hitched in the rings with 
the hands. 

The gymnast, whilst accom- 
plishing this feat, should get 
a little boy to suspend himself 
by his arms around his waist, 
which will test the strengiih 
of his grasp, and with what 
surety he can hang to any- 
thing Witt his toes. He should 
then increase the weight until able to bear one of his 
own size. 




Exercises on the Rings, 



181 



10. The Lift (No. 1). Shoulder and icrist irradice ; 
quick movement. — Grasp tlie rings and throw np tlie legs 
as before, but in so doing straighten them and keep them 
upright between the ropes without allowing them to 
touch, and letting them and the body be perfectly straight 
(see fig. 89). While in this inverted position pull your- 
self up as far as possible, and let your body fall by sud- 
denly straightening your -^^^^ 

arms, but still keeping the 
legs and body in the same 
position. 

This is a good exercise 
to practise, as it not only 
tends to ensure the gym- 
nast a firm and strong 
grasp, but likewise 
strengthens the shoulders 
and wrists very materially. 
It may likewise be accom- 
plished slowly, as in the 
Rise and Fall (Ex. 9, page 
35), and it would be to 
the benefit of the gymnast 
were he to practise it both 
ways alternately. 

11. The Stretch (No. 1). 
Arm and muscle ]jractice, ^ // 
— After rising as high as 
possible, as in Ex. 9, page 
35, bring one hand to the 
front and stretch the other 
out (see fig. 90). The ring in the front must be grasped 




7 



182 



Exercises on the Rings. 



firmly, wliilst tlie otlier is kept in the required position 
by tlie open liand, as seen in fig. 90, the fingers being ex- 
tended, and tbe whole strain falling on tlie hollow of the 
and. This should be done with both hands alternately, 
and the legs should, in the meanwhile, be kept perfectly 
straight. 

To make this exercise more difficult, the hand in fi^ont 
Fig. 91. 




may be carried more towards the shoulder, thus : the left 
hand towards the left, and the right towards the right, 



Exercises on the Rings. 



183 



and this should be so practised tliat after a time the 
gymnast can sustain himself as in fig. 91, where both 
arms are extended at the sides. (See the next exercise.) 

12. The Stretch (No. 2). — Rise above the rings with 
straight arms bj any method preferred, then, gTasping the 
rings firmly, or opening the hands as in the last, gradually 
lower the body by carrying them from the sides, and 
practise it until able to suspend the body with the arms 
perfectly straight, one with the other, as in fig. 91. This 
being decidedly the better method of doing it, it should 
be well i^ersevered in until all difficulty be OYercome, 
as it tends to show the streng*th of the muscle, more 
especially if the arms be bare up to the shoulder. 

This exercise has ever been well received at every 
festival and assault- at- arms the author has attended, and 
the lucky gymnast * gets no more than his due of the 
applause that has always followed his exertions in folly 
achieving the above. 

13. Arm Practice (No. 2). — Rise sufficiently high to 
enable you to pass the fore- arms through the rings, letting 
them go ^vith the hands, and stretching them out at 
the side, thereby resting solely on them, which should 
be about half-way between the elbows and the wi^ists. 

This exercise may be varied by its being jDerformed 
after the body has been brought into a good saving. 

14. The Change. Wyist and muscle jjradice. — Raise 
the body as in the Rise and Fall (Ex. 9, page 35), then, 
bringing the r/^Af-hand ring a little in front, let go with 

Size of muscle of right arm, extended. 13| iuclies, bent to 
shoulder, 14|-incli. Size of muscle of left, extended, 13 J inch., bent to 
shoulder, 14| inch. The height of this gymnast was 5 ft. 4| incli., 
weight 8 St. 8 lbs. 



]84 



Exercises on the Rings. 



Fig. 92. 



tlie left liancl. and di^opping tlie arm down hj the side, 
keep Tom^self suspended for a sliort time with tlie rigJif ; 
tlien, grasping the other ring with the left hand, let go 
with the riglit. and repeat the exercise, changing the 
hands as often as convenient. This exercise beino- of 

o 

gTeat benefit to the wrists and muscles of the arms, 
should be well persevered in. 

15. To Momit between the Ropes (No. 1). Hang bv 
the hands as last described, pull 
the body up, and at the same 
time bring up the legs straight 
in front, as high as possible, 
then, with a sudden jerk, carry 
them down, as described in Ex. 
58, page 66, at the same time 
1 carrying the elbows well above 
the rings (fig. 92), and rise im- 
mediately by straightening the 
arms . 

This is an exercise that should 
be continually practised until 
able to do it neatly. (See also 
Ex. 57, page 65.) 

16. To Mount between the 
Ropes (No. 2). 2l7A$cIe jjradice. 
— Hang by the hands, letting 
them be well over the rings, 
which are not to Joe merely 
gTasped, and by main strength 
bring the elbows up as in the 
last exercise, but without the 
jerk. (See Ex. 52, page 63.) 




Exercises on the Rings, 



185 



The young gymnast would do well to practise this 
exercise with the right arm first, bringing the left one up 
after ; practising this until able to accomphsh it easily. 
When this can be done, the left arm should be the first 
to be brought up, and the exercise persevered in until 
both can be brought up at once as required. 

17. To Rise and Fall (No. 1). Muscle practice. — 
Grasp the rings, spring up and carry the elbows well up, 
throw the head well forward, the chest and chin out, and 
bending the body a little, carry the legs a little back, when 
achieve the Rise and Fall above the rings as often as con- 
venient ; the slower and more graceful all such exercises 
are done the better. The hands must be kept close to 
the side the whole of the time. This exercise is like that 
achieved on the parallel bars in page 142. 

18. The Letter L (No. 2). Leg and muscle ^practice. — 
Achieve the last exercise, and proceed according to the 
several methods of going through with this exercise, as 
stated in Ex. 22, page 141, the only difierence being in the 
position of the hands ; it should, nevertheless, be well 
practised and persevered in. 

19. The Stretch (No. 3). Arm and muscle jpractice. — 
Proceed as in Ex. 16, page 184, and when the elbows are 
well up and the arms bent, stretch the right arm gradually 
out at the side as before, allowing the thumb to be un- 
derneath ; then, on bringing the right arm back, stretch 
out the left in Hke manner, and repeat the exercise with 
each arm alternately, at least two or three times. The 
hand of the bent arm must be kept close to the side while 
effecting the stretch with the other. 

20. The Swing (No. 1). — In swinging with the rings 
the ropes are sure to sway to and fro with the body, and 



186 



Exercises on the Rings, 



in thus swinging tlie reqnii^ed iinjDetus must be given at 
tlie right time, otherwise a check will occui^, and the ropes 
will be almost brought to a stand- still, for, in swinging, 
the impetus is given to raise the body higher than it was 
before, until the arms and legs are brought nearly into a 
horizontal position (fig. 93), when it is the aim of the 
gymnast to retain himself at that height, for, were he 
but to sway to and fro ^vith the mere weight of the body, 




like the pendulum of a clock, he would soon find himself 
getting lower and lower, until the ropes would become 
perfectly still. 

The swing is performed by drawing the body up, on 
ascending, either in the forward or backward saving, and 
lowering it rather quickly (not with a jerk) on the body 
returning, which, if done at the right time, will cause the 
body gradually to rise higher and higher until the requii^ed 
height is obtained. (See Ex. 9, page 35.) 

This method of swinging is generally made use of when 



Exercises on the Rings. 187 



tlie rings are liigli enough, from the ground to prevent 
the gymnast from touching it when hanging by his hands 
at arm's length; but should they be low enough to 
enable them to be gTasped easily, the saving may be then 
obtained by running along at first, and giving a shght 
spring from both feet alternately every opportunity, 
either in the forward or backward swing, until the 
required height be obtained. 

As the body should be brought into various ^Dositions 
during the swing, both for practice and their utility in 
strengthening the muscles, several of the following exer- 
cises may be performed. 

21. The Swing (No. 2). — Proceed as described in 

the last exercise, 
and when the 
body is suffici- 
ently high bring 
the legs up be- 
tween the arms, 
as in the Bar- 
ber's Cui^l(Ex. 1, 
page 176), keep- 
ing them per- 
fectly straight 
(fig. 94), and 
returning them 
to their original 
position at the 
other end of the 
swing, which motion, if done at the right time, will 
somewhat keep up the swing instead of checking it ; but, 
were the legs to be kept in one position, the momentum 




188 



EcVercises on the Rings, 



would be for the time lost (see tlie next exercise) ; yet the 
gymnast might to some advantage retain the legs thus, 
and swing to and fro a few times without lowering them. 

22. The Swing (No. 3). — Proceed as last described, 
and in bringing the legs np carry them over as far as 
possible, somewhat hke fig. 22, ^^age 41, but the body must 
be almost straio-ht with the arms and lee's, when the 
gpnnast may be allowed to swing to and fro a few times 
without changing his position. 

23. The Swing (No. 4). — Proceed as before described, 
and on bringing the legs up carry the body also up. 
keeping the legs between the ropes perfectly upright, and 
the head straight down, as in fig. 89. To keep the body 
in this position during the swing, without losing your 
balance, "v^t.11 require but httle practice, but it will tend 
to strengthen the muscles as well as to make the gymnast 
keep a firmer hold of the rings. 

21 Simplicity (No. 3). Quich movement. — TThen fully 
competent to achieve the foregoing exercise (Xo. 2, page 
177), without any fear of not alighting on the feet in a 
proper manner, the gymnast may get the body in fall 
swing, as in Ex. 20, j)age 185, and then in the forward 
swing, when httle more than half-way, bring up the legs 
as before, and proceed according to the instructions jDre- 
viously given, as the achievement of this exercise, with 
the exception of the addition of the swing, is precisely 
the same. 

25. To Mount between the Eopes in the Swing.— 

Hang by the hands and commence swinging, and when 
the body is high in the forward swing, j)roceed as in Ex. 
15, page 184, by bringing the legs up just before, and 
continuing the exercise immediately the body attains its 



Exercises on the Rings, 



189 



higliest, remaining in tliat position in tlie backward 
swing until nearing tlie opposite end, wlien the body may 
be di'opped, carrying it off a little to keep up the saving, 
and repeating tlie exercise as often as convenient. 

26. The Swing (No. 5). — Proceed as described in the 
last exercises, and when in a good swing bring the elbows 
up, as in Ex. 16, page 184, and let the body swing to and 
fro while in that position (fig. 95). The gymnast must not 



YiG. 95. 




mind this position at first, as, after a httle practice, he 
will soon get used to it. On reference to the engraving, 
it will be seen that the head is carried forward, the chin 
and chest are well out, and the hands close to the side. 

27. The Swing (No. 6). — When in a good swing 
mount between the ropes, as in Ex. 16, page 184, and, 
keeping the hands close to the sides, the arms being but 
sHghtly bent, allow the body to swing to and fro a few 
times. 

The only variation which this position admits of is, 



190 



Exercises on the Rings, 



tliat in tlie backward swing tlie head is carried well in 
front and tlie legs straight back to counteract the balance, 




brought well up in front (fig. 97), returning them to 
their former position at the end of the swing. 



Exercises on the Rings, 191 



28. The Barber's Curl (No. 2). SJwitlder, irrist, and 
miiscle lyradice. — Tliis is notliing more than eflPecting Ex. 
1, page 176. While in the swing, the legs must be brought 
up and carried over at the end of the forward, and brought 
back again at the turn of the backward s^^Ting, and it 
should be well practised, as the strain upon the shoulders 
is considerably more after the body is carried over than 
in the former exercise, and consequently that part is so 
much the more benefited thereby. 

29. The Socket in the Swing. — Get the ropes into a 
good swing, the higher the better, then achieve the exer- 
cises as follow : — 

1st. Execute the Socket described in N^o. 5, after every 
hackward swing, just as you arrive at the turn. 

2nd. Go through the same exercise at 'the end of the 
forvjard swing, in the same manner. 

3rd. Repeat the above at the turn, in both the hackivard 
and fonoard saving. 

4th. Accomphsh the Reverse Socket, ]^o. 6, in the hacJc- 
ivard swing, bringing the body over while returning. 

5th. Do the same exercise in \h.Q foriuard swing. 

6th. Bring the last two exercises about in both the 
hachward smd forivard swing. 

7th. Achieve the Reverse Socket in the hackivard, swing 
without bringing the legs over, returning to your former 
position at the opposite end of the swing. 

8th. Execute the same in the forward swing. 

9th. Carry the above into eflPect alternately ; thus : ac- 
complish the Socket in \hQforivard swing, and the Reverse 
Socket in the hachivard swing. 

Care must be taken to give the motion to the body at 
the right time, or a check in the swing will be the con- 



192 



Exercises on the Rings. 



sequence, wMcli will in part destroy the desired effect in 
accomplisliing tlie above. 

30. The Barber's Curl (No. 3). Arm practice. — Bring 
the elbows np, as described in Ex. 16, page 184, and do 
the Barber's Curl, dropping the body as soon as it is 
brought over, and carrying the elbows up again as quickly 
as possible, repeating the exercise three or four times. 

31. The Barber's Curl (No. 4). Arm ^practice. — Pro- 
ceed as described in Ex. 18, page 183, and fold the arms 



Fig. 98. 




across in front, gTasping each firmly by the hands. The 
rams must now rest on the rings just below the elbows. 



Exercises on the Rings, 



193 



Now do the Barber's Curl, or rather cu-cle the bar, 
jour arms being in the place of the bar, and on the body 
coming over, let go with the hands, stretch the arms out, 
and allow yourself to hang bj the bend of the arm, or 
repeat the exercise a few times prior to the above finish. 

32. The Revolver. Toe, icrist, and muscle exercise. — 
Grasp the rings, one in each hand, throw the legs up 
and hitch one (left) foot in the left-hand ring, and in so 
doing let go your hold of that ring, and grasp the other 
rope with that hand (the left), 
carrying the other (right) leg over, 
and allow it to hang as in fig. 98, 
taking care that, on carrying the 
leg over as just described, the (left) 
foot does not shp out of the loop, 
which is prevented by keeping the 
toes well bent over the rino-. 

xS'ow with both hands grasjDing 
the one rope, and one foot in the 
other, pull yourself up by moving 
the hands alternately, and when u]d a 
sufB-cient height, place the other foot 
(right) in the spare loop, and grasp 
a rope with each hand, when cross 
the feet one over the other and keep 
them together, then, passing the 
arms to the front, grasp the ropes 
about the height of the hips, in the 
manner shown in fig. 99. Xow lean 
forward, and, by bending the arms, 
raise the body and legs gTadually up behind, and you 
will turn completely over. If the ropes be held firmly, 






194 



Exercises on the Rings. 



and the feet kept still in the rings and crossed, there 
will be no fear of falling. 

It should be done at least three times without stopping, 
or as many more as the gymnast may feel disposed to do ; 
but the hands will have to be changed after each revolu- 
tion, by carrying the arms through to the front as before. 

33. The Turn-over (No. 2). Wrist and shoulder prac- 
tice. — E^ise between the ropes by any method preferred, 
but keep the arms bent and the elbows well up, as this 
exercise must be done prior to straightening them, then, 
keeping the hands close to the side, lean the chest for- 
ward, raise the body up, and carry the legs up behind 
and over the head, allowing the body to fall completely 
over, but the hands must still retain their hold of the 
rings ; yet, after a little practice,, have the lungers on and 
let go the ropes on the body dropping, and alight on the 
ground, which, though at first difi&cult, can be easily 
accomplished by perseverance, and • a determination to 
succeed. 

This exercise may be repeated as often as desired by 
achieving 'No. 16, page 184, between each time, to bring 
the body above the rings. It may hkewise be accom- 
plished more easily by keeping the legs straight and bend- 
ing them at the hips, instead of carrying them up over the 
body, which would, I fear, be too difficult for a beginner. 

34. The Back Horizontal (No. 1). /Sj^me and arm 
practice. — Grasp the rings, and bring up the legs as in the 
Barber's Curl, Ex. 1, page 176, but on carrying them over 
raise them up behind, when, by lowering the body, you may 
easily assume the required position, as shown in fig. 49. 

35. The Front Horizontal (No. 1). Spine and arm 
practice. — Proceed as before, achieving the last exercise or 
not, then bring the body and legs back again, as in Ex. 1, 



Exercises on the Rings, 



195 



page 176, and on the body dropping, carry the legs out 
until in tlie horizontal position shown in fig. 50, re- 
maining thus a short time, and di^opping to the ground. 

36. The Back Horizontal (No. 2). Sjmie and arm 
inactice. — Grasp the rings, and jDroceed as described in 
the Lift, Ex. 10, page 181, when gradually let the body 
fall over in the same position until it is perfectly hori- 
zontal, then, after remaining as long as convenient, endea- 
vour to return the reverse way, or else lower the body 
and drop on the gTound. 

37. The Front Horizontal (No. 2). Sinne and arm 
^practice, — Grasp the rings and carry out the instructions 
given in the Lift, as above, and then gradually lower 
the body in front until it assumes the position sho^vn in 
fig. 50, and after remaining thus a short time, drop to 
the ground. 

38. The Back Horizontal (No. 3). Sjpine and arm 

practice. — Achieve the Slow or Quick Pull up with bent 
arms, then thro^^dng the head well forward, and raising 
the legs and body up behind, slowly assume the Back 
Horizontal, remaining thus but for a short time, when 
carry the body forward, by straightening the arms, and 
let it drop suddenly as far as the arms will allow, still 
keeping in the horizontal position, and without having 
lowered it or the legs in the least during this change. 
As this exercise benefits the whole of the muscles in the 
arms and wrists, it should be frequently practised, and 
beginners should persevere in it until they succeed. 

39. The Front Horizontal (No. 3). S2nne and arm 
practice ; quich movement. — Achieve the Socket (Ex. 5, 
page 179), say six or eight times, as quickly as possible, 
then, on the legs rising up in front, drop the body sud- 

o 2 



196 



Exercises on the Eings. 



denlv, by straight ening tlie arms, and cany it and the 
legs, both simuhaneoiisly. straight out in front, thereby 
assnming the Front Horizontal, the whole being accom- 
plished very quickly, the latter change especially, the 
which, the more sudden it is bro tight about the greater 
its effect ; and, as with the last, the muscles reap theh^ 
share o£ the benefits to be derived from its being 
practised. 

40. The Back Horizontal (No. 4). Sjrrne cmd arm 
pradice. — Grasp the ropes as high above the rings as 
possible, or work the hands up them as in climbing to do 
so, and, can^}'ing the body over as in the last, achieve the 
Back Horizontal. With the exception of having to hold 
the ropes, which makes the exercise somewhat more 
difB-Cult, it is precisely the same as Ex. 39, page 194:. 

41. The Pass. Leg and liand pradice. — Hang by the 
hands and swing to and fro. and when stifficiently high 
raise the body by bending the arms, then in the foncard 
swing bring the rigJit leg tip in front, and carry it back- 
ward over the right arm, when, by letting go youi^ hold 
of the ring in your rifiM hand, allow the leg to drop into 
its place, regrasping the ring as soon as possible, which 
will be while the leg is di^o^Dping into its place. 

When able to do the exercise with the rigid lee freely, 
try it with the left, and when able to do it with that 
effectually, practise it with the right and Jeff legs 
alternately. 

42. The Twist. SJiouIder j./V7.:/.V^._This is a very 
difficult exercise both to achieve and to describe, and 
great practice is required before a beginner will be able 
to accomphsh the difficult jDart of it, as it not only tries 
the strength of the muscles of the arm, but the twist 



Exeyxises on the Ringi 



197 



given at the shoulder, and tlie difficulty found in ba- 
lancing tlie bodj evenlv, causes nianj to abandon the 
exercise as imjoossihle. But when a young gymnast bas 
once acliieyed it, be will feel a pride in doing it in the 
presence of tbose svho before deemed it imjjossible. I 
should therefore recommend patience and perseverance. 

Hang by the hands and throw the legs over ; but before 
allowing them to fall too far, give the body a twist so as 
to bring the back (the nearer to the middle of the back 
the better) against the arm towards which you turn, and 
in so doing, let go the other rope, and keep yourself sus- 
pended as long as agreeable. (See fig. 100.) 



Fig. 100. 

i 




The legs and disengaged arm must be kept extended 
as far as possible, and the body must inchne a httle 
backward, so as to rest on the arm more securely. 

When thoroughly master of the above, it would be well 
for the gymnast gradually to let the body faU forward, 
and endeavour, by making fall use of his muscles, to 



198 



Erercists on the Rings, 



lower it into a horizontal position Avitliont any seeming 
trouble or exemon. 

43. The Jerk. Splm^ shoulder, and imst p-adice. — 
Grosp ^h-? r one in eitlier liand. and throw the right 
leg over the right ai^ni (as in fig. 101). or the left leg 
over the left aiTQ. lettincr the other leg hang loosely in 



Pig. 101. 




front. Xow. with a sudden jerk, at the same time ex- 
tending: the disengaged arm a httle. thro'W the body 
forward ^dth as gTeat an impetus as possible, when you 
^dll ruim completely over, and in so doing you must not 
let cfo Toui^ hold, neither must the lea* sliio cu the ann. 



Exercises on fJie Rings, 



199 



This is a very difficult exercise, and reqnii-es great 
nerve and practice for it, 

44. The Barber's Curl (No. 5). Muscle p-adke ; slovj 
movemedt. — Grasp tlie ring^ with, the hands well over, 
and pull the body np very slowly, then raise the legs up 
straight and carry the body over similar to the Barber's 
Curl (Ex. 1, page 176). Now for the difficulty. On the 
body going over, and the legs dropping, with the arms 
still bent, by the sole aid of the muscles and wrists, bring 
the elbows well above the rings, thereby raising the body 
above them at the time of going over, when it will assume 
the position somewhat similar to fig. 81, page 163, making 
some allowance for difference of apparatus. This exercise, 
which requires a deal of practice to achieve it well, must 
be gone through with, very slowly, the slower the better. 

45. The Lift (So. 2). Sjnne and muscle loroxtice. — 
Hang by the hands, rise as in the last, and carry the 
whole of the body above the rings, opening the legs so 
as to allow the insteps to rest against the ropes. When 
in this position the elbows ought to be well up, and the 
hands on a line with and close to the shoulders. The 
body should be well bent back, forming a semicii^le, to 
facilitate its achievement ; in fact, when able to accom- 
pHsh this feat to perfection (and it is one that always 
calls for praise whenever it is well and neatly done), the 
farther the arms are carried away from the body in any 
respect, the more difficult will the exercise be and appear. 
It requires continual practice to overcome it. 

Now slowly rise by straightening the arms, carrying 
the feet gradually up the ropes at the same time, until 
they are as high as they can reach ; after remaining a 
short time, as gradually sink down again. Owing to the 

*o4 



200 



Exercises on the Rings, 



difficulty of acldeYing this exercise, it will not be well to 
overstrain the muscles in attempting to do it more than 
twice, or thi^ee times at the outside. A good finish to 
this exercise would be for the gymnast to drop into the 
Front Horizontal below the rings, but it will give the 
arms a good strain in doing it. 

To bring the body up as here requited, the gymnast 
may first mount as in Ex. 16, page 184^ then, leaning for- 
ward, bend the body at the hips and raise it uj) behind, 
when carry the legs well up gi^adually, and hitch the toes 
round the ropes, but care must be taken that you ai^e not 
overbalanced in so doing. 

46. The Lift (No. 3). Sjnne and muscle jjractice. — 
Thouo:h this is mentioned as a difierent exercise, the 
difference consists only in the method of mounting be- 
tween the ropes and hitching the toes around them. 

This method is a combination of the last two exer- 
cises, though it is effected -much quicker. The body 
must be raised by bending the arms, when the legs are 
brought up and the body fui^ther raised, as in the last ; 
then, as soon as possible, the toes must be turned out 
and hitched against the ropes, the whole achieved as one 
simultaneous movement ; it will be found much more 
difficult to carry into effect than that mentioned in page 
199, but it only requires practice, especially after being 
able to do the last ; become master of that, and this one 
will become all the easier. Having raised the body as 
herein described, proceed with the Lift, as in the last. It 
must be borne in mind, that the toes ai^e to be hitched round 
the ropes both at once, and not one after the other, though 
at first that cannot be prevented fi'om occurring ; still the 
right thing must in all cases be the point aimed at. 



Exercises on the Rings, 



201 



47. The Lift (No. 4). Competition practice, — Mount 
between the ropes and hitch the toes round them as in 
the last exercise, and achieve the Lift tvjice,, then raise 
the body up till the arms are perfectly straight, and bring 
the hands close together, vrhen, pressing the feet firmly 
against the ropes, very gradually separate the hands, and 
allow the body to sink until the arms are perfectly hori- 
zontal, as in fig. 91, page 182. After having remained 
thus for a short time, continue to lower the body gradu- 
ally until the rings are close to the side again, the whole 
to be achieved without any sudden jerk, and the body to 
be kept in its inverted position while the latter iDart is 
being brought about. This exercise will test the strength 
of the gymnast's muscles as much as, if not more than 
any other on the rings, though the movements towards 
the end are very similar to Ex. 11, page 182, to which 
the above fig. refers. 

48. The Swing (No. 7). When in a good swing mount 
between the ropes, and, keeping the hands close to the 
sides : — 

First. — Allow the body to sink in the forward swing, 
and raise it in the backward. 

Second, — Sink the body in the backward swing, and 
raise it in the forward. 

Third. — Lower the body in the forward swing, and 
raise it again immediately, before the turn. 

Fourth. — Repeat the above in the backward swing only. 

Fifth. — Accomplish the fall and rise quickly, both in 
the backward and forward swing. 

The above movements must be achieved T^ithout 
checking the motion of the swing, as described in 
Ex. 20, page 185, 



202 



The Trapeze. 



THE TRAPEZE. 

BemarJiS. — Leotard, wlio some few years ago astonislied 
some tliousands of persons Tvitli liis performances on a 
series of these apparatus, called the * Flying Trapeze,' 
has done more to bring this apparatus into use than all 
the pre\don.s gymnasts. But it is not to the Flying 
Trapeze that I wish to call your attention, but to the 
Single Bar, now called ' The Trapeze,' though many 
exercises upon it are but variations of those achieved 
upon the fl^n^ng trapeze ; but were the latter ever likely 
to become more practised upon, it would meet with a 
ready description at my hands. The movements upon 
the rings are but to accustom the gymnast to those of 
the trapeze, and to ensure a firm and safe grasp thereon. 

It may not be out of place here to state, that a com- 
plete flying trapeze is manufactured by Messrs. Snoxell 
and Spencer, capable of being temporarily or ]Dermanently 
fixed as desired, on any grass-plot or lawn, without 
sinking the poles or uprights in the ground, and secured 
by cross pieces and wire stays and Kghtening screws, 
with two trapeze bars, ropes, steps, &c. complete. Price 
14Z. The whole of the apparatus is light, portable, and 
easily removed or put up as required. 

Description of Apparatus. — Very little need be added 
to the description already given for the rings, as the only 



The Trapeze. 



203 



clijGPerence consists in tlie bar itself (see fig. 102), which, 
ono'ht to be made in the same manner as the horizontal 
bar, with a steel core throughout, -p^^ 
and capped, &c., at the ends, as in ^ \ 
the illustration, though the core may 
be dispensed with. The price of the 
former is IZ., whilst the latter, with 
brass ends, is only 7s. 6d. Extra 
ropes will be required if the bar is 
required to be used or suspended 
in a different place to the rings. 

RemarJtS on the Exercises, — Be- 
fore proceeding with the following 
exercises, the pupil is advised to practise several 
of the exercises mentioned in the horizontal bar, in- 
cluding many of the preliminary exercises thereon, some 
of which may be achieved while the trapeze is in the 
swing. From the number of the before-mentioned exer- 
cises capable of being practised hereon, it would appear 
that there is not much difference between the horizontal 
bar and the trapeze. There is not, nor would there be, 
were it not for the swinging motion of the latter caused 
by the performance of the exercises ; but that difS.culty, 
if it be one, will be soon overcome after the young gym- 
nast has practised and learned to give the right motion 
of his body to the never-ceasing vibration of the ropes. 

The few exercises here given for this apparatus must 
not be taken as the whole capable of being carried into 
effect on it, for it must be borne in mind that at least one 
half, or perhaps more, of the exercises for the horizontal 
bar, if also mentioned under this head, would swell the 
number here given to three or four times as many more ; 




204 



Exercises on the Trapeze, 



but tlie gymnast will have quite enough, to do to carry 
all of them into effect. 

1. The Swing. — Although a description of the method 
of swinging is given in the last chajoter for the rings, 
it may not be out of place to rejDcat the instructions 
therein contained, for, as with the rings, so with the 
trapeze. The ropes are sure to sway to and fro with the 
body as much with the one as with, the other, and in thus 
swinging the required impetus must be given at the 
right time, otherwise a check will occur, and the roj)es 
will be almost brouo-ht to a standstill, for in swinoino- 
the impetus is given to raise the body higher than it was 
before, until the arms and legs are brought nearly into 
a horizontal position, wben it is the aim of the gym- 
nast to retain liimself at that height ; and were he but 
to sway to and fro with the mere weight of the body, 
like the pendulum of a clock, be would soon find himself 
getting lower and lower, until the ropes would become 
perfectly still. 

The swing is performed by drawing the body up on 
ascending, either in the forward or backward swing, and 
lowering it rather quickly (not with a jerk) on the body 
returning, which, if done at the right time, ^vill cause 
the body gradually to rise higher and higher until the 
required height is obtained. (See Ex. 9, page 35.) 

This method of swinging is made use of generally 
when the trapeze is high enough from the ground to pre- 
vent the gymnast from touching it when hanging by his 
hands at arm's length ; but should it be sufS.ciently low 
to enable it to be grasped easily, the swing may be then 
effected by running along at first, and giving a sHght 
spring from both feet alternately every opportunity. 



Exercises on the Trapeze. 



205 



either in tlie forward or backward swing, until tlie re- 
quired height be obtained. 

As the body should be brought into various positions 
during the swing, both for practice and their utility in 
strengthening the muscles, the following exercises may 
be achieved, Nos. 18, 20, 63, 66, &c., pages 40, 42, 69, 71, 
&c. ; yet, on the other hand, it must be steady during the 
performance of certain exercises, though it undoubtedly 
gives additional beauty to the swing whenever any other 
exercise is effected in the mean time. 

It would be advantageous to ease the hands occa- 
sionally on the body rising in the backward swing, as 
by so doing the exercise may be continued or repeated 
for a much longer time without the gymnast getting so 
fatigued. 

V 2. The Leg Swing. — This swing is accomplished by 
hanging by the legs, keeping the feet well towards the 
ground, and swaying the body to and fro, bringing it up 
towards the knees when going the way the face is, and 
carrying it out to look, as it were, as far as possible along 
the ground, in going backwards, the arms being made 
use of sharply during the swing. They are brought up 
in the forward, and extended with the body in the back- 
ward swing. 

To swing with the legs the gymnast must proceed 
with the last exercise to start himself, then bring the 
legs up, pass them under, and hitch them over the bar 
outside the hands, as in fig. 103, or else in bringing them 
up pass them between the hands and then over ; the body 
must then be dropped so as not to check the swing, viz. 
either at the turn from the backward swing, as in fig. 
103, or else at the turn for it at the opposite end. 



206 Exercises on the Trapeze. 



V 3. To Circle the Bar in the Swing (No. 1).— Proceed 
as described in the last exercise but one, and when you 
rise fairly in the air, in the forward swing, circle the 



swinging motion without allowing tlie feet to touch the 
ground, and circle the bar again, continuing the exercise 
as often as convenient. 

It must be borne in mind that, in doing this exercise, 
the less exertion used the better the effect, and the greater 
the impetus in throwing the body back, the more likely 
is the exercise capable of being repeated, for, if the body 
be allowed to merely drop, or if carried off at the wrong 
moment, the result will be a check in the swing, and 
consequently a failure in the exercise. There must be 
none of that merely dropping off the bar almost straight 
down, as if the exercise were finished, but rather as if 
you tried to hitch the toes on another bar behind you, 
and a little higher up than the trapeze bar. 




Fig. 103. 



bar, bringing the elbows 
between the ropes without 
touching them, by drawing 
them close to the sides ; and 
on the trapeze reaching its 
highest point in the back- 
ward saving, with a strong 
but gradual motion carry 
the body the fall length of 
the arms from the bar, a 
little upwards than other- 
wise (see fig. 26), but 
not suflB.cient to check the 
motion of the swing. On 
the body falling, give it a 



Exercises on the Trapeze, 



207 



4. To Circle the Bar in the Swing (No. 2).— Proceed as 
last described, and on bringing tlie legs over in tbe/or- 
ward swing, drop the body immediately, i.e. as soon as 
tbe ropes begin tbe hacJciuard swing, and on ascending in 
it, circle the bar and throw the body off again ^^dthout 
any rest or stoppage, and repeat the exercise ad libitum. 

This variation of the last exercise calls for greater ac- 
tivity on the part of the gymnast, as twice the amount 
of work has to be accomplished in the same amount of 
time, and in the swaying of the ropes but once ; and to 
go through this exercise will require but very little addi- 
tional practice when the last can be achieved properly. 

5. To Rise on the Bar (Upstart). The toe lyracUce. — 
Grasp the bar firmly, with the fingers well over the bar, 
and swing to and fro once, then in the forward swino^ 
bring the legs up straight, and carry them do^vn thus 
with a somewhat strong impetus, which will greatly assist 
you in executing the feat. Assisted with the strength of 
the wrists, raise yourself above the bar, when the arms 
may be straightened. (See Ex. 57, page 65.) 

In swinging, and prior to effecting the Upstart, the 
body should be raised by bending the arms, and in 
giving the croAvning termination required above, the 
wists should be |)ut to their utmost in carrying it 
through. 

V 6. To Rise on the Bar (the Slow Pull up). The elhow 
practice. — Hang on the bar with the hands well over it, 
and rise by pulhng the body up, bending the arms till 
the chest is well against it, then carry the fore-arms 
suddenly sideioays on to the har, leaning forward to 
throw the whole weight of the body on them ; but in so 
doing carry the body still higher by raising the elbows. 



208 



Exercises on the Trapeze. 



when, by bringing tbe muscles into full play, and carrying 
the legs a little forward, straighten the arms and raise 
the body up as required. (See fig. 31.) 

Practice is all that is needed in achieving this exer- 
cise, and, until able to accomplish it without, the body 
may be slightly jerked by drawing up the legs and 
carrying them down again suddenly when required to 
carry the body higher ; but when able to do it without, 
the less exertion used the neater will the exercise appear. 
It should be likewise practised in the swing, 
y 7. The Balance in the Swing. Wrist 2:)ractice. — Proceed 
as described in Ex. 1, page 204, and when the body is in 
a fair swing, bring it suddenly above the bar by Ex. 57, 
page 65, then, at the turn for the hackioard swing, carry 
the body well up, as in Ex. 64, page 69. The momentum 
of the swing will greatly assist you in raising the body, 
but on the body attaining its required position the bar 
must be firmly grasped, and the muscles of the arms 
brought into full use to steady the body, more especially 
when the body returns in the then hackwarcl swing, which 
would be the forwclrd swing were the body not raised 
above the bar, as the swing has now a tendency to cause 
the body to overbalance, and it is to prevent this that 
the gymnast must exercise his full powers. 

This is a very difficult exercise, and the g^^mnast 
would do well to practise it at first with but a slight 
motion of the ropes ; yet, when able to accomplish it to 
perfection, it is a very clever achievement. 

The arms must be kept perfectly straight and not too 
close together, and the body must be well bent, the legs 
so bent as to counterbalance the different motions of the 
swing. 



Exercises on the Trapeze. 



209 



8. The Turn. Arm and ■yyrist jjradice. — Circle the 
bar and sit on it, place the right hand on it with the 
fingers backwards and the thumb in front, close to the 
right-hand rope, which must be grasped with the left 
hand about the height of the shoulder (see fig. 104), then 
throw the weight of the body 
upon the right arm, by lifting- 
it off the bar, and carrying- 
it round the right-hand rope, 
raise the legs over the bar, and 
resume your position upon it. 
[N'ow repeat the exercise with 
the left-hand rope, when the 
left hand will grasp the bar, 
and the right hand the rope. 

In carrying the body round, 
the legs should be well lifted 
up, and the hand grasping 
the bar should turn it towards 
the legs to enable them to 
be carried over a little sooner 
than they otherwise would be, 
thereby likewise relieving the 
arm of the weight of the body. 

9. To Stand on the Bar (Mo, 1). — First mount and 
sit on the bar, then grasp the ropes as high as possible, 
and with a gradual motion similar to the Rise and 
Fall exercise, page 35, pull yourself up until, by bending 
the legs a little if needed, you can place the feet on it ; 
the hands can then be placed a little higher for ease, or 
the gymnast may proceed with the next exercise. 

10. To Stand on the Bar (¥0. 2). Balancing jprac- 




210 



Exercises on the Trapeze, 



ties. — Turn the body sideways and grasp the rope in front 
with both hands, then, placing both feet, one in advance 
of the other, straight on the bar, stand perfectly upright, 
and when the ropes are steady, gradually let go your 
hold and stand thus for a short time. Until able to 
do so with confidence, it would be as well to keep the 
hands at a little distance only from the rope on each 
side ; but after a tune the gymnast will be able either 
to stretch his arms out at the side, or fold them across 
the chest. 

This exercise is varied in 
many ways ; for instance, 
standing on one leg ; achiev- 
ing the balance on both or one 
leg only while swinging as in 
the ordinary way, or to and 
fro sideways, which latter 
may be effected before the 
balance, or either position of 
the balance may be achieved 
and the swinging motion 
given afterwards, &c. ; but 
these movements must be at- 
tempted by none but practised 
gymnasts. 

11. To Stand at Ease.— 
Having stood upon the bar, 
as in the last, turn your back 
against one of the ropes, with 
the feet on the bar, as in 
fig. 105, and when perfectly 
steady, fold the arms across 




Exercises on the Trapeze, 



211 



the cliest. Do tliis sometimes against one rope, some- 
times against tlie otlier, and do not always keep the 
same foot in front. 

The feet may be placed as in fig. 105, or the front foot 
may be slided forward, so as to rest the hollow of it 
against the bottom of the rope, and the other laid across 
it, as when sitting in a chair a person stretches out his 
legs for ease and comfort. 

12. The Overthrow. Arm and ivrist pxidice, — Stand 
on the bar and grasp the ropes 
firmly, as shown in fig. 106, 
by which it will be seen that 
the knuckles are in front, and 
the thumbs downwards ; the 
elbows may be a little up, but 
the hands should be as high 
as the hips. Then, by leaning- 
forward and downward, and 
Hfting yoiu^ feet ofp the bar, 
allow yourself to turn cj[uite 
over, when you may either 
alight on the bar in the sit- 
ting posture, or ^^lace your 
feet on it again. The latter 
you will be able to do if your 
hands be high enough before 
you turn over; and should 
the gymnast wish to return to 
his original position, he must 
not move his hands from the 
ropes, when all he will have to do will be, to reverse 
the motion of the body, which will at first be a little 

p 2 




212 Exercises on the Trapeze. 



EiG. 107. 



more difficult. Or, if it be liis wish to achieve the reverse 
portion of the exercise only when sitting on the bar, it 
will be advisable for him to notice the position of the 
arms and hands, after having accomplished the above. 

13. The Rest. Spine iwactice. — Sit on the bar, and 

grasping the ropes about 
level with the shoulders, 
slide down until low enough 
to rest the back of the neck 
against the bar, when 
throw the legs well up, and 
bending the body a little 
at the hips, rest the feet 
against the ropes (see fig. 
107). The hands may now 
be folded across the chest, 
or placed as shown in the 
illustration. 

This being merely an 
exercise for the spine, care 
should be taken in doing 
it, and the hands should 
be ever ready to grasp the 
ropes, in the event of a 
slij), which will not happen 
if the gymnast balances 
himself properly. 

14. The Catch (No. 1). Instep practice. — Hang by 
the legs, then by opening them wide, and lifting the 
feet up, at the same time turning the toes well out, and 
keeping the heels well down, allow yourself to slide off 
the bar, when the feet will be as shown in fig. 108. 




Exercises on the Trapeze. 



213 



After haying remained in tliat position for a short time, 
pull the body up, and grasp the bar, when, unhitching 
the feet, achieve some other exercise as a finish to the 
above (see the next exer- 
cise). This exercise is very Fig. 108. 
useful, in the event of a 
slip at any time, and the 
gymnast should always be 
prepared to carry it into 
eflPect when required. 

15. The Catch (No. 2). 
Instejy practice. — Sit on 
the bar, and after getting 
it to swings to and fro well, 
let go the ropes, and throw 
yourself back in the back- 
ward swing, in such a man- 
ner that by the time the 
body has descended as far 
as practicable, the swing 
will return the other way; 
but in so doing, turn the 
toes well out, and keep the 
heels well down, then by 
opening the legs wide, the 
toes will hitch round the 
ropes, as shown in the last 
exercise (see fig. 108), and 
when in that position let 
the body sway to and fro a few times ; then raise it up, 
and unhitching the feet, achieve as before some other 
exercise for a finish. 




214 



Exercises on the Trapeze, 



V 16. The Back Horizontal. Sjjine and raiisde irraxtice. — 
Mount and sit on the bar, pass tlie liands as liigli up the 
ropes as iDossible, grasping them firmly, then bring the 
bodynp, as in Ex. 1, page 176, and achieve the Back Hori- 
zontal, which Trill be found to be a Httle more difficult, 
owing to the hands having to grasp the ropes, Trhich, 
being pliable. jDress more upon the hands. 

17. The Leap, — After s^nnging to and fro, as in 
Ex. 1, page 176, and vrhen you think yourself sufficiently 
high from the ground, let go your hold of the bar, 
either in the backward or forward swing, and ahght on 
the ground, letting the toes bear the weight of the body, 
and not the heels, as that always gives a very great 
shock to the system. It should be practised with a very 
slight swino' at first, as the position of the body is not 
the same on alighting in the forward as in the backward 
swing, and after a little iDractice the gymnast may try 
how far he can leap from the bar, as the higher he 
swings the farther will he be able to leap. Practice will 
be the best insti^uctor as to the motion required to be 
given to the body on making the leap. 

18. The Flying Jump. — The chief difi'erence between 
this exercise and the Half-fall back. Ex. 98, jDage 90, or 
the Leg Swing off, Ex. 43, page o5, is in the swinging 
motion of the ropes, which in part dispenses with the 
motion necessary to be given to the body in those exer- 
cises ; consequently no difficulty ought to arise in carry- 
ing this exercise into effect. 

Gras^D the bar with both hands, and, when in a good 
swing, bring the legs up, and hitch them over the bar, 
either between the hands or outside them ; if the latter, 
they should be very close to the hands, or the feet are 



Exercises on the Trapeze, 



215 



very likely to come in contact with the ropes ; then 
let go with the hands, and gradually lower the body ; 
when at the end of the backward swing carry the arms 
and head well back, at the same time unhitch the legs 
(see fig. 29), and you will alight safely on the ground. 
Perhaps the lungers had better be used the first time, or 
at least until you know the precise time when the legs 
should be unhitched, as you are very likely to hold on 
too long until that knowledge be obtained. (See Ex. 43, 
page 55.) 

19. The Shoot in the Swing. Arm loradke. — Though 
this exercise is referred to in j)age 113, it is deemed 
advisable again to mention it, owing to the additional 
difSculty to be experienced in achieving it as here re- 
quired. 

In accomplishing the Shoot in the Swing, the body 
must not be carried through, and the shoot efiected as 
in Ex. 125, page 113. It is better to carry it into effect by 
bringing the body thi^ough at the (urn for the backward 
swing, giving the necessary jerk on reaching the oppo- 
site end: this is when the shoot is required at the end 
of the backward swing ; but when it is to be achieved 
at the end of the forward swing (which will be found to 
be more difficult), the body must be brought through 
at the end of the backward, and the shoot efiected at 
the turn for the backward swing again, though it would 
perhaps be better to raise the body well up, prior to the 
turn of the swing, as, if done after, the motion of the 
swing is likely to throw the body out of balance, and 
thus render it more difficult to achieve than if done as 
last stated. 

Such an exercise as the above is a very good one to 



216 



Exercises on the Trapeze. 



give as a set exercise in competitions, when it should be 
done twice at each end of the swing. 

20. The Flying Somersault. — It almost seems out of 
place to repeat an exercise that has been already given 
(the Backaway, page 105) in the exercises to be achieved 
on the horizontal bar ; but the reason for its being in- 
serted here is, that it is to be achieved while the trapeze 
is in the swing, and consequently to beginners it would 
appear much more difiB.cult. ^^'ow, as it is quite the 
reverse, it is hoped that all gymnasts, at least the more 
advanced, who can accomplish the Backaway exercise 
referred to, will give this a fair trial, that is, let go 
the bar fearlessly, as the nature of the exercise requires, 
and all must go well, as the swaying of the ropes greatly 
assists the performer in achieving it, and the higher he 
swings the easier will it be found. The chief secret of 
the exercise consists in drawing up the legs in fi^ont at 
the time you let go the bar, when the arms and head 
must be carried well back, thereby curving the body a 
little, and throwing the chest out ; therefore persevere, 
and succeed. 

21. The Stretch. Ann and ivrist jrractice. — Sit upon 
the bar, gras]) the ropes as high as the shoulders, lean 
the body back to straight arms, raise the right leg up and 
carry it backwards over the right arm, thereby raising the 
body off the bar and bending the ropes outwards ; the 
legs being straight towards the right, the whole weight 
of the body will fall upon the right ann, though the 
strain will be equally as great upon the left. These 
movenients must be carried into effect as quickly as pos- 
sible, and should be practised with the left leg over the 
left arm, when a change from one to the other can be made. 



The Horse, 



THE HOESE. 

RemarJcs. — The Horse, so called from its somewliat 
resembling that animal as it at first catclies tlie eve, 
likewise denominated ' The Vaulting Horse,' ' The 
Wooden Horse,' &c., is now much more practised upon 
than formerly, o^\ing perhaps to the variety of the evo- 
Intions to be performed upon it, many more than upon 
any other gymnastic apparatus. Although the several 
actions of the different parts of the body partake of those 
of the horizontal bar and parallel bars combined, yet, as 
a -whole, they differ materially from both, or either, as 
upon the horse exercises can be achieved, and move- 
ments made, that it would be utterly impossible to accom- 
plish on any other apparatus. It is for this reason that 
it finds a place in every gymnasium ; in fact, it would 
not be worthy of that title, were this now most useful 
apparatus not to be found in it. 

In my opinion, no exercise on the horse can be com- 
pared either to the parallel bars, or the horizontal bar, 
for these reasons : — the body, when simply supported on 
the horse, as in the first exercise, when the arms are 
perfectly straight, is not in the same position as it is 
when mounted between the bars, consequently certain 
prehminary exercises must be gone through to get the 
whole frame accustomed to the difference of the attitude ; 



217 



218 



The Horse. 



for there is no single movement on tlie horse which, al- 
though similar to the corresponding one on the parallel 
bars, can be said to be hke it. For instance : in the use 
of the legs in the former, thej must be either carried up 
at the side, or else the body must be carried out of place, 
if thej are to be brought up in front. Again, if the ex- 
ercises themselves are, for the sake of argument, allovred 
to be like those on the parallel bars, the very position 
of the arms with respect to the body would be sufficient 
to prevent their being classed as the same. Again, any 
exercise on the horse, which is in many respects similar 
to that achieved on the horizontal bar, must, owing to the 
position of the hands, differ from it; therefore, under 
these circumstances, it is hoped that any young would- 
be athlete, who intends to become master of any of the 
following exercises, will not attempt to go through it, 
unless he has thoroughly worked his whole body into 
what will be required of him, by beginning at the be- 
ginning, and going through the whole of the preliminary 
exercises, ere he attempt to achieve any of the more 
difficult, as in every instance he will find that he will 
have greater difficulty in learning any one exercise, 
unless thoroughly well schooled previously, and the exer- 
.cise itself will appear much more difficult than it other- 
wise would be. However, let two beginners enter upon 
their duties, each going his own road, the one doing 
what he likes, the other following the directions here 
given ; and by the time the latter has reached the end, 
compare the performances, and judge for yourself which 
is the better of the two. 

All gymnasts must bear in mind that, in making the 
spring, after a run, it must be made from the flat foot, 



The Horse, 



219 



and not from tlie toes, as if yon ^ere standing by tlie 
side of tlie horse, and likewise from hntli feet at oncp, 
therefore a kind of jnmp on to the board, or starting- 
point, must be made prior to making the beat ofp ; for 
if the spring be made otherwise, the exercise to be 
effectuated will be entirely spoilt, and the chances are 
that it will not be done at all. 

Another thing must be borne in mind, i.e. on alight- 
ing on the ground, no matter on which side of the 
horse, it must always be done on the toes, and not on 
the flat foot, or a sudden shock will be the consequence ; 
besides, if the legs are bent on alighting, it will be made 
much easier than keeping the legs straight, which must 
not be. 

Description of Apparatus. — One writer, in describing 
this apparatus, says on its construction, that ' The 
wooden horse is made of a great cylinder of wood.' 
Now this we all know, that it would be difficult indeed 
to construct a wooden horse from aught else but wood. 
True enough it is, that the horse is made of wood, but 
the following particulars will give a pretty clear idea of 
it ; sufficiently so, I hope, to enable one to be con- 
structed from them. 

The horse is made of various lengths, but the two 
sizes mostly in use are those of 6 feet and 4 feet 
long, the former having one end slightly raised (see 
fig. 109), while the latter may or may not have this 
addition. 

The width or diameter of the horse should be some- 
what less than the distance between the parallel bars, 
say from 15 to 16 inches, the neck-piece in the larger 
horse tapering a little towards the end, and raised about 



220 



The Horse. 



3 inclies above tlie level of the back of the horse ; in the 
larger horse this neck-piece begins about 4 feet from 
the opposite end, it will therefore be 2 feet long. If the 

Fig. 109. 




body of the horse be made a little deeper than broad, 
say from 2 to 3 inches, and then planed or sawn off* to 
the requisite depth, viz. the same as the width, the 



The Horse, 



221 



shape of it will be mncli improved. Of course this shape 
can be given to it in making it, Trithout the necessity of 
proceeding exactly as above ; but that is stated to show 
how the shape is to be obtained, if in no other way. 

The horse is generally covered with leather, or, as 
some prefer, with stout canvas, and padded at the sides 
to make it a little softer, in the event of the legs coming 
in contact with it when not required, and likewise to 
ensure its being perfectly smooth all over, and to prevent 
the chance of a splinter being met ^vith while being 
used. 

This being the body of the horse, it is mounted on 
four legs, two in front, and two behind, each one leaning 
towards, or rather standing away from, its neighbour on 
either side, yet perfectly parallel, as will be seen on 
reference to fig. 109. These legs being made hollow, 
and having a loose leg inside, it can be raised to any 
height, varying from the exact height of the horse, 
Avhich should be about 3 feet 6 inches, to about 6 feet, 
the horse being kept at the required height by an iron 
pin, passing through one of the holes made in each 
sliding or loose leg. According to the nature of the 
ground upon which the horse has to stand, or be used, 
the bottom part of the loose legs may be made the same 
size as the outer part of the leg, so as to prevent its 
sinking down into the sawdust or pan, if placed upon it, 
but this is optional. 

One more addition is to be made, and then the horse 
itself is complete, viz. the pommels, or saddle. These 
pommels are cut circular, and fit into two grooves cut 
across the back of the horse, about 6 inches down the 
sides, and are kept in their places by means of an iron 



222 



The Horse. 



pin fixed to each, which, passing through the body of the 
horse, is screwed tight with a nut underneath. These 
pommels are to be placed the same distance apart as the 
parallel bars, viz. 18 inches, which they also resemble 
in point of size, to enable them to be readily grasjoed, 
and should therefore be about 4 inches above the 
back of the horse, and placed about the middle of it as 
it stands upon the legs. The pommels may be covered 
in the same manner as the horse, and they should be 
hollowed a little on the sides, to allow the fingers to have 
a firmer grasp. Besides the above, two flush pommels 
must be made, which are to replace the others when not 
requii^ed, and which, when fixed in their places, make 
the back of the horse apparently smooth. 

Should the gymnasium not allow of a portion of it 
being boarded (when the horse is placed on the tanned 
part close to the edge of the flooring), a kind of spring 
board is necessary to give the feet a firm footing in 
making a spring, or ' beat ' off. This board is made of 
thick wood about 3 feet long by 2^ feet broad, and com- 
posed of narrow pieces of 5 or 6 inches wide, securely 
fastened, having it thinned ojff at one end and raised a 
little at the other, by means of a thicker piece being 
fastened to it. 

Note. — These horses, covered with hide, and made of the be>t 
material, are supplied by 3Iessrs. Snoxell and Spencer, London, at the 
follo^-ing prices : — 6 feet long, with 2 pommels and raised neck-piece 
complete, 121.; 4 feet ditto, lOZ. ; Buck, 2 feet long with 2 pommels, 
6/. 105. 



The Horse, 



223 



THE BUCK. 

This is a small kind of horse, and is very useful both 
for children and youths prior to their practising upon 
the larger ones. It is made in the same manner as 
the horse, Tdthout the neck part, and about 2 feet in 
length, rounded a little at the ends, and 14 or 15 inches 
in diameter. This apj)aratus may or may not be covered 
like the horse. The legs are likewise a little shorter, 
though they may be made to be raised. 

The buck may be used in the same manner as the 
horse in many exercises, and it may. in addition, be used 
to leap over in that play- ground game ' Leap Frog,' until 
able to leap over its full height, and after a while over 
the other horses. 

EXERCISES ON THE HORSE, 

1. Stand on the near side of the horse, dii^ectly oppo- 
site to the pommels, and place a hand on either.. Spring 
up and straighten the arms, bringing the body sufGiciently 
forward to let them assume a perpendicular position ; 
project the chest well forward, and carry the feet and 
legs well backward, without bending them, but at the 
same time leaning well against the side of the horse. 

On leaving the horse and alighting on the ground, do 
so on your toes^ and alvxiys carry the legs as far away 
from the horse as possible, when, assisted a little with 
the wrists, you may touch the ground at a distance of 
from three to four feet. 

2. Repeat the foregoing exercise by first taking a 
short run, and by springing from hoth feet at once, and 
not from one foot only, and also from the flat foot, and not 



224 



Exercises on the Horse. 



from the toes, placing the hands on tlie pommels at the 
same time that the spring is made. Leave the horse in 
the same manner as the last. 

3. Repeat the first exercise ; but do not stop while 
doing it, as the final movement, i.e. the leaving of the 
horse, must be made directly the body is raised into its 
jDlace ; in fact, it must be bronght about as if the whole 
were one movement. 

4. Repeat the same exercise, but with the run, and 
follow the instructions given in the second exercise, as 
regards the making of the spring. 

5. Repeat the first exercise (either vrith or without 
the run), but instead of carrying the legs away as therein 
stated, merely carry the body off a little by the aid of 
the wrists, and alight on the ground close to the side of 
the horse, retaining your hold of the pommels, when a 
spring must be again made, and the exercise repeated 
without any rest between. 

6. Proceed as before, and after the body is uprio-ht, 
carry the rigid leg up at the side of the horse into a 
horizontal position, but without either touching the 
horse with it after you have begun, or resting it upon it : 
then let it drop again, and carry up the left leg in like 
manner. The body in this and three following exercises 
may be turned a verj' little only, to ease the leg, and to 
facilitptte the raising of it, to the right or left, as occasion 
may require. 

7. Repeat the last exercise, carrying ujd each leo- three 
times in succession, without either resting or touchino- 
the ground between. 

8. Proceed as in the sixth exercise, but carrv hnfh leo-s 
up at once, as slow as possible, first to the right, then to 



Exercises on the Horse, 



225 



the left, keeping tliem straight the whole of the time. 
The body must not be moved nor carried too much to 
the opposite side to that to which the legs are carried ; 
a very little cannot be helped by most gymnasts, for the 
more upright position the body retains the greater the 
benefit to be derived therefrom, and the more oTacefiil 
will be its accomjDlishment. 

9. RejDeat the last exercise, carrying the legs up tliree 
times in succession each wav, without either resting; or 
touchino: the oTOund while doing- it. 

10. Repeat the fi.rst exercise with a run. and on the 
body rising carry it a little to the right, and giving it a 
shght turn to the left throw the right leg over the horse, 
thereby facing the pommels (fig. 110). As the pommels 
are not be let go while doing this exercise, the body 
must be leaned a Httle more forward, but to dismount 
the body must be carried well forward, at the same time 
raising it and bringing the right leg over the horse again, 
when, by reversing the motion, alight on the ground, but 
doing so as far fi^om the horse as jDOSsible, by using the 
wrists well. 

11. Repeat the last exercise, also with the run, but 
tuim the body to the rigid, and carry the left leg over the 
left side of the pommels, dismounting in the manner therein 
stated. 

12. Repeat the tenth exercise without the run. 

13. Achieve the eleventh exercise without the run. 

14. Go through the tenth exercise either with or 
without the run, and carry the riglit leg over as therein 
stated, then raise the body by leaning well forward, and 
ahght on the ground, and springing up again on the 
instant, but this time carry the left leg over, as in the 

Q 



226 



Exercises on the Horse, 



eleventli exercise, wlien alight on the ground in like 
manner. 

This exercise may be repeated fonr or five times in 
succession to advantage, making use of the right and left 
legs alternately. 

15. Proceed as in the last, but instead of ahghting on 

Fig. 110. 




the gTound between, allow the body to assume the upright 
position as in the first exercise, when, without any spring 
whatever, otherwise than can be given to the body while 
in that position, to assist you, carry the left leg over ; 
then again return to the side of the horse, stop, and 



Exercises on the Horse. 



227 



cany tlie rigJtt leg over again, repeating the exercise at 
least three times eacli waj alternately witliont allowing tlie 
feet to toncli the ground or the arms to be bent, and, if pos- 
sible, the legs should likewise be kept perfectly straight, 
but not stiff. The body must in this exercise be leaned a 
little forward each time the leg is carried over the horse, 
which will make the exercise much more easy to achieve. 

This is called the Swinging Exercise, or the Saddle 
Vaulting Movement. 

16. Proceed as in the tenth exercise (fig. 110), but 
instead of resting between the change, lean the body 
forward to throw your whole weight upon the arms, 
then, while bringing the right leg back, give the body a 
kind of turn towards the opposite end of the horse, and 
throw the left leg over it, when your face will be towards 
the tail of the horse. N'ow, to reverse the motion, lean 
forward as before, and on the body turning round throw 
the right leg over again, the legs each time describing a 
semicircle. When able to accomplish this with ease, 
practise it with a quicker movement, which will give it 
the nature of a swing. (See Ex. 14, page 135.) 

17. Hepeat the foregoing exercise with the run, but 
carry the body a httle higher, and opening the legs wide, 
carry them over their respective sides of the horse at 
once, but without touching it, and also without bending 
either the legs or arms. 

In doing this exercise the hands must grasp the 
pommels very firmly, and the legs must not be jerked 
forward, but merely allowed to go over as far as the 
arms will permit, without causing them to bend on the 
legs coming in contact with them, or a fall forward will 
be the consequence, therefore the slower (as slow as the 

Q 2 



228 



Exercises on the Horse, 



nature of the exercise Trill allow) tlie better ; and in 

practising it until able to do it with safety and surety. 

some one should be on the opposite side of the horse. 

ready to catch you. in the eyent of your not succeeding. 

and going foi^ther than you intended. (See page 10.) 

On leaying the horse lean the body a httle forward. 

raise it up behind suf&ciently high to enable you to free 

^ , , , the leo's from the horse 

Fig. 111. . ^ 

without bending them. 

and ahght on the ground 

as before. 

18. Spring up and 

carry the right knee 

oyer the saddle, between 

the pommels, jump down 

and springing up again 

directly carry the lefthe- 

tween them ; then jump 

down, and on sjDringing 

up this time carry hoth 

knees oyer the saddle 

at once, and kneel up- 

' right upon the horse, 

letting go the pommels 

while doing so (fig. Ill) . 

Grasp the pommels 

firmly again, and alight 

on the gTOund. Do not carry the knees too far oyer, or 

you may topple oyer and ahght on the wrong side of the 

horse. Should such an eyent occur see Ex. 46. 

19. Spring up as in the first exercise. Xow raise the 

right leg slowly, by bending it at the knee and carry it 




Exercises on the Horse. 



229 



Fig. 112. 



over the saddle, extending it as far as you can without 
allo^ving either leg to touch the horse (fig. 112). The 
body must be well leaned forward in doing this, the 
hands grasping the iDommels firmly. On bringing the 

right leg back alight on 
the ground, spring up 
again, and carry the 
left leg through in hke 
manner. 

20. Proceed as in 
the last exercise, and 
on bringing the right 
leg back carry the left 
over at the same time, 
and without letting 
either touch the sad- 
dle. This requires but 
a little practice, when 
it will become quite 
easy. 

21. Proceed as in the 
last, but raise the legs 
and carry them over 
the saddle both at once, 

being careful not to touch the saddle vnth the feet. 
To dismount, lean the body forward, at the same time 
raising it up behind and carrying the legs out straight 
backwards, give a good spring and alight on the gTound. 

22. Proceed as in the last, and when the legs are per- 
fectly horizontal give the body a turn to the right, carry- 
ing the legs in that direction, then turn round to the left, 
the slower the better, the legs being kept in the same 




230 



Exercises on the Horse, 



position tlie whole time. This is a very useful exercise 
to strengthen the muscles, and to make the grasp much 
firmer, owing to the twisting of the body ; and it may be 
repeated three times each way alternately to advantage. 
It should be practised until it can be done without 
turning the body at all. 

23. Proceed as in the nineteenth exercise, but carry the 
leg over just after the spring is made, and before the body 

assumes its uiDright 
position. Practise 
this with each leo' 
alternately, and do 
not touch the saddle 
with the feet while 
doing it ; it will 
therefore be better 
to take a little higher 
spring than in the 
previous exercises. 

24. Proceed as in 
the last exercise, but 
carry both of the 
legs over the saddle 
at once, without 
touching it with the 
MM ^\ feet_(fig. 113), and 

// raising them into a 

horizontal position 
as soon as the body is upright. To dismount, follow 
the instructions given in the twenty- first exercise. 

25. Repeat the last exercise, keeping the legs as 
straight as j^ossible the whole of the time, and carry 




Exercises on the Horse, 



231 



them both, over the saddle at once, without touching it 
or bending the arms. Dismount as in the last exercise, 
aHo'hting" at least four feet from the horse. 

26. Proceed as before, but give the body a slight turn 
to the side and carry both legs over the rz(//^/-hand side 
of the pommels, sitting on the horse as soon as the legs 
are over. To dismount, give the body a sHght turn and 
lean over the pommels, similar to that in Ex. 16 ; then, 
when the weight of the body is on the arms, carry 
the legs back vnth a swing, and alight on the ground. 
Great assistance will be derived from giving the legs a 
kind of upward jerk prior to leaning the body over the 
pommels. 

27. Proceed as in the last, but carry the legs over the 
left-hand side of the pommels instead, and follow the in- 
structions therein given. 

28. Repeat the last two exercises with the run, taking- 
care to make the spring as given in page 223. 

29. Go through the same exercise, but on ahghting 
on the ground retain your hold of the pommels, and 
springing up again directly carry the legs over the other 
side of them, as therein stated. This exercise may be 
repeated three or four times each way alternately to 
advantage. There must be no resting while accomphsh- 
ing this, or the effect of it will be entirely destroyed. 

30. Repeat the twenty- sixth exercise, either ^vith or 
without the run, then lean well forward over the 
pommels, raise the legs from off the horse, and carry 
them with a swing over towards your left hand, and seat 
yourself on the other side of the pommels, then, by re- 
versing the motion, carry the legs back again, repeating 
the exercise at least three times each way. 



232 



Exercises on the Horse. 



There is to be no resting or pausing between, besides 
wbich the legs and bodr are, if possible, to be kept in a 
perfectly horizontal position Trhile effectuating the change. 

31. Grasp the pommels, one Tvith each hand, and 
spring up, in doing which give the body a turn towards 
the left^ and throwing the rigJit leg over the horse, let 
go the right hand to allow the leg to pass over that 
pommel, and assume the sitting posture on the saddle, 
v,dth one leg on either side and facing the neck-piece. 
To dismount : — 

Fir.^t. — Place one hand on either pommel, when, 
raising yourself uj), bring the right leg back over the 
horse, and alight on the gi^ound. 

Second. — Place both hands on the fi^ont pommel, lean 
forward so as to thi^ow the whole weight oi thf} body 
upon the arms, then, bringing the right leg over the 
horse, carry yourself as far away fi^om it as possible. 

Third. — Place the right hand on the saddle with the 
wrist turned towards the left, and grasp the pommel 
with the left hand, then, throwing the body forward as 
before, alight on the ground. 

32. Repeat the same exercise, but this time throw the 
left leg over the horse instead, making use of the left 
hand where the right is stated, and the right for the left, 
and dismount by either of the methods last described, 
though all three should be practised. 

33. Grasp the pommels and spring up, then, giving 
the body a backward tuim, throw the left leg over the 
right side of the pommel, and on the body di^opping into 
its place, let go your hold of the pommels, when your 
back will be towards them. 

To dismount, place your hands on the horse in front 



Exercises on the Horse, 



233 



of jou, when, leaning forward and giving a sligM 
spring, aided bj tlie wi^ists, carry your body well over 
the end of it, and ahght on the ground ; but in doing so 
bend the body backward a little, to prevent the chance 
of your coming in contact with the tail end of the horse, 
should you not have sprung far enough. 

34. Repeat the above exercise, but by reversing the 
motion of the body, throw the rigid leg over the left- 
hand side of the pommels, when proceed as therein 
stated, though the neck-piece will cause you^to take a 
higher spring to enable you to clear it. 

35. Spring up as in the first exercise, then gradually 
raise the legs by bending them up sideways at the knees 
and hips, each towards its own side, then crossing the 
feet and pointing the toes as much upwards as possible, 
carry the legs through the arms over the saddle as in the 
former exercise, only in this the feet are to be passed 
through first. (See Ex. 81, page 79.) 

Do it very slowly until sure of being able to achieve it 
to perfection, when you will be better able to judge the 
movement the legs require. The pommels are to be 
firmly grasped, and great care is to be taken not to 
overbalance yourself, or the consequences will be what 
you did not expect. At first some one should be on the 
opposite side of the horse, to render some slight as- 
sistance in the event of any mishap. 

36. Repeat the above exercise with the run, and as 
quickly as possible, but in this there must be no hesita- 
tion, for, if so, look out for squalls among the sawdust. 
An assistant should be at hand for this exercise ; not that 
there is any danger — far from it, but ' a preventative is 
better than a cure.' 



234 



Exercises on the Horse. 



37. Achieve Ex. 31. Place both hands on the left- 
hand pommel, lean well forward as before stated, 
then, vdth a strong spring, carry the body up behind, 
raising the legs well above the horse ; then give the 
body a good tm^i, cross the legs well so as to let the 
right side be downwards, and ahght on the saddle with 
the body the reverse way, and without letting go your 
hold of the pommels ; now saving up again, when, by 
turning the body the opposite way, allow it to di^o]) into 
its former position. (See Ex. 20, page 138.) 

Greater impetus must be given to this latter motion, oi' 
a collision between your feet and shins will be the result. 

38. Execute Ex. 32 ; then, placing both hands on 
the /'/^Af-hand pommel, repeat the last exercise, thereby 
letting the left side be downwards ; consequently the 
body must be turned, and the feet crossed accordingly. 

39. Grasp the right-hand pommel ^vith the ri'jM hand, 
letting the left hang loosely by the side, give a strong 
spring, and thi^ow the left leg over between the pommels, 
tuiming the body a httle in doing it. 

To dismount, practise springing out of the saddle with 
the same hand only grasping the pommel ; but until 
able to do so, place both hands on the fi^ont pommel, i.e. 
the one facing you, or place one hand on either pommel, 
^-iz. the ru/Ju hand on the one facing you, and the left. 
bv tui^nino' the bodv a little to the left, on the hinder 
one. 

40. Kepeat the last exercise, but thi^ow the right leg 
over the saddle instead of the left, taking a step sideways 
prior to making the spring. Dismount by placing the 
left hand on the other pommel, and, raising the body up, 
di^aw the right leg thi^oiigh and alight on the ground. 



Ex-ercises on the Horse, 



235 



41. Repeat the tliii^tT- ninth exercise. gTasping the 
pommel with the left hand, and thi^owing the right leg 
over instead ; dismounting, as therein stated, but using 
the word left for right, and right for left. 

42. Repeat the last exercise, but thi^ow the left leg 
over instead of the right, and follow the dii^ections given 
in the thiity-ninth exercise. 

43. Achieve the tenth exercise, when you will face the 
pommels, then place both hands on the j^onimel nearest 
to you, lean well forward as before stated, raise the body 
well off the horse, and give a strong spring ^-ith the 
aiTQS backr^'ard, sufficient to carry you over the end of 
the horse, and ahofht on the o;round. 

44. Achieve the eighteenth exercise, bringing up both 
knees at once, then kneel on the saddle, letting them 
be well over the horse (see fig. 111). Xow let go the 
pommels, and bringing the hands upwards in fi-ont 
somewhat sharply, at the same time giving a strong- 
spring forward, lift youi* feet fi'om off' the horse (see 
fig. 114), and ahght on the ground on the other side 
of it. 

Although, in endeavoui^ing to effectuate this exercise, 
at first your legs seem to be fastened to the back of the 
horse, owing chiefly to youi' lack of coui^age to go through 
it for fear of a mishap, such you will easily prove is not 
the case, if you only give a sufficient spring at the same 
time that you carry your hands forward and raise the 
legs from the horse, although it may not then be neatly 
done ; still, if needed, and it will only be for once, to give 
you gi^eater confidence, a second pai^y may be on the 
opposite side of the horse, to render you any shght 
assistance, and to catch you should you jump too fae. 



236 



Exercises on the Horse. 



45. Take a sliort run, ]3lace botli liands on the pom- 
mels, vSpring u]3, and in going over the horse carry the 
rigid leg outside the riglit-hmid pommel, and the left 
between them, letting go with the hands, and alight on 
the ground. 

46. Proceed as in the last, only carry the left leg out- 

FiG. 114. 




side the Ze//-hand pommel, letting the rigJit leg pass be- 
tween them instead, and ahght on the ground as before. 

47. Proceed as in the last, but now bring up both legs 
at once and carry them over the saddle, shooting them 
well over the horse, when alight on the ground on the 
other side. 



Exercises on the Horse. 



237 



Take care that your knees do not come in contact 
with Totu^ chin on bringing them n]D ; the head should 
therefore be kept Trell raised and the chin projected as 
far as possible. The quicker this exercise is done the 
better, and the neater it will look. 

48. Proceed as in the twenty-fifth exercise, then, when 
the body has assumed its u^^right position, and the legs 
are perfectly horizontal, give a sudden spring forward 
with the wiists, at the same tune carrying the body 
forward, and giving the legs an upward motion, the 
whole to be combined in as it were one movement, and 
the imjDetus thus given must be sufficiently strong to 
carry you well over the horse. To be done neatly, this 
exercise requhes to be tried a few times, but the wiists 
derive the most benefit from its being done. 

49. Proceed as in the last, shooting the legs out 
simultaneously Tsith the body di'opping into its proper 
position, and proceeding -with the same movements as 
above given. The only difference between this exercise 
and the last consists in the jDause given, this exercise 
being quicker than the last and slower than the forty- 
seventh, in which exercise the legs are not raised into 
the horizontal position. 

50. Repeat the twenty-fourth exercise, but let there 
be no pause or hesitation in carrying the legs over the 
horse, and let them be well opened and the body well 
raised to enable the feet to clear the tojDs of the pommels 
(see fig. 115), which must be let go when the legs are 
about to be brought forward, giving a strong spring 
with the wrists in doir.g so, to carry you as far as 
possible from the horse. An assistant had better be on 
the opposite side, until you are sure of doing it properly. 



238 



Exercises on the Horse. 



51. Proceed as before, but bend the legs at the hips only, 
and on making the spring raise them up and caiTv them 
onhj over the /'/(////-hand pommel, keeping the body per- 
fectly upright wlnle going over the horse, as, were it also 

to be raised, it would 
make the exercise too 
much of a vault, and 
in fact sjDoil what is 
intended to be ac- 
complished. On leav- 
ing the horse a good 
spiTJig must be given 
with the wrists. 

52. Repeat the last 
exercise, but carry 
the legs onJij over 
the left-hsmd pommel, 
and follow the direc- 
tions given therein. 

53. TTith a short 
run spring up, placing 

the rigid hand on the right pommel, and going right 
over the horse ^vithout any rest between, or otherwise 
touching it. 

54. Repeat the above by placing the right hand on 
the left pommel, when the legs must be raised somewhat 
higher, owing to the neck-piece. 

55. Repeat the fifty-thii^d exercise, but with the left 
hand on the left pommel, and proceed accordingly. 

56. The forty-eighth exercise must be done as therein 
described, making use of the left hand on the right 
pommel. 



Fig. 11. 5. 




Exercises on the Horse. 



239 



57. Place both hands on the pommels, spring np with 
the fingers on the inside, pass both legs clean over the 
horse, and ahght on the gTound, but still retain your 
hold of the pommels. 'Nov^ give a spring up again and 
bring the legs back over the horse the reverse "vrav, and 
alight on the ground, when the exercise may be repeated 
three times to advantage. 

58. Take a short run, place both hands on the pom- 
mels, at the same time taking a good spring, raise the 
body and legs to the right into a perfectly horizontal 
position, and carry, or turn the body round as it were 
on a pivot, and alight on the ground on the opposite side 
of the horse. In all vaulting exercises, the arms should 
be kept perfectly straight. 

59. Repeat the last exercise, but carry the body to the 
left instead, and both ways must be persevered in until 
able to do it one way as well as the other. 

60. Place the hands on the pommels, spring up, bring 
the knees between the arms, and place the feet on the 
saddle. IS'ow grasp the pommels firmly and gTadually 
raise the body up behind and practise it until able to 
stand on your hands, when the exercise may be varied 
by bending the arms and lowering the body, and again 
raising it. To dismount, let the body gTadually sink 
again, by bending the legs first, when you may ahght at 
some distance from the horse. 

61. Repeat the last exercise, but with a short run, 
giving a higher spring on grasping the pommels, and 
practise it until able to carry the body well up above the 
horse into a standing position on the hands without rest- 
ing between, or allowing any part of the body to touch 
the horse (otherwise than the hands) while accomplish- 



240 



Exercises on the Horse, 



ing it. Alight similar to the last, but if possible do so 
with a little more spring, and before the body is too 
low. 

62. Proceed as in the last exercise, but, instead of rest- 
ing as soon as the body and legs are up, let them con- 
tinue to fall, gTas]3ing the pommels firmly until about 
two- thirds oyer, when giye a kind of spring with the 
hands and wrists, which will cause you to alight on your 
feet. 

This exercise being like that on the parallel bars, no 
dif&cultj will be experienced in achieying it on the horse, 
if able to accomplish it on them. This on the horse, as 
on the bars, forms a yery showy finish to any exercise 
on this apparatus, but, until sure of being able to go 
through it by yourself, some assistance should be giyen 
you on the opposite side of the horse, on your body 
coming oyer, or after you haye made the scoring and are 
alighting on the gTOund. 

63. Take a short run, and, placing the hands on the 
pommels, spring up and carry the legs oyer on the right, 
as in Ex. 51, page 238, but on letting go with the hands 
giye the body a half-turn, and ahght on the feet, with 
the face towards the horse. 

64. Repeat the aboye in eyery respect the same as re- 
gards the particulars, but in this carry the legs oyer on 
the left instead, not forg-etting, owing to the neck-piece, 
to raise the legs a little higher. 

65. The Swimming Movement, Wrist lyradice.— 
Mount as in the first exercise, then raise the legs up be- 
hind, and in leaning the body forward until in a hori- 
zontal position, carry it towards the right, bringing that 
elbow well under you, when, letting go with the left 



Exercises on the Horse. 



241 



hand and stretcliing it out in front, support yourself on 
the right fore-arm for a short time (see fig, 116) ; and 
when able, and while still in the same position, allow the 
bodj to revolve round slowly, first to the right, then to 

Fig. 116. 




the left, as by this movement the T^^ist is well brought 
into use. This, though a very pretty exercise, requires 
some little practice to be able to achieve it neatly: there- 
fore, when well up in it with the right arm, it should be 
practised with the left as well. 

66. The Roll over. — This is not so difi&cult an exercise 
as it will at first seem, it being very similar to ISTo. 41, 
page 154, on the parallel bars (which see and practise 
a few times), the chief difference being in the position 
of the body in starting. The gymnast must stand with 
his back to the horse, and, lifting up his elbows behind, 
place his hands on the side of the pommels, with the 
fingers outward and the thumbs inward, so as to lean 
his elbows on the centre of the back of the horse, Now 
lift the feet up with a strong impetus, and carrying them 

E 



242 



Exercises on the Horse. 



over the head, as in the exercise above referred to, at 
the same time bending the body backwards over the 
horse (see fig. 117), and letting the pommels go when 

the body begins to 
drop, which must be 
when the feet are 
level, or nearly so, 
with the head, yon 
will be able to alight in 
safety on the ground, 
unless you retain your 
hold of the pommels 
rather too long, 
^hould such be the 
case, your posteriors 
will become the win- 
ners, and let you know 
whether the ground 
be hard or soft. (See 
remarks in page 1 54. ) 

67. The Long Fly. 
— This consists in 
carrying the body 
over the whole length of the horse in one leap, as in 
the playground game of ' Fly the Garter,' because at 
the beginning the gymnast first springs at a short dis- 
tance only from it, and gradually increases that distance 
until able to spring from the distance of his height from 
the horse. To practise this, at first pitch with the 
hands on the nearer end of the horse, and on bringing 
the legs forward lift the hands up and pitch on with the 
feet in their place, not upright, but in a crouching pos- 




Exercises on the Horse. 



ture ; tlieii pitch, on to tlie farther end, and, by opening 
the legs, alight on the ground. 

This must be persevered in until the gymnast is able to 
do it properly; then he must begin totry to jump tbe whole 
length of the horse by resting the hands on it but once. 
Tor this, at first, a shorter horse is best, as, when able to 
go over that as nothing, he may go on and try the longer 
one. In all such exercises it is always better to have 
some one standing on the opposite end of the horse to 
catch you, should a stoppage or mishap occur. But hav- 
ing gone thus far, the gymnast must carry out the sa}HLng 
of ' What is worth doing at all is loorth doing luell,' by 
persevering in and accomplishing it easily. Therefore, 
to do that, he musi} go ' the ivhole hog or none,^ and not 
pitch half-way, and then running along the other half 
on his hands, finish as if it had been achieved altogether 
properly. 

68. The Somersault. — If the gymnast can achieve Ex. 
55, page 162, he need not fear venturing to try this one. 
Proceed with the last exercise, but stand upright on 
the horse, with one leg in advance, and the arms well up 
over the head ; then carry the body quickly forward, 
place the hands upon the horse (either upon the fur- 
thermost pommel, or else upon the neck-piece ; if upon 
the former, a greater spring from the toes will be 
required), and carry the body and legs well up back- 
ward, as in the exercise above referred to, and, if done 
fearlessly, you will ahght safely on the ground. 



244 



Vaulting. 



YATILTING. 

'What is Yaultixg ? ' or, as many word it, 'What con- 
stitutes a Vault ? ' are questions tliat have of late been 
asked by many, more especially in relation to the recent 
Athletic Festivals, now annually held to promote Gym- 
nastics. 

The first question is ^^lainly answered by Walker, in his 
' Manly Exercises,' who, in describing the subject, says : 
' In vaulting, by a spring of the feet, the body is raised, 
and by leaning the hands upon a fixed object, it at the 
same time receives, in oblique vaulting, a swing which 
facihtates the action ;' but he adds, ' as the inclination 
thus given to the body depends not merely on the feet, 
but on the hands, we have the power to guide the body 
in any direction.' Therefore, knowing that leaping is a 
spring of the feet, vaulting must be a kind of leaping, 
be it ^vith or without the run ; but by leaning the hands 
upon any fixed object, as above stated, the body must 
necessarily receive that assistance which is requisite to 
help it forward or over that object. 

As to the second question, ' What constitutes a vault ? ' 
To this I have seen but one answer, viz. goixg clean 
OVER IN A SWING. This was my own definition of it, at 
various committee meetings in connection with the afore- 
said Festivals, some time before the pubhcation of the 
work referred to above, and it is hoped that these re- 



VcntUing, 



245 



marks may be tlie means of causing the definition of a 
vanlt to be henceforth inserted in the Festival Rules, for 
the heio'ht vaulted in that of I860 was 6 ft. 8 in.* ao-ainst 
5 ft. 10 in. in 1866.t J^ow the question arises, ^Yhat 
caused this difference ? Simply this : in the former year, 
in the vaulting contest, the rule went by was, as long as 
the competitor loent over the har fairly it vjas deemed suffi- 
cient, and he was awarded according to the height thus 
cleared. In the latter year the rule was framed chiefly 
from remarks then made, viz. ' That a vault should consist 
of a clear spring from the feet, and that the body should 
be carried over the barj by that aid chiefly, and that no 

"* The particulars of the height vaulted at the IMaiichester Athletic 
Festival, 1865, are : A tie between the two best : the height (which 
was not measured) was supposed to be 6 ft. 8 or 9 in. ; the lesser 
measurement is therefore taken. 

t ^e vaulting in 1866 was, for the highest above his own height, 
as imoer : — 

The height of the gymnast. The height vaulted by him. 

ft. in. ft. in. 

5 1^ 5 10 

5 4i- 6 

The former of which won, he being 3^ in. shorter than the latter, 
but vaulting only 2 in. lower. 

To make the comparison more distinct, it might be thus explained. 
The gymnast whose height was 

5 ft. in. vaulted 8} in. above his height = ft. 10 in. 
„ 4J „ „ 7i „ ., „ „ = e „ „ 
which clearly shows that the former won by 1^ in. 

The heights of the gymnasts, between whom there was a dead heat 
in I860 for 6 ft. 8 in., were 5 ft. 10 in. and 6 ft. 2 in., which shows 
the dilFerence of 10 in. and 6 in. over their respective heights, but the 
heights of the gymnasts were not then taken into consideration. 
These vaulting contests were ever the horizontal bar. 



246 



Vaulting. 



movement approacliiiig a gymnastic exercise be allowed ; 
tlie difference in the heights of the gymnasts being taken 
into consideration.' (See Exercises 57 and 58, pages 65 
and 66.) The author has seen many gymnasts, more 
especially at assaults at arms, have to spring up to reach 
the bar, v^hen they have been vaulting, and then achiev- 
ing the Slov^ Pull up movement, or some other exercise, 
go over the bar in the same manner, and perhaps better 
than they would have done, had they sprung from the 
bare floor. 

Vaulting over the Horizontal Bar. — This now much- 
practised exercise in connection with, gymnastics, re- 
quires but little explanation as to the method of 
achieving it; therefore the question previously asked 
recurs, ' "What constitutes a vault ? ' &c. It is the 
placing of the hands on the bar, springing with the 
toes, raising the body up by the aid of the wris^ and 
arms, and by carrying it on one side (sometimes to the 
right, sometimes to the left), impelling it forward over the 
bar. Therefore, if the body be raised to the right, the 
right hand must let go the bar to allow it to pass, and 
the same remark is equally appHcable to the left hand, 
^^ow, in raising the body up over the bar it must be 
done properly or not at all, viz. to carry it in a hori- 
zontal position with the bar as far away from it as the 
arms will allow (vide fig. 118), by which it vdll be seen 
that the body must not be bent at the hips, nor carried 
over, as in Ex. 76, page 76, nor at all similarly, after you 
are once above the bar (see remarks on the last page). 

It will be useless for a beginner to attempt to vault 
over any height ere he has practised upon different 
heights gradually ; he should therefore begin by placing 



Vaulting. 



247 



the bar as low as the pit of his stomach, not raising 
it until able to clear it easily, and then not more than 
two inches, as the higher the bar is raised the more 
difficult does vaulting become ; but should he be patient, 




and not in a hurry to try the bar a little Jiigher, the 
chances are that he will the sooner be able to vault over 
the bar as high as he can reach when standing on his flat 
feet. 



EXERCISES IN VAULTmG OVEE THE 
PAEALLEL BAE. 

As preliminary exercises to vaulting, the pupil is re- 
ferred to the following : — 



No. 
10 
13 
14 
15 
16 
17 



Page 
131 
134 
135 
136 
137 
137 



248 



Exercises in Vaulting. 



When well up in these, he may proceed ^th those here- 
after given, practising each until thoroughly master of it 
before proceeding to the next. (See Art. 3, page 121.) 

1. Preliminary Exercises. — Face the bars on the 
outside, place both hands on the nearest, spring up and 
suspend the body Trith the lower part of the stomach 
against the nearer bar. then passing the right hand over 
to the op^DOsite one, swing the legs forward and backward 
two or three times, when, with a strong impetus from the 
legs, aided by the wiists, carry yourself completely oyer 
both bars, and, letting go your hold, alight on the gTOund. 

2. E^epeat the above, ^^assing the left hand over to 
the other bar, which will necessitate the carrying of the 
legs towards the left ; but in other respects, follow the 
instructions therein given. 

3. Stand on the outside of the bars, and place the 
right hand on the nearer, and the left on the other, 
then, making a spring fi^om the toes, carry yourself* clean 
over both bars without touching them with either legs 
or body, then, letting go with yom^ hands, alight on the 
ground. 

4. Place the left hand on the nearer bar, and the rigJif 
on the other, and re^Deat the exercise, observing the 
instructions contained in the note below in this and all 
futui^e exercises. 

Whenever tlie Ifft hand is on the opposite side or bar to that on 
which the gymnast stands, and the rignf nearer to him. the legs must 
be raised up and carried over on the /f/r-hand side, when the riaht 
leg will be between his left and the bar ; but if the right hand is the 
farther away and the left the nearer, then the motion is reversed, 
and the legs must be carried over on the 'right, when the left leg 
will be the lower and pass bttween the right and the bar. This is 
applicable to all vaulting exercises. 



Exercises in Vaulting, 



249 



5. With the riglit hand on the nearer bar, and the left 
on the other, vault over the bars, bat alight on the ground 
between them ; then springing up again, carry yourself 
over the second as before. 

6. Let the left hand be on the nearer bar, and the 
right on the opposite one, and repeat the last exercise. 

7. Place both hands on the nearer bar, and springing 
up as in the third exercise, pass the left hand over to 
the opposite bar (after the spring has been made), and 
carry yourself over both bars as before. 

8. Proceed as in the last exercise, but pass the right 
hand over to the other bar instead (see note in last page). 

9. Place both hands on the nearer bar, springing up 
and carrying the legs to the right, vault over both bars 
^vithout restino- either hand on, or allowing; the leo-s or 
body to touch the other bar, the hands to let go their 
hold on passing over the second one. 

10. Repeat the last exercise, but carry the legs over 
on the left instead, and proceed as therein stated. 

11. Repeat either the third or fourth exercise as often 
as convenient, without letting go either bar with the 
hands. 

12. Repeat either the fifth or sixth exercise ad lihiticm, 
but in achieving this the hands must necessarily be both 
placed on the nearer bar each time before the spring is 
made, yet there should not be any longer pause between 
the vault than is absolutely necessary. 

13. Stand on the outside of the bars and place both 
hands, at some distance apart, say about eighteen inches, 
on the nearest, then s^Dring up, carrying the body rather 
high, pass both legs at once between the arms, and drop 
between the bars, letting go your hold and passing your 



250 



Exercises in Vaulting. 



hands on to the other, when vault in like manner over 
that one. 

14. Place both hands on the nearer bar, spring up 
and carry both legs over that bar on the right, alighting 
between them, on doing which pass the hands over to 
the other bar dii^ectly, or even before the feet touched 
the ground, and vault over it without resting. When 
well up in vaulting, and wishing to vary the finish, the 
gymnast would do well to finish with N^o. 16, but there 
must be no unnecessary pause between. 

15. Repeat the foregoing, but carry the legs over to 
the left instead, finishing T^T.th the next, as therein stated. 

16. Stand between the bars, facing one of them, and 
placing both hands on it, gTasp it firmly ; now spring 
well up, and carrying the elbows out well at the sides, 
cross the legs, and hfting the body up behind, carry 
them back over the other bar, when, aided with a good 
spring from the wrists, alight on the ground without 
having touched it. 

This is a very good finish to the two previous ex- 
ercises. 

17. Proceed as in l^o. 3, but, instead of carrying the 
legs over both bars at once, in the |)osition therein 
stated, viz. behind you (see fig. 119), let the legs drop 
between the bars without bending the arms, when swing 
forward and carry them over the opposite bar in front of 
the hands, in the manner described in Ex. 14, page 135. 
The dotted Hne in the woodcut shows the direction taken 
by the feet. 

18. Proceed as in the last, but carry the rigid hand 
over instead, when the legs will pass behind towards 
that hand, and follow the dii^ections therein given. 



Exercises in Vaulting, 



251 



19. Face tlie length, of the bars, and placing the hands 
on the ends of them, with the fingers outwards, spring 
well up, and in so doing throw the right leg over the riglit- 



Fig. 119. 




hand bar, letting go that hand to allow it to pass, and 
immediately grasping the end of the bar again, then drop 
to the ground. 

The foot must be raised well, which might be done by 
keeping the leg perfectly straight, otherwise it is likely 
to come in contact with the bar in passing. 

20. Repeat the above exercise, but throw the left leg 
oyer the bar instead, and, with the exception of sub- 
stituting left for viglit^ follow the directions therein con- 
tained. 



252 



Exercises in Vaulting. 



21. Proceed as last described, but on springing up 
lean the bead well forward, and raise tbe body bigber 
bebind ; tben opening tbe legs wide, carry one over eitber 
bar quickly, letting go witb tbe bands to allow tbem to 
pass over tbe bars freely, and, on tbe legs dropping 
between tbem, grasp tbem again as before, witbout 
baving toucbed tbe ground witb tbe feet. On no account 
are tbe arms to be bent, and tbe legs must be kept per- 
fectly straigbt, or tbe feet will come in contact witb tbe 
bars, wbicb consequently makes it mucb more difficult 
to acbieve, tbougb, after a few trials, witb a strong deter- 
mination to succeed, tbe gymnast will soon find bimself 
well rewarded for bis patience (see page 10). 

22. Stand opposite tbe ends of tbe bars, as in IS'o. 19, 
and proceed as tberein stated, but witb tbis difference — 
tbat, instead of carrying tbe right leg over tbe right-hand 
bar, anr^ aUoi'-iug if to drojo letiveen them, it is, togetber 
^vitb tbe left, assisted by a spiing witb tbe wrists, in 
tbis exercise carried straigbt over tbe left-hand, bar as 
well, tbereby carrying one leg over tbe one bar, and 
botb legs over tbe otber ; tben, by letting go your bold, 
abo'bt on tbe oround. 

23. Tbis exercise is acbieved in tbe same manner as tbe 
last, but in tbis tbe left leg is earned over tbe /e/Y-band 
bar, letting go tbe left band to allow it to pass, and botb 
legs are carried over tbe / ((//^f-band bar. Botb are to be 
well practised until able to do tbem witbout tbe least 
besitation. 

24. Proceed as before, but in springing up carry botb 
legs over tbe r/f/Zzf-band bar witb a sufficient impetus, 
assisted by a strong 'spring from tbe wrists, to carry 
tbem over tbe left -band bar as well, letting go tbe rigbt 



Exercises in Vaulting, 



253 



hand to allow tliem to pass, when spring well with the 
left hand to assist the bodj over the second bar, if pos- 
sible without touching it (which is the proper method of 
doing it). 

This is a very good exercise for the wiists, and the 
gymnast, prior to placing his hands on the bars, must 
stand directly opposite the ends of them, and not more 
opposite the end of the bar over which he is going to 
carry his legs first, than the other. 

25. Proceed as in the last, but in this carry the legs 
over the Ze/Miand bar first, and, substituting left for 
right, and rigid for left, proceed according to the in- 
structions given in it. 

26. Stand outside the bars, and, placing the hands on 
the nearer, bring the legs up in front, placing the feet 
agamst the opposite bar ; bend the knees, and let the 
body di^op by sti-aightening the arms, then, by giving a 
good spring with the feet, which will cause the body to 
rise up outside, bring the legs up also and carry them 
over the bars, either passing one hand over to the other 
bar or not, as preferred. The whole of this exercise 
should be carried into effect as quickly as possible, there 
being no pause required between the several movements. 
The exercise may be repeated after the manner of Ex. 78, 
page 78, if desired (see note, page 118). 



254 



Climbing. 



CLIMBING. 



I^emarl-s. — This useful addition to the gymnastic art 
is being practised every day in our public gymnasiums 
more and more, and as there are many different methods 
of so doing, according to the different apparatus used, 
it seems desirable to mention those mostly in use. They 
are treated separately, for the benefit of those whose wish 
is to be able to achieve the whole of the varieties. 

The different apparatus used in connection with 
cHmbing, and which are generally arranged in order 
along or around a stand, termed the Glvnibing Stand, are 
the following : — 

1. The Plain Eope. 8. The Horizontal Ladder. 

2. The Knotted Eope. 9. The Hanging Ladder. 

3. The Sparred or Bar Eope. 10. The Slanting or Oblique 

4. The Plugged Eope. Ladder. 

5. The Pole, fixed or hanging. 11. The Eope Ladder. 

6. The Bar Pole. 12. The Plank or Board. 

: 7. The Upright Ladder. i 13. The Sparred Plank. &C.&C. 



Description of Apparatus. 

1. The Plain Rope. 
All ropes used for climbing should be about If inch 
in diameter, but where there is room for more than one 



Climhing, 



255 



rope to be suspended, thej may be of different sizes, to 
suit the different ages of the gymnasts,* say from l^inch 
to 1^ inch in diameter, and reach to within a few inches 
of the ground. 

* As ropes of different strengths are always in requisition in a 
well-appointed gymnasium, it may be as well to give the rule for 
ascertaining the weight a well-made hemp rope of any certain size 
will carry, according to Eobinson's calculation. Eltle. — Multiply 
the circumference of the rope in inches by itself, and the fifth 
part of the product will express the number ©f tons the rope will 
carry. From the above rule the following table is compiled by the 
Author. 



Circmnference 
of rope in 
inches. 


Calculated Weight. 


tons. 


cwt. 


qrs. 


1 




4 





H 




6 


1 


H 




9 





If 




12 


1 


2 




16 





2i 


1 





1 


2^ 


1 


5 







1 


10 


1 


3 


1 


16 





H 


2 


2 


1 




2 


9 





H 


2 


16 


1 


4 


3 


4 





H 


3 


12 


1 


H 


4 


1 







4 


10 


1 


5 


5 










5 


10 


1 




6 


1 







6 


12 


1 


6 


7 


4 






256 



Climbing, 



There are two methods of cHmbing this rope. viz. 
with the hands and feet, and with the hands only. 

1. With the Hands and Feet. — Grasp the rope with 
Yig, 120. both hands as high up 

as YOU can reach, or if a 
jump be made to grasp 
it higher up the better, 
then move them alter- 
nately one above the 
other, sup23orting your- 
self while so doing by 
the feet (fig. 120), 
which are made use of 
by passing the heel of 
the left foot in fi^ont 
of the right, catching 
the rope between the 
legs, and pressing it be- 
tween the feet, in the 
manner shown at a, fig. 
121. 

2. With the Hands 
only. — A glance at fig. 
121 will clearly show the way this is achieved, it being 
but the former exercise without the use of the feet, and 
every time a hand is about to be raised, the ]0U23il must 
raise up the body in the manner described in Ex. 9, 
page 35. Although the most difficult, it is by far the 
most graceful method of chmbing the ro|)e, and no 
gymnast should be considered as such unless he climb 
the rope with as great an ease as he does other feats ; 




Climbing. 



257 



in fact, every person slionld be able to make liimself 
proficient in this branch, as there is no teUing how 
soon his chmbing powers will be called into use. 
On descending the Fia. 121. 

rope the action of 
the hands, or hands 
and feet, must be 
reversed, and on no 
account is the rope 
to be allowed to sHp 
through them, as 
the fiiction caused 
thereby will be sure 
to rub the skin off, 
and perhaps cut the 
flesh to the bone. 

3 . — Grasp the r op e ^ }a 

with the hands as 
high as possible, raise 
the body and pass the 
rigid hand upward, 
di'opping the left 
loosely by the side, 
then bring up the 
left, and by raising 
the body grasp the 
rope just above the 
right, when let go 
with the right and 

let it hang loosely by the side, bringing it up again, 
and repeat the exercise. This practice is of gTeat benefit 
to the hands, wrists, arms, muscles, &c., and makes 

s 




258 



Climhing. 



tlie grasp mucli firmer, but it will require great |)er- 
severance to overcome it, as the action of tlie arms is 
ver J difiPerent to the ordinary mode of climbing in the 
preceding exercise, inasmucb as tbe body is for a time 
suspended by one arm during the making of every 
change. It should be persevered in until the body 
can be raised with the one arm only, though at first 
that may be effected by using both arms ; but the 
former, w^hich the nature of the exercise requires, is the 
more difficult. 

4. — A very difficult method of climbing the rope is 
thus described : grasp the rope with both hands, passing 
the hanging portion of the rope over one of the shoulders, 
then bring up the body, and by opening the legs pass 
one on either side of the arms outside, keeping them 
perfectly straight, and letting the feet be well over the 
head, and while in that position move the hands alter- 
nately upward, and ascend the rope as before. 

2. The Knotted Eope, 
This rope is of the same size as the last, but there are 
a series of knots tied or worked into the whole of its 
length, at about a foot apart, these knots being made use 
of to assist the climber in mounting or descending it. 
In neither way need the feet be crossed as before. 

3. The Spae or Bar Eope. 

This merely consists of a series of spars, about -| of an 
inch in diameter, being worked in in the making of the 
rope, so as to project about six inches on either side of 
it, and so constructed that the spars shall be in a straight 



Exercises in Climbing, 



259 



line and not twisted about, wliicli, if such, be tlie case, 
will spoil tbe use of it. Some prefer to bave tbe spars 
inserted into tbeir places after tbe rope is made, but 
that is a minor matter. 

In using tbe sparred rope, tbe bands may grasp tbe 
rope alternately as before, or tbey may botb grasp tbe 
same spar, one on either side, tbe feet being placed botb 
on another spar below. 

JExercises. 

1. — Sit on a bar at any height from the ground pre- 
ferred, having one leg on either side of the rope, and 
sitting as close to it as possible, grasping tbe second or 
third bar above in like manner, viz. one band on either 
side. ^Tow pull tbe body up, and by opening tbe legs 
wide sit on tbe next bar above, passing tbe bands bigher 
up afterwards, and repeat the exercise to the top, or as 
high at first as convenient. 

To descend, the pupil has but to reverse the order by 
opening tbe legs and lowering tbe body, then passing 
tbe bands down, and so on, till be reaches the bottom. 

2. — Sit on a bar as in the last, but grasp the next bar 
above, when lean the body back and let it fall down to 
the fall extent of the arms, letting the feet rise as high 
as possible in tbe air, and tbe legs wide apart, but still 
remaining on tbe bar ; then bring tbe body upright, and 
by passing tbe bands to the next bar raise the body on 
to tbe bar last held by the bands, and repeat the exercise 
ad lihitum. To descend, see tbe last exercise. 

3. — Sit on a bar as before, and grasp the next above it, 
then, as in tbe last, throw the body well back, and open- 

s 2 



260 



Exercises in Climbing. 



ing the legs wide, draw the body np, hj bending the arms 
wbile in that position, and hitch, the legs on the outside 
of the bar beld bj the bands, wben raise the body up, 
and passing the hands on to tbe next bar, repeat the 
exercise as before. In descending let the body fall 
gradually back, lift the legs ttcU up, and be sure they 
are free of the bar before lowering the body, so as to sit 
on the next bar below. 

4. The Plugged Rope. 

This rope partakes somewhat of the knotted rope, and 
is formed by a series of plugs, like a half of an egg in 
shape, being placed about a foot apart, the flat side being 
uppermost, which should measure about four inches in 
diameter. On these plugs the feet may be placed, as 
in the last, or they may be placed on either side alter- 
nately ; but this t^t.11 cause it to be much more dif&cult 
to ascend, owing to the one-sided pressm^e given by the 
feet, when the greater strain to support the body will 
fall upon the arms. 

5. The Pole. 

This apparatus may be either fixed upright or slant- 
ing, or hung in the same manner as the rojoes. They 
should be perfectly smooth and free fr^om any chance of 
splinters being met with. The diameter of the upright 
poles should be from two inches and a half to three 
inches, that of the slanting from three to three and a 
half inches, according to the ages of the pupils, the lat- 
ter one being a little larger from its position. 

1. — The actual position of the hands and feet of the 
climber is precisely the same on the pole, whether on 



Exercises in Climhing. 



261 



the upriglit or slanting, as on tlie ropes (fig. 122), 
altliouo'li, from its increased size, it is more difficult to 
grasp, besides wliicli, the pole not being pliant, like the 
rope, it will not yield to the ]3ressnre of 
the feet. This will cause the body to 
assume a more upright position, yet, by 
right, the body should on no account 
be allowed to touch the pole, as the 
whole action should be made by the 
hands, knees, legs, and feet, and con- 
sists of grasping the pole mth the 
hands, raising the body up by bending 
the arms as in Ex. 9, page 35, when 
it is held by the legs and feet, thereby 
supporting the body while the hands / 
are again raised higher. This is con- 
tinued until the top of the pole is 
reached, when to descend, which is not 
like that on the rope, the pupil has 
but to loosen his hold with his hands ; 
or if preferred, he may remove them 
away altogether, and hold them out 
somewhat loosely, and lessen the pres- 
sure on it with his legs and feet, 
but not too much, when he will de- 
scend it with greater speed than he 
went up. 

2. — The climbing up the slanting pole should be like- 
wise practised, as, OTN^ing to its position, the weight of 
the body is thrown more upon the hands, which conse- 
quently makes it a little more difficult to effect, and it 
is strongly recommended that every one learn both to 



/, 



262 



Exercises in Climhing, 



climb up and slide down a slanting pole, as, in case of 
fire, great assistance miglit be timelj rendered ere tlie 
arrival of tLe now mucb-nsed Fire Escapes. 

3. — Two poles placed about 16 or 18 incbes apaii: will 
afford a good opportunity for tbe gymnast fartber to 
exercise bimself upon, tbougb on tbem tbe bands only 
are to be used, one being placed on eitber, and tben 
used botb at once or alternately. 

4. — Anotber metbod of climbing tbe two poles is to 
grasp eacb witb a band and to pass a leg round eacb. 
after tbe manner of climbing a single pole, and tbas 
working tbe body upwards as before, by alternately using 
tbe bands and legs. 

5. Cbmbing, or ratber mounting tbe pole in tbe same 
manner as mounting tbe board, is to be likewise prac- 
tised, but ere tbat can be done tbe pupil is refeiTcd to 
page 275, wbere tbe manner of acbieving tbat exercise is 
fully described, and tbe instructions tberein contained 
are to be fully carried out in practising it. 

6. Wbere a pole is or can be fixed or bung close to a 
rope, a very good exercise may be practised by using tbe 
two at once, tbus : Climbing tbe rope witb tbe bands as 
before, but passing tbe legs round tbe pole and keep- 
ing tbe body as borizontal as possible, sustaining it 
in tbat position tbrougbout, tbe legs being worked up 
tbe pole in tbe proper way every time tbe bands are 
passed up tbe rope, and tbe movements reversed to 
descend, or else tbe gymnast sbdes down tbe pole only. 
Tbe above T^ill be found to be not only excellent climb- 
ing practice, but good exercise for tbe spine. 



Exercises in Climbing. 263 



6. The Bar-Pole. 

This is constructed similar to tlie "bar- rope, and is a 
combination of tliat and tlie pole, it being a pole of the 
same size as the latter, with bars or spars placed through 
it at given distances, like the bar -rope. Some prefer a 
square pole, but that is of course left to the option of 
the gymnast. 

The exercises to be achieved hereon are similar to 
those given in page 258, to Trhich refer. 

The Ladder. 

The variety of the exercises to be achieved upon this 
apparatus calls for a place to be given it in our gym- 
nasiums. 'No farther description is needed than to state 
that the sides must be perfectly smooth, and, like the 
poles, quite free from splinters. The upright ladders, 
and those placed at various angles, may or may not 
decrease a little in size at the top, but the horizontal 
one must be the same size throughout its whole length. 
The sides should be oval- shaped, though some prefer the 
horizontal one, grooved to meet the requirements of the 
hands and fingers better. The rundles should be about 
twelve inches apart. 

The obhque ladders are placed at various angles, 
ranging from 30° to 60°. In doing exercises on the 
former the distance traversed by the hands in each 
movement is the same as on the latter, but the move- 
ment itself is more difficult on a ladder placed at the 
latter angle, as on that it is upward, while on the former 
it is more longitudinal, there being but little difference 
between it and the ladder placed quite horizontally. 



264 



Exercises in Climhing. 



7. TJie Upriglit Ladder, 

Tlie ladder in tliis position does not admit of a very 
great variety of movements, "but tlie following will be 
found to be very beneficial. 

1. As a preliminary exercise tlie pupil should moimt 
and descend tlie ladder in tlie usual way, viz. the right 
foot on one rundle while the left is on another, the 
hands being placed at the sides and moved alternately 
as each leg is advanced to the next rundle, either above 
or below it. This, as a preliminary exercise to the 
ladder in all its positions, should be practised until con- 
fidence is gained whereby the gymnast may be better 
able to proceed with those requiring a greater amount 
of courage than need be bestowed on such an one as this. 

2. Repeat the above, but move the hands both to- 
gether up the sides, which must be done somewhat 
quicker. 

3. Proceed as before, but gTasping the rundles instead 
of the sides, moving the hands alternately. 

4. Repeat the second exercise, but without jerking 
the body too much. This may be effected by giving the 
body a forward motion at the moment the hands are 
about to be passed to the next rundle. These exercises 
require but little practice. 

5. Place the hands on the rundle opposite to your 
shoulders, then move the feet up until they are on the 
second one below the hands, keeping the legs and arms 
perfectly straight (fig. 123), and in this manner advance 
each leg and hand alternately upwards, descending in 
like manner. The position here required throughout 



Exercises in Climbing, 



265 



will cause a great strain upon the grasp, Trliich must 
consequently be firm, as a mishap would not be pleasant, 
even if the gymnast be 
but two rundles from 
the ground. Therefore 
it would not be well to 
go too high at first ; or 
perhaps, until more sure 
in it, it would be better 
to start from the lowest 
rundles, and advance ad 
libitum. 

6. If two ladders be 
placed at an equal dis- 
tance apart at both ends, 
say from two feet to two 
feet six, similar move- 
ments to the foreo'oino; 
may be effected thereon, the principal difference being 
that the right hand and leg and the left hand and leg 
will always be on the same ladder. 

7. Reaching and stepping up three or four rundles at 
a time with the ladders in this position will gTeatly 
improve the muscles of the arm in pulling the body up 
to make the next step. 

8. TliG Horizontal Ladder. 

The movements on the ladder in this position differ 
greatly from those already described. The following 
are the principal, and it is advisable for every beginner 
to practise all of them. It may be as well to remark 




266 



Exercises in Climhing. 



Fig. 124. 



here, that to each horizontal ladder there should be a 
perpendicular one affixed at one end of it, by which the 
gymnasts are able to reach the other, unless they be tall 
enough to reach it by giving a slight spring. 

1. Mount upon the ladder with the hands on the out- 
side (fig. 124), and move 
them alternately along in a 
similar manner to walking on 
the parallel bars in Ex. 8, 
page 129, where the legs are 
kept perfectly straight, but 
not stiff, while making use 
of the hands, and when the 
opposite end is reached the 
motion of the hands must 
be reversed, thereby walking 
backwards. 

2. Hang on the ladder as 
before, but advance both hands 
at once, by taking a very 
short and sudden spring, 
which may be assisted by 
bringing up the legs a little 
and carrying them down again 
somewhat suddenly, but this 
privileged movement should 
be scarcely perceptible. This 
exercise must be gone thi^ough 
both forwards and backwards (see Ex. 7, page 129). 

3. Hang with both hands on the same rundle, and the 
face towards the lengi:h of the ladder, then with a 
forward spring, with a very slight swing at first, pass 




Exercises in Climbing. 



267 



both hands at once on to the next, and continue to the 
end. Although it is stated that it niaj be done with a 
saving, it is very improper, as the exercise must be done 
without it if it be done properly, and it is wished for 

Fig. 125. 



.C J ^^jj Q Q 




the arms and wrists to reap the required benefit from 
the practice. 

4. Grasp the rnndles of the bars with the hands four 
rundles apart, and, supposing the right hand to be in 
advance, it is required to pass the left in advance of the 



268 



Exercises in Climhing. 



right to the same distance, and so on to tlie end of the 
ladder. This is usually done hj swinging the body to 
and fro sideways, thereby giving it a forward motion, 
when the hiiidermost hand releases its hold to advance 
it before the other, one swing of the legs backwards and 
forwards, letting go the hand on the forward swing, being 
deemed sufficient. After a little practice the pupil will 
be able to increase the number of rundles missed until 
he is able to stretch his arms out each time to their 
utmost (see fig. 125). This is one of the finest exercises 
for the muscles of the arms on this apparatus, and 
should therefore be well practised. 

That the pupils may have a good range for this exer- 
cise, they should have an opportunity of going for at 
least thirty or more feet, according to the space at 
liberty, and the ladder should be suspended not farther 
distant than every ten feet for safety. 

5. If the ladder be sufficiently low, say from fifteen 
to eighteen inches abore the head, the following will 
be found to be a good exercise, whereby a quick and 
firm grasp may be secured. 

Spring up, opening the hands with the knuckles 
uppermost, and spreading out the arms, not too wide at 
first, make a grasp at two of the rundles, say the first 
and tJiird, and suspend yourself therefrom for a short 
time, then drop to the ground ; after a while spring up 
again, hanging from the first and fourth this time, and 
so on, increasing the width gradually, but taking care 
that in springing up the head does not reach the ladder 
before your hands, or you will be likely to feel the 
effects of the collision. 



Exercises in Climhing, 



269 



9. Tlie Hanging Ladder. 
This ladder is hung by two crooks like the Hanging 
Pole, and reaches to Tsdthin a few inches of the ground. 
The nioyements upon it are not varied, but the following 
may be practised, the swinging motion causing the pupil 
to gTasp the sides or rundles firmer. In other respects 
it is similar to the exercises on the Upright Ladder. 

1. Ascend and descend in the ordinary way, i.e. 
grasping the sides with the hands. 

2. Ascend and descend, gTasping the rundles instead 
of the sides. 

3. Ascend on one side, and descend on the other. 

10. The Slanting or Oblique Ladder. 
The ladder placed in a slanting or oblique position 
affords a greater variety of exercises than all the others 
put together. There should be at least two ladders in a 
large gymnasium, fixed at different angles, say one at 
45° the other at 60°, as the movements on ladders at 
different angles differ materially, though the method of 
achieving them is the same. The following are the 
principal : — 

1. Ascend and descend in the ordinary way. 

2. Ascend and descend, grasping the rundles. 

3. Ascend and descend, making use of one hand only, 
first the right, then the left. 

4. Ascend and descend with one hand only, but 
holding something, a dumb bell for instance, in the 
other, using each hand alternately. 

5. Ascend in the regular way, but descend with the 
back turned towards the ladder, but not touching it, the 
hands grasping the sides. 



270 



Exercises in Climbing. 



6. Ascend in tlie usual "way, and descend on tlie other 
side of the ladder, gTasping the rundles of the ladder 
each \vaj. 

7. Ascend and descend, without making any use of 
the hands. The ascent the pupil will soon be able to 
accomplish with ease. In making the descent his back 
must be turned towards the ladder, and in making the 
steps it must be done regularly. At first it would be 
better to have some one to hold his hand in front, until 
he has gained greater confidence to make the steps freely 
and T^ithout fear of falling. This is the chief drawback 
to its being done by beginners. 

8. We now come to the under side of the ladder. 
Grasp the outsides of the ladder with both hands, and 
ascend by moving each alternately as in the Horizontal 
Ladder, descending in like manner, but the steps must 
be made regularly, and the legs kept steady. 

9. Proceed as in the last, but advance both hands at 
once up the sides ; this may be done by bringing up the 
legs and carrying them down again suddenly, thereby 
giving a kind of send to the body. It needs but a little 
practice to effect it properly. 

10. Grasp one of the mndles as high as you can. place 
the feet on a lower one, and ascend and descend in the 
usual way, making use of the hands and feet alternately. 

11. Ascend as in the last, but work the body round 
to the front, and descend on that side. 

12. Grasp a rundle as before, then raise the body up 
as in Ex. 9, page 35. TVhen high enough, let go with the 
rigid hand, and quickly grasp the next nindle above 
(see fig. 126) ; then, raising the body a little higher, pass 
the left hand on to the same rundle as the rigid , and 



Exercises in Climbing. 



271 



repeat the exercise as far up the ladder as convenient. 
K you ascend but four or five rundles you may let go 
botli hands and droj) to the gTound, alightiiag on your 
toes, and bending the knees a little. 

13. Proceed as in the last, but, instead of bringing up 



Fig. 126. 




the left hand on to the same rundle as the rigJit, pass it on 
and grasp the rundle above ; then passing the right on to 
the rundle above the lefi^ and so on, as high as convenient, 
without overtiring yourself. Descend in the same manner, 
by reversing the motion. Practice alone will give the 
pupil the best idea as to how high the body should 



272 



Exercises in Climbing. 



be raised, and wlien to jDass each hand on in advance of 
the other. When able to do it, do it regularly ; let 
there be no sudden jerks, as if unable to make a sure 
step. Let this exercise be practised until perfect in it, 
then the pupil may go on to the next. 

14. Ascend and descend the ladder, making use of 
both hands at once both ways. A slight jerk with the 
legs will assist you, but if able to do it without the better, 
as the body should be raised sufficiently high to be able 
to grasp the next rundle without using them at all. 

15. Ascend the ladder, on the upper side, by the method 
most preferable, then, turning the back towards it, stoop 
down and grasp it on the outside, when, holding on firmly, 
pass the legs up backward, and hitch the toes on a rundle 
as high as convenient, letting them be bent at the hips and 
knees a little, so as to enable you to support the weight of 
the body on the arms, and at some twelve or fifteen inches 
above the ladder. IsTow it is required of the gymnast to 
descend in that position, by alternately using his hands 
and feet, taking care to bend the toes well over the 
hands each time. 

Practice only will enable him to descend in this 
manner freely, but, besides being rather a showy exercise, 
it tends to strengthen the wrists and the muscles of the 
arms and legs very much, and should therefore be well 
persevered in. 

16. Let the above be carried into efi'ect on the under 
side of the ladder, it being here an exercise more for the 
toes and feet than for the hands, they having to sustain 
the chief weight of the body while achieving it. The 
hands must grasp the rundles instead of the outside, as 
in the last. 



Exercises in Climbing. 



273 



17. Lean against tlie ladder ^vitli tlie face towards it 
and the hands close to tlie sides,*grasp the nearest rnndle 
above, and by the sole strength of the arms raise the 
body np, when, by passing one arm at a time on to the 
next, repeat the exercise as often as conyenient. To 
descend, the movement must be reversed, and this 
will be found to be the easiest part of the exercise, 
though care must be taken not to make a false step. 
To facilitate the moving of the arms, the head may be 
turned to the right or left as required, but the body must 
be kept in the same position throughout. 

18. Let the last exercise be repeated with the legs 
open, the lower parts pressing against the outsides of 
the ladder at each movement of the arms ; consequently 
they must be both brought up at once while the body is 
thus suspended. 

19. Repeat the last two exercises, with the back 
against the ladder. Li achieving them in this position 
it will be found necessary to bend the arms outwards, 
unless the distance the rundles are apart will admit of 
its being done otherwise. 

20. Spine Practice. — Ascend the ladder underneath, 
and w^hen about ten or twelve feet from the ground 
bring the legs up, and passing them through the ladder 
between the second and third rundles from the hands, 
carry the body likewise through, then, bending the legs 
back again through the second or third opening below, 
force the body gradually on by the aid of the arms, and, 
on its dropping through underneath, bring up the legs 
again, and hitch them over the third round below until 
the body be completely fi^ee again underneath, when 
repeat the exercise to the bottom. 



274 Exercises in Climbing, 



The gymnast should persevere in this well, until able 
to let but one space be between that which his body 
and legs go through, though at first there may be two. 
Some may, after a time, be able to achieve the exercise 
through every opening, but he who can do this must be 
very yoimg ; some others may be able to carry it into 
effect by freeing the body well each time underneath. 

11. The Bope Ladder. 

This apparatus, though constructed of rope, and 
in point of shape like those just mentioned, had better 
have three or four wooden rundles to keep the sides 
equidistant. In its construction the chief point, next 
to its safety, to be aimed at is, to make it so that it 
Vv^ll always keep straight, and not twist round, as this 
alone renders a rope ladder useless, though every gym- 
nasium, however small, should have one at least for the 
pupils to practise upon. Owing to its being much more 
difficult to mount than the ordinary one, the muscles 
are called more into action, as will be proved on an em- 
bryo gymnast attempting to mount one for the fi.rst time, 
and more especially if he be an adept on the ordinary 
ladder, where the feet either share or bear the weight 
of the body according to the exercise performed, while 
on this the greatest strain falls upon the hands, owing 
to the tendency of the rope ladder to incline backward. 
Therefore, to mount one easily the body must be kept as 
close to the ladder as possible, at the same time upright. 

As there are no exercises in particular to be achieved 
on the Rope Ladder, it will suffice to add that the pujDils 
should not neglect to make use of this apparatus, o^ving 
to the way in which the muscles of the hands and arms 
are brought into action, in addition to those of the legs. 



Exercises in Climbing. 



275 



12. The Plaxk or Boakd. 

This indispensable and requisite apj^aratus in a gym- 
nasium, where space will admit of its being fixed, should 
be about 15 feet long, 12 inches wide, and 2^ inches thick, 
or a little more if needed, as it should bend but very little 
with the movements of the gymnast. It can be fixed at 
any angle, say from 35°, and gradually raised as progress 
is made thereon until able to be exercised ujDon when 
perfectly upright. 

The chief exercise upon the Plank, if at all steep to 
ascend, is to place the hands on the sides, grasping them 
firmly, then ^yit\l both feet placed flat upon the board, 
ascend by alternately mo^-ing the hands and feet in short 
and even steps, the movement being very similar to 
ascending a ladder, though of course the body is here 
bent to the requirements of the apparatus. Care must 
be taken not to let the feet slide down the board while 
descending, as such an event may cause a fall, or some 
other mishap. (See Ex. 5, page 264.) 

13. The Sparred Plaxk. 

This apparatus, though a great addition to those 
already mentioned, is very seldom to be met with in 
any gymnasium, and is consequently very little kno^vn 
or j)ractised upon ; but as the parts chiefly brought 
into action, in using it, are the wrists, arms, spine, 
hips, legs, and the whole of the muscles, including the 
spine, &c., it must be e^ddent that the whole of the body 
must derive great benefit from it, be it practised upon 
by the pupil or the more advanced gymnast. Therefore 
it is to be hoped that a spare corner will be found in every 



276 



Exercises in Climbing. 



gymnasmni, whereon tlie members may exercise them- 
selves and reap the fall reward. 

To construct the Sparred Plank is very simple, thongh 
it can be constrncted in different ways, according to the 
means of the gymnast. It may consist of but a thick plank 
of wood aboutl2 inches wide, and of any length, generally 
from 15 to 20 feet, according to its position, with a series 
of spars fitted strongly on the back part : these spars must 
be made square, with the exception of the handles, which 
are round, and project about 8 inches on each side (see 
fig. 127). If, instead of the above, the plank be of a suf- 
ficient thickness to admit of it, the spars may be sunk into 
it, which will greatly tend to keep them in their place, 
i^ow, when such a construction is required, it would be 
much better to construct a hollow case of the requisite 
width (12 inches) and depth (about 6 inches), when the 
spars should be first let into the sides so as to be flush on 
the top with their edges ; then the underneath part may 
be fixed on, whereby they may receive additional sti^ngth 
by being likewise fixed to it, the square j^arts being now 
completely hid from sight, except the ends. Should it 
be desirable to render this apparatus more tasteful, it 
may be constructed as if two ladders, the width of 
the length the spars are to project beyond the plank, 
were to be substituted for the spars, as above ; but in this 
case they would have to be square in the middle, as 
before, as the plank of itself would not be strong enough 
to bear the wear and tear it would be subject to. The 
upper side of the plank should be very smooth and free 
from splinters, and, if preferred, it may be polished. It 
may be fixed at any angle, varying :^rom 50 to 60 degrees 
or more, if preferred ; but the more upright the more dif- 



Exercises in Climbing. 277 



ficult are some of tlie exercises to acliieYe, and conse- 
quently the less tlie angle the less the difficulty, according 



Fig. 127. 




to the position of the body while practising. 

IN'ow these planks may be made of various forms, and 
placed in various positions ; they may be made straight, 
as already described, or they may be made curved, first, 
CONCAVE, i.e. hollow, like the inside of a circle; secondly, 
CONVEX, i.e. round, like the outside of a circle. In either 
case, the difficulty of achieving the exercises on them is 



278 



Exercises in Climhing. 



reversed. Thus, supposing tlie Concave plank to be made 
sufficiently large, tlie gjronast would have to lie on Ms 
back to begin, and by tbe time be reacbed tbe top tbe po- 
sition of bis body would be uprigbt, altbougli as far from 
tbe ground as the height of the apparatus would admit ; 
whilst, on the Convex plank, it would be necessary for the 
pupil to stand upright or lean a little back against it to 
begin, finishing thereby on his back. The top part of 
these curved planks are to be fixed against the wall in 
the same manner as the oblique one. 

There is another method of fixiing this apparatus, 
which, if room will admit of it, should be made use of 
in addition to the before mentioned, viz. to have two 
of each of the curved ones and place the tops of the 
Concave or Convex planks together, when the former 
would represent the barbed point of an arrow, the latter 
a pointed arch ; or the top of a Convex may be placed 
on that of a Concave. Either or all of these positions 
would add greatly to the appearance of the gymnasium, 
the chief advantage of this arrangement being that two 
pupils can be exercising themselves upon each at the 
same time ; but when complete, they must be securely 
fixed to the floor in the place where they are to remain, 
with strong iron brackets and cross stays underneath, to 
prevent them from shifting from their places, or from 
falling over. 

The follo^T-Ug are the principal 

Exercises. 

1. Lean against the plank with the face towards it, 
then, stretching the arms well up, grasp a spar on each 
side with the hands, bend the legs up sideways, place 



Exercises in Climbing. 



279 



the toes on a spar or two up, and force tlie boclv np by 
straightening them, when, grasping the spar as before, 
the exercise may be repeated ad libitura. 

2. Proceed as in the last, but without using the feet, 
therefore the body must be raised solely by the arms, as 
in Ex. 9, page 35, when one hand must be released and 
passed onward ere the other one can be ; but in both 
cases, the act of suspending or retaining the body in the 
same position falls on each arm alternately. 

3. Repeat the first exercise, by making use of one leg 
at a time, thereby advancing upward as up a ladder, and 
let it be persevered in, as the actions of the legs are 
totally different to those in the Ladder exercises. 

4. Proceed as in the second exercise, but use one hand 
only in raising the body, passing the other forward to be 
in readiness to grasp the nearest spar directly the body 
is as high as you are able to raise it, and repeat the 
exercises as often as convenient, taking care to descend 
in like manner, but by reversing the motion. 

5. Turn the back towards the plank and lie upon it, 
then proceed as in the first exercise, with the exception 
of bending the knees more outward instead of sideways. 

6. This exercise is achieved in the same manner as 
the second, and consists in raising the body solely by the 
aid of the arms, only it must be done on the back instead : 
but it will be found to be a Httle more difficult, owing: to 
the difference in the position of the arms. 

7. With the back on the plank as before, endeavour, 
as in the third exercise, to force the body upward by 
making use use of but one leg at a time, and let it and 
the next be well practised until able to accomplish them 
with ease. 



280 



Exercises in Climbing. 



8. Strive, while on your back, to piill up tlie IdocIv by 
■asing each, arm alternately, as in the fouith exercise, and 
do not yield, if unable to do it after a few times tidying. 

9. With the arms at the side lie on the plank, and by 
bending the elbows grasj^ the next spai^, and by the sole 
strength of the arms force yourself up the plank, placing 
the feet on the spars while passing it on to the next. 

10. TTith the face towards the ^^lank, repeat the last 
exercise. 

11. Let the sixth exercise be repeated, with the leo-s 
bent at the hips only, and kept perfectly at right angles 
with the body while raising the body with the arais only. 

12. Repeat the fourth exercise, but with the arms 
down at the side, as in the ninth. This will be found 
extremely difficult, and T^ill requii^e great practice to be 
able to achieve it, 

13. In like manner repeat the tenth exercise, A^-ith one 
arm only. 

The following exercises refer only to the plank, when 
placed nearly level v^ith the floor, or at an angle of 
15^ ^ • 

14. Lie upon the plank, and achieve any of the fore- 
going exercises. 

15. With the face towards it, strive to accomplish any 
or all of the preceding exercises, 

16. Sit u-pon the plank with the feet towards its 
length, and, grasping the s^^ars opposite or near to the 
knees firmly, pull the body upwards, when, passing the 
hands to the next spar, repeat the exercise, 

17. Sit upon the plank, with the back towards its 
length, and, grasping the spars nearest to you tirnily, 
force yourself backwards up the plank. 



The Giant's Stride. 



281 



TflE GIANT'S STRIDE. 

The Giant's Steide, Flying Course, Flving Step, or 
by ^vhatsoever name it is best known, is reckoned one of 
the best Gymnastic Apparatus that can ^^ossibly be fixed 
in any 23lace, a garden or playground, even if there be 
nothing else to keep it company. It not . only amuses 
children of all ages, from the sometimes awkward posi- 
tion they are put in if they do not balance themselves 
as they ought (that only comes by practice), but it 
strengthens them to such a degree, without their per- 
ceiving it, that the oftener it is brought into use by 
them the greater will be the benefit derived therefrom. 
Xext to children, it is a good apparatus for embryo 
gymnasts to practise upon every day, or, if they like, 
three or four times a day will do them more good than 
harm; but, like many other things, it is soon put on 
one side, chiefly from the want of knowing how to make 
use of it properly and to their own advantage. It differs 
very much in the mode of its construction, and in its use, 
from all other apparatus ; it differs very much in its 
effects upon those who make use of it. Scarcely any other 
apparatus possesses so many advantages as this one does. 
Take, for example, a bitterly cold frosty morning ; what 
beneficial effects a few minutes' practice around it will 
have upon you! The benefits are innumerable: no matter 



282 



The Gianfs Stride, 



how often, or for wliat length of time yon practise npon 
it. Each time yon derive additional benefit fi^om it ; it 
all adds to the already accnmnlating stock ; therefore 
practise npon it to yonr heart's content, for no evil can 
or will arise if nsecl in a proper manner, i.e. if you keep 
the body straight and look the way you are going. 

Description of Appaeatus. — There are two methods 
of constructing the Giant's Stride ; viz. 1. With a Pole. 
2. Without a Pole. 

1. With a Pole,— This, for the present, is taken for 
the proper way of erecting such an apparatus. Let 
us therefore get a long straight larch or fir pole, fi^eed 
from all branches and bark ; let it be smooth and well 
seasoned, and then painted with three or four coats of 
paint ; and let the bottom part be charred, to preserve 
it the longer while in the ground, or else encase it in 
iron, as in Article 2, page 20. The pole should be 
about 14 or 16 feet high above the ground, the higher 
the better, and at least feet 6 feet should be allowed to 
sink into the ground, whereby to fix it securely. Of 
course the higher the pole the longer will the ropes be 
required ; but then it must be remembered, that the 
longer the ropes the greater will be the distance to be 
travelled in going round, and the higher can a jump 
be made. The higher the pole above the ground the 
deeper must it be sunk into it, as a pole 30 feet above 
the ground should be at least 10 feet below it. An iron 
cap is the next thing, and this is fitted tight on the top 
of the pole, to prevent it from sphtting, and likewise 
to make the bearing more solid for the j)ivot to work 
upon from which the ropes are suspended. Many prefer 



The Gianfs Stride, 



283 



a large conical cap, made of sheet iron, placed on the 
extreme top over the pivot to keep it dry, and so pre- 
vent the lain from getting down into the jDOst through 
the hole made by the pin which 
fixes the pivot. According to 
the number of ropes to be sus- 
pended must the number of 
hooks in the pivot be : some 
have four, others have six, and 
some even eight to very high 
poles. The pivot, &c., should 
be fixed so as to rotate easily 
prior to raising the pole into 
its proper place, when it should 
be secured to keep it from 
shifting, as in fig. 128, and, 
by the aid of some stout pegs, 
a few inches long, fixed in 
alternate sides, the rope may 
be hooked on. At the ends of 
each rope a strong ash bar, 
about two feet long by one 
inch and a quarter thick, is 
fixed, or, if preferred, a round / A :\ \^ 

ring, similar to those used in / / 1 ; '\ 

the Rings, page 175, maybe //' I ; \\ 
used instead. /'/' I I 

2. Without a Pole.— The // \ ! \ 

only difference between this \ I 

and the former method is 
the pole, as the ropes re- 
volve by means of the pivot, as before, but, instead 




284 



The Giant's Stride. 



of its resting on the top of the ^^ost, it Tvorks upon the 
head of a large bolt fixed into a beam in the centre 
of a large building, such as the grninasium at Liver- 
pool ; and if space ttlII admit of it, this is gTeatly to be 
preferred. 

[It must be borne in mind that, although no particu- 
lar way is stated in the following exercises to go round, 
every exercise should be practised both ways until able 
to achieve them as well one way as the other.] 

Exercises. 

1. Grasp a bar or ring (whichever is fix:ed to the 
end of the ropes), and keep running round with rather 
long steps, which, as you get used to it. you will be able 
so to increase as to go once round in two steps ; hence 
the name of Giant's Stride. During this practice the 
body should be at the same angle as the rope, and con- 
sequently in a line with it. 

2. Proceed as before, with short steps, and, by touch- 
ing the ground with the toes of one foot as opportunities 
occui\ keep the body constantly turning round, but in 
such a manner that the face shall be in its proper posi- 
tion after each revolution. 

3. Proceed as in the first exercise, making as long a 
stride as possible, and when going round high from the 
ground, brine the legs straight together, and. letting the 
arms be over the head, give the whole body a movement 
round quickly, thereby describing a large circle with the 
feet. After a little practice you will be able to repeat 
this movement three or four times dui^ing each stride, 
but the body must not be allowed to revolve as in the 
last, the face beine towards the wav vou tlirous'hout. 



Exercises w the Gianfs Stride. 



285 



4. One at a time, and witli a rope or strong cord 
lield across, let each, gymnast practise jumping over it, 
Avhich, in liigli jnmps, is accomplislied hj drawing the 
bodj completely up, sometimes almost above the ring, in 
order to escape the string. A very good way is to get 
two to hold the rope, then, as each fails to clear the 
height, let him resign his place to the next, and he, in 
his turn, hold tlie rope, so the one who clears it the 
oftenest of course practises the longest. 



286 



The Gynometer. 



THE GYMXOMETEE, POLYMACHIXOX OE 
COMPOUND CHEST MACHLXE, 

This Gymxastic Apparatus is a verv eflPective contriv- 
ance, containing upwards of 100 different exercises, all 
tlie movements acting upon one set of tt eights, so that 
tlie gymnast can gradually increase it as he becomes 
stronger, or decrease it at pleasure. It is so highly 
finished, and in itself so handsome a piece of mechan- 
ism, that it can be placed in a dressing-room, where 
it may be practised upon at leisure. The various ex- 
ercises of hanging by the hands, arms, and legs, and 
pulling in various ways, either sitting or standing, back- 
ward or forward, upward or downward, all tend to bring 
the whole of the muscles into full play. 

The price of such an apparatus varies, according to 
the number of movements it contains, and the style of 
finish, but it ranges fi^om 57. upwards (see page 7). 

The following list vdll convey some idea of the several 
parts, the numbers round the illustration being pl|gecl 
as near as possible opposite the several parts (see fig. 
129). 




1. Trapeze Bar. T x> i i 
TT • ^ J -o inese lour are suspencled 

2. Hanoino: Knotted Kopes. ^i ^ • ^• 

o r.,- ^ • ^1 1 } trorn the two proiectm^' 

3. btirrup Exercises lor the less. ( ^ ^ ^^ ^ 

. 1 T , . ^ 'jeams at the top. 

4. Overhead ±.xercises. J ^ 

5. Bottom Saw;\'er. 

6. Chest Expander. 

7. Chest Expander. 

8. Velocipede Exercise. 

9. Top Sawyer. 

10. Eowing Exercise. 

11. Exercise for Legs and lower part of the Body. 

12. Sofa which fits into the machine when not required. 



288 



Bowing Apparatus. 



ROWING APPAEATUS. 

This being an addition to a public gymnasium that is 
very much, wanted, tliougli many possess a shell of a 
boat with the necessary appliances of oars, &c., without 
the needful mechanism whereby the art of rowing may 
be learnt as easily out of the water as in it, the Author 
having perfected such a contrivance on three different 
principles, hopes shortly to bring it before the public, 
when it can be made use of and patronised according as 
its merits deserve. It may be stated, that it has received 
the approbation of every one who has seen the models, 
and the method of working it. 



Gymnastic See-Saiv, 



289 



GYMNASTIC SEE-SAW. SWINGING HAND 
LADDEES. 

Remarks. — These contrivances are becoming more in 
use in Clubs and private families than formerly. We most 
of us recollect the old See-saw, of times gone by, how 
we passed up and down in the air on a plank nicely 
balanced in the middle ; the gymnastic See- saw is a 
similar contrivance, and for a similar purpose, though, 
by being placed six or seven feet from the ground, it is 
practised upon by hanging by the hands, instead of in a 
sitting posture as of old. The exhilarating effects of five 
minutes' practice on a gymnastic See- saw will send a 
glow through the whole system, and invigorate those 
who practise upon it wonderfully. It is so simply made, 
that, where there is a family, the younger members of 
it should have one whereon to practise, and even 
grown-up persons of both sexes can practise upon it to 
advantage ; but those who aspire to the more advanced 
exercises in gymnastics will be able to achieve the 
swing in the proper way, as is stated in the exercises 
below. 

The Swinging Hand Ladder is made use of for a 
similar purpose as the above, though of a more simple 
construction. 



U 



290 



Gymnastic See-Saiv. 



Deschiption of Apparatus. 

1. Gymnastic See-Saw. — TMs apparatus can be con- 
structed according to the means at hand. The most 
simple is made like a ladder, but with bars a few inches 
longer, say about 18 inches, the sides being about 7 feet 
long (the longer it is the higher it must be placed), and 
the same distance apart throughout ; the two end bars 
may be a little larger, and of a suitable size to be grasped 
easily, such as the trapeze bar. On the under part of 
the ladder across the middle is fixed an iron rod, about 
seven- eighths of an inch in diameter, and projecting 2 
inches on each side. These ends rest in deep iron sockets, 
fixed in the sides of two posts at a suitable height. These 
posts are to be raised similar to those required for a 
swing, though not so high, and, if preferred, the sides 
may be flat, which would look better ; a cross piece must 
be fixed on the top of the posts, to keep them in their 
places, and at the true distance apart, and when the 
ladder is placed in the sockets it is ready for use. 

2. Another method of constructing this ajDparatus is 
to have it made entirely of iron, flat or othermse, and 
in the form of a spindle, large in the middle, and taper- 
ing, top and bottom, gradually to the ends, so that the 
ends may seem flat, the end bars being then placed 
across them, and the axle on which it works placed 
through the centre. If preferred, two small handles may 
be made at each end, similar to a stirrup in shape, the 
gymnast then gTas23ing one in either hand, which will 
amount to the same thing, but his hands are thereby 



The Swinging Sand Ladder, 



291 



confined to one certain place. If made of a neat and 
light network pattern it lias a very pretty appearance 
wlien fixed. The ends may or may not be turned doAvn 
a little, but that is immaterial to the achieving of the 
exercises. 

2. The Swinging' Hand Ladder. — This, as is before 
stated, is a much more simple Eig. 130. 



contrivance. Fig.lSOrejDresents 
tTTO portions of a rope ladder 
with wooden bars : these ladders 
are suspended from a rope pass- 
ing over two pulleys about 
6 feet apart, one being at 
either end. The pulleys may 
be placed in any high beam, but 
the ladders, or at least one of 
them, should reach to about 4 
feet of the ground, w^hen the 
other would be considerably up 
towards the other pulley. This 
apparatus is used in a similar 




manner to the See- saw, though the chief exercise is not 
so easy to achieve upon it. 

Ijd:ercises. 

1. Let two gymnasts or pupils grasp each a bar, one 
at either end (if it be the Swinging Hand Ladder, it 
must be grasped up as far as possible, the lower bars 
being for younger children), then, by a spring with the 
toes, first one then the other, they are raised alternately 
up in the air, according to the position of the opposite 

u 2 



292 



The Swinging Hand Ladder, 



bar, and this may be repeated for sorae miniites, as in so 
practising it exercises tlie legs as well as the arms, and 
it lias an effect upon the body similar to that caused by 
practising upon the Giant's Stride. 

2. This exercise is more for advanced gymnasts. 
Proceed as in the last, but every time the feet are raised 
from the ground, achieve Ex. 57, page 65, thereby 
carrying the body up above the bar ; but it must be 
again lowered on dropping, repeating it every time a 
s^Dring is made, and for some tvelve or twenty times 
without stopping. This will be found to be excellent 
practice for the wrists. 

3. Achieve the above, and carry Ex. 57, page 65, into 
effect every time, without letting the feet touch the 
gTOund, which, if done at the right time, viz. the up 
movement given at the same time that the gymnast at 
the opposite end drops his body below, the effect will 
be much gTeater, and the swing may be continued ad 
lihitu'tii. 



The Storming Board. 



293 



THE STOEMING BOAED. 

Eemarl's. — As jumping is tlie finest and most usefiil 
of all corporeal exercises, so various apparatus are de- 
signed, wliereby a jump is obligatory. One such an ap- 
paratus is the Storming Board, and gymnasts, who wish 
to bring their jumping powers into full play, cannot err 
in making some little use of a contrivance as the ac- 
companying illustration (fig. 131) represents. 

Descriptiox of Apparatus. — 1. A glance at the en- 
graving given on the next page will clearly show the 
method of constructing it. It consists of two blocks of 
wood 3 feet long, and thinner at one end than at the 
other. On each of these blocks is fixed, by means of 
strong iron brackets, a 3-feet hollow pillar, in which an- 
other pillar works, similar to that described in page 122, 
only a little stouter made : both the blocks and pillars 
are kept at their proper distance apart, by means of cross 
pieces, and on the top piece rests the edge of the board, 
which is 9 feet long, and about 2 feet 6 inches wide. 
Holes, corresponding one with the other, are made 
through each pillar, to enable the board to be raised to 
any required height, viz. from 3 to 6 feet. 



The Storming Board, 



295 



2. Another method of constmcting the Storming 
Board is, to make the ascending part in the form of stairs 
to the required height, the sides being then sohd. The 
only disadvantage in this mode of making it is, that it 
must always remain at the same height ; otherwise it 
might be preferred, as it is chiefly for the height of the 
top step that it is used, but this would better suit lesser 
pupils. 

Exercises. 

1. Run up the board, and, by giving a slight spring 
forward on reaching the top, alight on the ground on 
your toes, which, by slightly bending the knees on 
touching the ground, greatly lessens the shock of the 
descent. This should be practised, gTadually increasing 
the height, until able to jump from the board when at 
its highest. 

2. Proceed as in the last, but on giving the spring do 
it with as much force forward as possible, so as to alight 
at some distance from the stand, and practise it until 
able to increase the distance in proportion to the height 
the stand is raised. 

3. Proceed as in the last, but by fijdng the Pole 
Leaping Stand in front, with a cord stretched across, 
practise and jump as high and as far as you can. This 
will be found excellent practice, especially if several join 
together and each tries, after a time, to outdo the others. 

4. Proceed with the first exercise, and on reaching 
the top turn round and jump off backwards. Let this 
be done slowly at first, to learn the correct movement of 
the legs and the method of alighting, so as to fall neither 
forward nor backward. It requires but little practice. 



296 J iimpmg — Leaping — Po le-Leaping . 



JUMPING. LEAPING. POLE-LEAPING. 

BeviarJiS. — Jumping is here placed first, as it consists 
of the most simple kind of leaping on level ground, and 
is chiefly so called to distinguish it from jumping over a 
height, which is called Leaping, be it with or without a 
pole : if with a pole, it is styled Pole-Leaping. Jumping 
and leaping may be performed with or without a run, and 
Walker, in his 'Manly Exercises,' observes, that 'In all 
kinds of Leaping it is of great importance to draw in and 
retain the breath at the moment of the greatest effort, as 
it give the chest more solidity to support the rest of the 
members, impels the blood into the muscular parts, and 
increases their strength. The hands also should be shut, 
and the arms pendant. The extent of the leap, in height 
or horizontally, is proportioned to the power employed, 
and the practice acquired. As it is performed with 
facility only in proportion to the strength exerted, and 
the elasticity and suppleness of the articulations and 
muscles of the lower extremities, much exercise is 
necessary to attain that degree of perfection which 
lessens all obstacles, and supplies the means of clearing 
them without danger. Lightness and firmness are the 
qualities necessary for leaping ; everything should be 
done to acquire these two qualifications, for, without 
them, leaping is neither gracefal nor safe.' 



Jumping — Leaping — Pole- Leaping. 297 



As with, gymnastics generally, so with jumping and 
leaping: tlie length and the height must be increased as 
the gymnast acquires expertness; he must not strive to 
do more than his known powers will allow, but gradually 
advance as his strength admits. 

Jumping without a Run. — The gymnast must toe the 
line from which he is to start, and on alighting, although 
that should be done on the fore part of the feet, and with 
an inclination forward, an impress of the heel should, if 
possible, be made, as it is from the toe mark at starting 
to that made by the heel on ahghting that the distance 
of the jump is reckoned. 

Jumping with a Run. — In carrying this into efiPect a 
distance of ten or twelve paces will have to be passed over 
by the gymnast, the pace gradually increased to the start- 
ing-point, when, by again toeing the mark, he launches 
himself into the air about two feet six inches from the 
ground, and owing to the forward spring of the toes, 
from whichever foot the spring is made, he is carried so 
much the further forward as the increased momentum 
given to him by the run admits. The distance jumped is 
measured as before, and in competitions these two added 
together show the result of the contest, although one 
may have jumped farther without, and another farther 
with the run ; therefore, to be what is termed a good 
jumper, he must be able to jump well in both ways. 

Leaping without the Run. — This is usually performed 
over a cord suspended between two uprights, and kept 
tight by means of two small bags filled with sand, but 
it is now superseded by small round laths, of a suf&cient 
thickness to ensure their keeping moderately straight, 
as in fig. 132, which will convey a pretty good idea of 



298 Jumping — Leajoing — Pole-Leaping, 

the manner of constructing a strong stand. The lath is 
preferred to the cord, for the chief reason that if, on going 

Fig. 132. 




over it, it is touched at all by the leaper, it is sure to fall^ 
whereas the cord requires a much stronger sign, which 
would not be sufl&ciently fair for contests. 

Leaping with a Run, — The height started from is 
generally that last cleared without a run, and the height 
gradually increased as the gymnast progresses ; the 
heights of the two, with and without the run, added to- 
gether, deciding which has the best of the competition. 

Pole-Leaping, — This is practised with but a few, and 
fewer practise it in leaping over a distance, height being 
their chief aim. For this purpose a high stand is required, 
as shown in fig. 133. It is constructed in precisely the 
same manner as the preceding, but of stouter material, 
and wider cross-pieces at the bottom. It should be at 



Jim2)ing--Lea2nng-- Pole-Leapi7ig > 299 



least 12 feet liigli.* The pole should be made of straight- 
grained ash, 12 feet long, the bottom end being capped 
Fig. 133. 




,-with a stout ring of iron or brass, and toothed to make 
a firmer hold when placed upon the ground, 

^- These stands are suppUed by Messrs. Snoxell and Spencer, at 
the following prices : — 

£ s, d. 

Jumping Stand, from . . . , . 110 
Pole-Leaping Stand, from , . . . 2 10 



LONDON 

PKINTKD BY SPO T TISTVO DE AND CO. 
NEW-STEBET SQTJAEE 





^^^^^ 



r ^- ^ D ^, ^ 



i 



-7 




^ « K 



